Introduction to Web Development with MS VS 2010...
QuickStart Intelligence
O F F I C I A L
M I C R O S O F T
L E A R N I N G
P R O D U C T
10267A Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Volume 1
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
ii
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Information in this document, including URL and other Internet Web site references, is subject to change without notice. Unless otherwise noted, the example companies, organizations, products, domain names, e-mail addresses, logos, people, places, and events depicted herein are fictitious, and no association with any real company, organization, product, domain name, e-mail address, logo, person, place or event is intended or should be inferred. Complying with all applicable copyright laws is the responsibility of the user. Without limiting the rights under copyright, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the express written permission of Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights covering subject matter in this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license agreement from Microsoft, the furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property. The names of manufacturers, products, or URLs are provided for informational purposes only and Microsoft makes no representations and warranties, either expressed, implied, or statutory, regarding these manufacturers or the use of the products with any Microsoft technologies. The inclusion of a manufacturer or product does not imply endorsement of Microsoft of the manufacturer or product. Links may be provided to third party sites. Such sites are not under the control of Microsoft and Microsoft is not responsible for the contents of any linked site or any link contained in a linked site, or any changes or updates to such sites. Microsoft is not responsible for webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any linked site. Microsoft is providing these links to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply endorsement of Microsoft of the site or the products contained therein. © 2010 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Microsoft, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Product Number: 10267A Part Number: X17-47855 Released: 07/2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
iii
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
iv
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
v
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
vi
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
vii
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
viii
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Acknowledgements Microsoft Learning would like to acknowledge and thank the following for their contribution towards developing this title. Their effort at various stages in the development has ensured that you have a good classroom experience.
Carsten Thomsen—Subject Matter Expert Carsten Thomsen is an independent consultant who has worked since 1990 as a software developer, analyst, architect, and author. He holds a number of Microsoft certifications, including MCTS and MCPD, in various tools and applications, including the Microsoft® .NET Framework, Microsoft Visual Basic®, Microsoft Visual C#®, and Microsoft Office SharePoint® Server 2007. He works with architecture, research, analysis, development, and troubleshooting, and spends countless hours with the Windows® operating system and many other Microsoft server products, including Hyper-V™ and SQL Server®.
Toi Wright—Technical Reviewer Toi is an independent consultant who has worked as a software developer for over 25 years. She has a Bachelor of Science degree in Computer Science and Engineering from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, and a Master of Business Administration degree from Carnegie Mellon University. She has been a Microsoft MVP in ASP and ASP.NET since 2005. Toi is responsible for creating a national initiative for Microsoft, and its partners in starting We Are Microsoft, (www.wearemicrosoft.com), a community based partnership between IT professionals and local non-profits. She has been a leader and organizer of technical user groups in the Dallas, Texas area for over 10 years. She is currently the President of the Dallas ASP.Net User Group, www.dallasasp.net. She is the founder of Geeks in Pink, www.geeksinpink.org.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
ix
Contents Module 1: Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010 Lesson 1: Introduction to the .NET Framework
1-3
Lesson 2: Overview of ASP.NET
1-15
Lesson 3: Overview of the Lab Application
1-32
Module 2: Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages Lesson 1: Choosing a Programming Language
2-3
Lesson 2: Overview of Visual Studio 2010
2-13
Lesson 3: Creating a Simple Web Application
2-26
Lab: Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-41
Module 3: Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form Lesson 1: Creating Web Forms
3-3
Lesson 2: Adding and Configuring Server Controls in a Web Form
3-10
Lab: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form
3-27
Module 4: Adding Functionality to a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form Lesson 1: Working with Code-Behind Files
4-3
Lesson 2: Handling Server Control Events
4-11
Lesson 3: Creating Classes and Components by Using Visual Studio 2010
4-26
Lesson 4: Handling Page Events
4-44
Lab: Adding Functionality to a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form
4-51
Module 5: Implementing Master Pages and User Controls Lesson 1: Creating Master Pages
5-3
Lesson 2: Adding User Controls to an ASP.NET Web Form
5-20
Lab: Implementing Master Pages and User Controls
5-35
Module 6: Validating User Input Lesson 1: Overview of User Input Validation
6-3
Lesson 2: ASP.NET Validation Controls
6-8
Lesson 3: Validating Web Forms
6-28
Lab: Validating User Input
6-33
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
x
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module 7: Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications Lesson 1: Debugging in ASP.NET
7-3
Lesson 2: Tracing in ASP.NET
7-17
Lab: Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications
7-25
Module 8: Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application Lesson 1: Overview of ADO.NET
8-3
Lesson 2: Connecting to a Database
8-13
Lesson 3: Managing Data
8-23
Lab: Managing Data in an ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-36
Module 9: Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ Lesson 1: Overview of LINQ
9-3
Lesson 2: Managing XML Data by Using LINQ to XML
9-21
Lesson 3: Managing SQL Data by Using LINQ to SQL and LINQ to Entities
9-40
Lab: Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-58
Module 10: Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data Lesson 1: Overview of ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-3
Lesson 2: Applying ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-24
Lesson 3: Customizing ASP.NET Dynamic Data Applications
10-34
Lab: Managing Data by Using ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-46
Module 11: Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application Lesson 1: Introduction to Ajax
11-3
Lesson 2: Creating an ASP.NET Ajax Application by Using the Ajax Features for ASP.NET
11-9
Lesson 3: Extending an ASP.NET Web Forms Application by Using the Ajax Control Toolkit
11-29
Lab: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-38
Module 12: Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services Lesson 1: Overview of Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-3
Lesson 2: Calling Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-12
Lesson 3: Working with WCF Data Services
12-23
Lab: Consuming Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-36
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
About This Course
xi
About This Course This section provides you with a brief description of the course, audience, suggested prerequisites, and course objectives.
Course Description This five-day instructor-led course provides knowledge and skills on developing Web applications by using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010.
Audience This course is intended for Web developers who are beginners, and have knowledge of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) or Dynamic HTML (DHTML), along with some knowledge of a scripting language such as Microsoft Visual Basic® Scripting Edition or Microsoft JScript®. Students are required to have the following skills: •
Ability to construct a simple Web page by using a Microsoft application, or by using a third party tool. For example, create or customize a Web page on a Microsoft SharePoint® 2010 site.
Student Prerequisites Students should have at least one month of experience in Microsoft .NET technologies. In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should have the following technical knowledge: •
•
Knowledge of HTML or DHTML, including: •
Tables
•
Images
•
Forms
Programming experience using Visual Basic .NET or Microsoft Visual C#® .NET, including: •
Declaring variables
•
Using loops
•
Using conditional statements
The completion of Course 2667, “Introduction to Programming”, satisfies the preceding prerequisite programming skills requirement.
Course Objectives After completing this course, students will be able to: •
Explore Microsoft ASP.NET Web applications in Visual Studio 2010.
•
Create Web applications by using Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft .NET–based languages.
•
Create an ASP.NET Web Form.
•
Add functionality to an ASP.NET Web Form.
•
Implement master pages and user controls.
•
Validate user input.
•
Debug ASP.NET 4.0 Web applications.
•
Manage data in an ASP.NET 4.0 Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
xii
About This Course
•
Manage data access tasks by using language-integrated query (LINQ).
•
Manage data by using ASP.NET Dynamic Data.
•
Create an ASP.NET Ajax application.
•
Consume Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services.
•
Manage state in Web applications.
•
Configure and deploy an ASP.NET Web application.
•
Secure an ASP.NET Web application.
•
Implement new technologies supported by Visual Studio 2010 for Web development.
Course Outline This section provides an outline of the course: Module 1, “Exploring Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010” explains the key features of the Microsoft .NET Framework and Microsoft ASP.NET. This module helps you view the complete Web application that you build in the labs throughout this course. Module 2, “Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages” describes the different programming languages that are available when you develop Microsoft .NET Framework applications. This module explains the fundamental aspects of writing code and creating components by using two of the .NET Framework–based languages, Visual Basic and Visual C#. It also provides an overview of Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and explains how to create a simple Web application. Module 3, “Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form” explains how to create Web Forms, and then populate them with server controls. Module 4, “Adding Functionality to a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form” describes the various methods that you can use to add code to your Microsoft ASP.NET Web application. It explains how to use Web server controls, event handlers, code-behind files, and components. In addition, it explains how to use page events, especially the Page_Load event. Module 5, “Implementing Master Pages and User Controls” explains how to create and implement master pages, and how to implement user controls in a Web application. Module 6, “Validating User Input” provides an overview of user input validation. It covers information on adding, positioning, and configuring validation controls on a Web Form. In addition, it covers information on validating Web Forms. Module 7, “Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications” describes the steps required to enable tracing and debugging, including how you can use tracing and debugging in a Web application. Module 8, “Managing Data in a Microsoft ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application” provides an overview of Microsoft ADO.NET. It explains how to programmatically work with data by using ADO.NET, and how to create a connection to access the data that is stored in a Microsoft SQL Server database. In addition, it explains how to use the DataSet and DataReader objects to support the local data storage and data manipulation requirements of Web Forms. Module 9, “Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ” explains what LINQ is, and how you can use it to manage both XML data and Microsoft SQL Server® data in an ASP.NET Web application by using Web Server controls and code.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
About This Course
xiii
Module 10, “Managing Data by Using Microsoft ASP.NET Dynamic Data” provides an overview of ASP.NET Dynamic Data, and covers information on applying ASP.NET Dynamic Data. This module also explains how to customize ASP.NET Dynamic Data applications. Module 11, “Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Ajax-Enabled Web Forms Application” provides an overview of ASP.NET Ajax, and explains how to create an ASP.NET Ajax application. It also introduces the ASP.NET Ajax Control Toolkit, and explains how to install the toolkit and add controls from the toolkit to a Web application. Module 12, “Consuming Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation Services” provides an overview of WCF services. It describes how to discover and consume useful WCF services within their Web applications. Students will also learn why and when to create their own WCF services. Module 13, “Managing State in Web Applications” explains how to manage state in an ASP.NET Web application. Module 14, “Configuring and Deploying a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Application” explains how to configure and deploy an ASP.NET Web application by using the machine.config and web.config files. Module 15, “Securing a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Application” explains the various Web application security functionalities. It also covers information on the infrastructure that is required to build and deploy various Web application security functionalities. Module 16, “Implementing Advanced Technologies Supported by Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 for Web Development” describes the MVC and Microsoft Silverlight® technologies. The student will see demonstrations of powerful technologies that more advanced or sophisticated Web applications are implementing.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
xiv
About This Course
Course Materials The following materials are included with your kit: •
Course Handbook A succinct classroom learning guide that provides all the critical technical information in a crisp, tightly-focused format, which is just right for an effective in-class learning experience. •
Lessons: Guide you through the learning objectives and provide the key points that are critical to the success of the in-class learning experience.
•
Labs: Provide a real-world, hands-on platform for you to apply the knowledge and skills learned in the module.
•
Module Reviews and Takeaways: Provide improved on-the-job reference material to boost knowledge and skills retention.
•
Lab Answer Keys: Provide step-by-step lab solution guidance at your finger tips when it’s needed.
Course Companion Content on the http://www.microsoft.com/learning/companionmoc/ Site: Searchable, easy-to-navigate digital content with integrated premium on-line resources designed to supplement the Course Handbook. •
•
Modules: Include companion content, such as questions and answers, detailed demo steps and additional reading links, for each lesson. Additionally, they include Lab Review questions and answers and Module Reviews and Takeaways sections, which contain the review questions and answers, best practices, common issues and troubleshooting tips with answers, and real-world issues and scenarios with answers. Resources: Include well-categorized additional resources that give you immediate access to the most up-to-date premium content on TechNet, MSDN®, Microsoft Press®
Student Course files on the http://www.microsoft.com/learning/companionmoc/ Site: Includes the Allfiles.exe, a self-extracting executable file that contains all the files required for the labs and demonstrations. •
Course evaluation At the end of the course, you will have the opportunity to complete an online evaluation to provide feedback on the course, training facility, and instructor. •
To provide additional comments or feedback on the course, send e-mail to
[email protected]. To inquire about the Microsoft Certification Program, send e-mail to
[email protected].
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
About This Course
xv
Virtual Machine Environment This section provides the information for setting up the classroom environment to support the business scenario of the course.
Virtual Machine Configuration In this course, you will use Microsoft Virtual Server 2005 R2 with SP1 to perform the labs. The following table shows the role of each virtual machine used in this course: Virtual machine 10267A-GEN-DEV
Role Stand-alone machine
Software Configuration The following software is installed on each VM: •
Visual Studio 2010 Professional (including .NET Framework 4.0)
•
Ajax Control Toolkit
•
Microsoft Silverlight 4
•
Microsoft Silverlight 4 Tools for Visual Studio 2010
•
Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
Course Files There are files associated with the labs in this course. The lab files are located on the student computers.
Classroom Setup Each classroom computer will have the same virtual machine configured in the same way.
Course Hardware Level To ensure a satisfactory student experience, Microsoft Learning requires a minimum equipment configuration for trainer and student computers in all Microsoft Certified Partner for Learning Solutions (CPLS) classrooms in which Official Microsoft Learning Product courseware are taught.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
xvi
About This Course
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-1
Module 1 Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010 Contents: Lesson 1: Introduction to the .NET Framework
1-3
Lesson 2: Overview of ASP.NET
1-12
Lesson 3: Overview of the Lab Application
1-26
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 helps you develop powerful Web applications without an overwhelming need for coding. The Microsoft .NET Framework provides components that modularize and simplify distributed applications development, including Web applications. Microsoft ASP.NET is one of the numerous technologies that are part of the .NET Framework, which you can use to develop your Web applications. In this module, you will learn about the key features of the .NET Framework, and ASP.NET. You will also view a sample of the complete Web application that you will build in the labs throughout this course.
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: •
Describe the .NET Framework.
•
Describe ASP.NET.
•
Describe the lab application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-3
Lesson 1
Introduction to the .NET Framework
You need to be aware of the terms and concepts associated with Web development to better appreciate the choice of using Visual Studio 2010 for Web application development. Developers face several challenges when they create Web applications, and the .NET Framework resolves many of these problems. In this lesson, you will learn about the .NET Framework 4, mainly in the context of developing Web applications. You will also learn about Visual Studio 2010, the development tool that you can use to create Web applications.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe Microsoft .NET.
•
List the benefits of using the.NET Framework.
•
Describe the components of the .NET Framework.
•
Identify the key features of Visual Studio 2010.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Introduction to Microsoft .NET
Key Points The goal of Microsoft .NET is to simplify the development of Windows® applications, Web applications, custom applications, and services. This includes mobile applications, applications hosted in the cloud by Windows Azure™, and applications hosted by Microsoft SQL Server® 2008. (Cloud, or cloud computing refers to Internet based computing, where software and data is provided on demand.) The .NET Framework is the infrastructure of Microsoft .NET.
Microsoft .NET Technologies Microsoft .NET is built on an open architecture, which makes it easily extendable when you build and run Web applications and services. Microsoft .NET includes the following technologies and products: •
.NET Framework. The .NET Framework is a comprehensive and consistent object-oriented programming model from Microsoft that provides an environment for building platformindependent and device-independent applications and services. The .NET Framework is the Microsoft platform for building applications that have visually stunning user experiences, seamless and secure communication, and the ability to model a range of business processes. In the .NET Framework environment, code execution is efficient. With these features, the .NET Framework helps minimize the efforts in software deployment; it also reduces versioning conflicts, and promotes the safe execution of code. The .NET Framework provides a foundation to build and run applications and services, and provides a common library of functions to build applications and services. This commonality makes it easy to integrate applications built by using the .NET Framework.
•
Servers. Microsoft .NET provides an infrastructure to integrate, run, operate, and manage the .NET Framework–based solutions on servers such as Windows Server® 2008 R2, Microsoft SharePoint® Server 2010, and SQL Server 2008 R2. This includes Web servers running Internet Information Services (IIS) for hosting Web applications and services, and servers hosting services, including Windows services and Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-5
•
Clients. Microsoft .NET enables you to provide a consistent user experience across many devices such as mobile devices, Web browsers, and personal computers.
•
Visual Studio 2010 and other developer tools. Using these tools, you can rapidly develop WCF services, Windows-based applications, Web applications, and Windows Azure-based applications, and thereby ensure enriched user experiences.
Question: What is the biggest advantage to using the .NET Framework to develop your application?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Benefits of the .NET Framework
Key Points During the early years of Windows-based application development, most applications were developed using the Windows application programming interface (API), and typically by using the C or C++ programming languages. Desktop applications were created for office productivity, home computing, and gaming. With the introduction of Microsoft Visual Basic® and the Internet, developers had to specialize in the type of applications that they developed. For example, developers had to specialize in developing applications in C or C++, Visual Basic, or Visual Basic scripting for use with classic Active Server Pages (ASP). Today, with the .NET Framework, you can use your skills to develop any type of application, and choose the programming language of your choice. The .NET Framework provides several benefits for developing applications and services. These benefits include: •
Web standards and practices. The .NET Framework fully supports existing Internet technologies, including HTML, Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), XML, Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP), Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation (XSLT), XML Path Language (XPath), and other Web standards.
•
Unified application models. The functionality of a .NET type is available to all .NET-based applications, whether Windows-based or Web-based.
•
Ease of use. The .NET Framework organizes code in hierarchical namespaces and classes, and provides a common type system that any .NET-compatible language can use.
•
Extensible classes. The hierarchy of the .NET Framework classes is open to the developer. You can access and extend .NET classes through inheritance, interfaces, or extensions.
•
By providing a comprehensive and consistent programming model and a common set of APIs, the .NET Framework helps you to build applications that work the way you want, in the programming language you prefer, across platforms, software, services, and devices.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-7
•
Easier installation of commercial applications. Many applications from Microsoft and third-party vendors use the .NET Framework to support their core functionality. If you have the .NET Framework installed on your local computer, these applications are easier to install.
•
Easier updates. The Windows Update service updates the .NET Framework automatically. If you receive Automatic Updates from Windows Update, the version of the .NET Framework that is installed on the computer will be updated with the latest fixes and service packs.
•
Device support. The .NET Framework has two separate editions that are built to run on different devices: The .NET Compact Framework (http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=192006&clcid=0x409) is a hardware-independent environment that supports building and running managed applications on resource-constrained computing devices. The .NET Micro Framework (http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=192007&clcid=0x409) provides support for smaller devices. You can now extend your applications and services uniformly—from very small devices, to servers, to the cloud—by using the same programming model and tool chain throughout.
Question: What are the main advantages of using the .NET Framework to develop Web applications?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Components of the .NET Framework
Key Points The .NET environment consists of various components that help you build and run .NET–based applications. •
Operating system. The .NET Framework must run on an operating system.
•
Common language runtime. The common language runtime (CLR) is the virtual machine component of the .NET Framework that provides core services such as memory management, thread management, exception handling, garbage collection, and security. The CLR component manages code at run time, and enforces security by awarding varying degrees of trust to a component, depending on a number of factors—such as the origin of the component. It promotes robustness by implementing a strict type-and-code-verification infrastructure called the common type system. Managed code is run under the management of CLR, while unmanaged code does not target the common language runtime.
•
During development, CLR provides features that simplify development in multiple programming languages—for example, developing a Web application in both Visual Basic and Microsoft Visual C#®. This means that you can create parts of a Web application in one programming language, while creating other parts in a different programming language.
•
The .NET Framework class library. The .NET Framework class library is a comprehensive, objectoriented collection of reusable features that you can use for common development needs, including command-line applications, graphical user interface (GUI) applications, Web Forms, and Web services. The .NET Framework class library—also known as the Base Class Library (BCL)—provides features that include user interface (UI), data access, database connectivity, cryptography, Web application development, numeric algorithms, and network communications. It exposes common language runtime features, and simplifies the development of.NET–based applications. In addition, you can extend classes by creating your own libraries. All applications and all Microsoft .NET–based languages access the same .NET Framework class libraries.
•
Languages. The .NET Framework provides a variety of development languages that enables developers to transfer their skills and development techniques to the .NET development process. Each
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-9
language provides broadly the same functionality. Any language that conforms to the Common Language Specification (CLS) can run with CLR. In the .NET Framework, Microsoft provides support for languages such as Visual Basic, Visual C#, Microsoft Visual C++®, and Microsoft Visual F#®. Thirdparty organizations also can provide additional languages.
.NET Framework 4 Technologies The .NET Framework 4 supplies a comprehensive collection of classes that provide features in many technology areas, including: •
ASP.NET. ASP.NET is a programming framework for building powerful Web applications and services.
•
Windows Forms. Windows Forms is the core development platform for building smart client applications.
•
Windows Presentation Foundation. Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) provides classes for smart-client applications that combine user interface, documents, and media.
•
Data Access. Data Access provides functionality to access external data sources, including extensive XML support. Data Access is mainly implemented in Microsoft ADO.NET, which also includes the Entity Framework, and Data Services.
Note: For more information about ADO.NET, see Module 8, "Managing Data in a Microsoft ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application." •
Windows Communication Foundation. WCF provides a unified programming model for serviceoriented applications.
Note: For more information about WCF, see Module 12, "Consuming Windows Communication Foundation Services." •
Windows Workflow Foundation. Windows Workflow Foundation (WF) provides a programming model and tools to build workflow-enabled applications that model business processes.
Application Hosting The CLR manages the execution of code for a variety of applications and services. However, each type of application requires a runtime host to start it. The runtime host loads the runtime into a process, creates the application domains within the process, and loads user code into the application domains. The .NET Framework not only provides several runtime hosts, it also supports the development of third-party runtime hosts. Microsoft-provided runtime hosts are listed in the following table. Runtime host
Description
ASP.NET
Loads the common language runtime into the process that is to handle the Web request. ASP.NET also creates an application domain for each Web application that will run on a Web server.
Windows Internet Explorer®
Creates application domains to run managed controls. The .NET Framework supports the download and execution of browser-based controls. The runtime interfaces with the Internet Explorer extensibility mechanism by using a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) filter to create application domains to run the managed controls. By default, one application domain is created for each Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Runtime host
Description
Shell executables
Invokes runtime hosting code to transfer control to the runtime each time an executable is started from the shell.
Question: What are the two main components of the .NET Framework 4?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-11
Key Features of Visual Studio 2010
Key Points Visual Studio 2010 constitutes the core of Microsoft .NET development. Visual Studio 2010 is a complete development environment in which you can design, develop, debug, and deploy your .NET applications and services.
Features of Visual Studio 2010 Visual Studio 2010 provides the following features: •
Support for various programming languages
•
Tools for building Web applications, Windows-based applications, WCF services, WPF applications, and WF-enabled applications
•
Tools for working with cascading style sheets (CSS), including the Apply Styles and Manage Styles windows
•
Data access tools, including support for the Entity Framework and language-integrated query (LINQ)
•
Multi-targeting support to enable developers to select the version of the .NET Framework that they want their application to target
•
Support for ASP.NET, Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax), JavaScript, and jQuery
•
Support for Microsoft Silverlight®
•
Complete error handing, including local debugging, remote debugging, and tracing
•
Help and documentation that is presented in an easily accessible format
Question: Why is Visual Studio 2010 considered to be a complete set of development tools?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 2
Overview of ASP.NET
ASP.NET is a programming framework for building Web applications. ASP.NET Web Forms—which are part of an ASP.NET Web application—provide an easy way to build dynamic Web sites. ASP.NET also includes the technology to build Web-based WCF services, which provide the building blocks for constructing distributed Web-based applications. In this lesson, you will learn about the key features of ASP.NET and ASP.NET Web applications, the components of an ASP.NET Web application, and the ASP.NET dynamic compilation execution model.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe the client-server interaction.
•
Describe ASP.NET.
•
Describe the components of an ASP.NET Web application.
•
Describe the process of generating and rendering markup and code.
•
Describe the ASP.NET dynamic compilation execution model.
•
Describe the ASP.NET extensions.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-13
Client-Server Interaction
Key Points Developing applications for use over HTTP is very different from creating desktop applications such as Windows Forms applications. The HTTP protocol is stateless by nature, which means that communication works in a disconnected manner. This means that there is no connection between a client and a Web server. •
When a client requests a page by typing an address—also known as a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)—in a Web browser, the Web server responds by sending the HTML (and potentially client-side code for the requested resource, such as a page or file), back to the client.
•
The connection between the client and the server opens when the request comes in, and the connection closes after the response has been sent to the client. This can make it difficult to make a Web application appear as a connected application. However, the Web server can be made to recognize a user as they make repeated requests. This involves state management; it is possible, therefore, to recognize a user and any information they have included on a Web page, from one request to the next.
Note: State management is covered in detail in Module 13, “Managing State in Web Applications.” •
On the client side, after loading a page, the user submits the page to the server, effectively triggering what is called a postback. This happens by using functionality of the HTTP protocol, including POST and GET methods. In HTML, a typical submit function can be triggered by exposing an HTML input element of type submit to the user, who can then click this element, which is rendered as a button on the Web page.
You can use the client-side code on the client to work with information and controls without submitting to the server; the client-side code can also be used to trigger a postback, programmatically. Server-side
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
code runs only on the server, but it can be used to inject client-side code into the page that is rendered on the client. ASP.NET makes the client-server interaction seem trivial, because of the event-driven programming that you can use over HTTP.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-15
What Is ASP.NET?
Key Points Prior to the .NET Framework and ASP.NET, Web developers who used Microsoft technologies implemented dynamic Web sites by using classic ASP technology. Classic ASP is interpreted code, unlike ASP.NET, which is compiled code. ASP.NET—unlike ASP—offers performance optimizations, strong typing, and early binding.
What Is ASP.NET? Microsoft ASP.NET is a set of Web application development technologies. ASP.NET enables programmers to build dynamic Web sites, Web applications, and Web-based WCF services. Because ASP.NET is part of the .NET Framework, you can develop ASP.NET Web applications in any .NET-based language. The following are some key aspects of ASP.NET: •
The fundamental component of ASP.NET is the Web Form. A Web Form is the Web page that users view in a browser. It is a dynamic page that the Web server processes, and that can access server resources. A typical ASP.NET Web application consists of one or more Web Forms. You can also use JavaScript, VBScript, jQuery, or Ajax to process various user actions on the client. In other words, a traditional HTML Web page can run script on the client to perform basic tasks. However, an ASP.NET Web Form can also run server-side code to access a database, generate additional Web Forms, or take advantage of the built-in security on the server.
•
ASP.NET is device-independent, and allows you to develop a single Web Form that you can view on most devices that have Internet access and a Web browser.
•
You can use Visual Studio 2010 to build and run an ASP.NET Web application. This results in a simplified development process, because you can test the application without creating an external hosting environment.
•
The built-in Windows authentication and Forms authentication helps keep Web applications and any associated data, secure.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
A deployed ASP.NET application runs as a process in the Internet Information Services (IIS) Web server.
•
The ASP.NET technology also supports Web-based WCF services. Web-based WCF services are distributed applications that use XML and SOAP to transfer information between clients, applications, and also other Web-based WCF services.
Note: For more information about WCF Services, see Module 12, "Consuming Windows Communication Foundation Services." •
ASP.NET is a unified Web-development model that includes the services necessary for you to build enterprise-class Web applications with a minimum of coding. You can code your applications in any programming language compatible with CLR, including Visual Basic, Visual C#, and Microsoft Jscript® 8.0. These languages enable you to develop ASP.NET applications that benefit from the common language runtime, type safety, inheritance, and other ASP.NET features. The following table describes the various features of ASP.NET. Feature
Description
Page and controls framework
Page and controls framework encapsulates common UI functionality in easy-to-use, reusable controls. The page and controls framework also provides features to control the overall look and feel of your Web site by using themes and skins. In addition to themes, you can define master pages, which you can use to create a consistent layout for the pages in your application.
ASP.NET compiler
All ASP.NET code is compiled, which enables strong typing, performance optimizations, and early binding, among other benefits. After the code is compiled, the CLR component further compiles ASP.NET code to native code, which provides improved performance.
Security infrastructure ASP.NET provides an advanced security infrastructure for authenticating and authorizing user access, and performing other security-related tasks. You can authenticate users by using Windows authentication, which is supplied by IIS. Alternatively, you can manage authentication by using your own user database through ASP.NET forms authentication and ASP.NET membership. Forms authentication provider
ASP.NET always runs with a particular Windows identity; therefore, you can secure your application by using Windows-based capabilities, such as NTFS file system access control lists (ACLs) and database permissions.
State management functionality
ASP.NET provides intrinsic state management functionality that enables you to store information between page requests, such as customer information, or the contents of a shopping cart.
ASP.NET configuration
ASP.NET applications use a configuration system that enables you to define configuration settings for your Web server, for a Web site, or for individual applications. You can make configuration settings at the time your ASP.NET applications are deployed, then add or revise the configuration settings at any time, with minimal impact on operational Web applications and servers.
Health monitoring and performance features
ASP.NET includes features that enable you to monitor the health and performance of your ASP.NET application. ASP.NET health monitoring provides reporting of key events and information about the health of an application, and about error conditions.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-17
Feature
Description
Troubleshooting support
ASP.NET takes advantage of the run-time debugging infrastructure to provide cross-language and cross-computer debugging support. You can debug both managed and unmanaged objects, and all languages supported by CLR and script languages. In addition, the ASP.NET page framework provides a trace mode that enables you to insert instrumentation messages into your ASP.NET Web pages.
Web-based WCF services
ASP.NET supports Web-based WCF services. A Web-based WCF service is a component containing business functionality that enables applications to exchange information across firewalls by using standards such as HTTP and XML messaging.
Extensible hosting environment and application life-cycle management
ASP.NET includes an extensible hosting environment that controls the life cycle of an application from the time a user first accesses a resource—such as a page in the application—to the time when which the application is shut down.
Extensible designer environment
ASP.NET includes enhanced designer support for Web server controls for use with a visual design tool such as Visual Studio 2010.
ASP.NET Dynamic Data
ASP.NET Dynamic Data is a framework that lets you easily create data-driven ASP.NET Web applications. This is done by automatically discovering datamodel metadata at run time, and deriving UI behavior from it. ASP.NET Dynamic Data is covered in Module 10.
For more information about ASP.NET Health Monitoring, see the ASP.NET Health Monitoring Overview page at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=192014&clcid=0x409. For more information about the Extensible Designer Environment, see the ASP.NET Control Designers Overview page at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=192015&clcid=0x409.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Components of ASP.NET Web Applications
Key Points An ASP.NET Web application contains different components. When you create a Web application, you must understand how to implement and use all of the components.
Components of an ASP.NET Web Application The components of an ASP.NET Web application include: •
Web Forms, or .aspx pages. Web Forms provide the UI for the Web application.
•
User Controls, or .ascx files. User Controls provide the UI for specific functionality to be reused in different Web Forms. One example is a user control with textboxes and validation for username and password input.
•
Master Pages, or .master files. Master pages provide a streamlined and consistent UI across Web Forms.
•
Code-behind files. Code-behind files are associated with Web Forms, and contain the server-side code for the Web Form. You can also create a single-file ASP.NET page, which contains both the page markup and the .NET Framework code in the same file. This means that the code and the page markup share a single file.
•
Configuration files. Configuration files are XML files that define the settings for the Web application and the Web server. Every Web application has one or more web.config configuration files, and each Web server has only one machine.config file.
•
Global.asax file. The Global.asax application file contains code for responding to application-level events that are raised by ASP.NET, such as unhandled errors.
•
WCF service references. WCF service references allow the Web application to send and receive data from a Web-based WCF service.
•
Database connectivity. Database connectivity allows the Web application to transfer data to and from database sources.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-19
•
Additional items. Additional files that you can include in a Web application include HTML files for static content, text files, XML files, and XSLT files.
•
CSS. The CSS files and the contained styles are used to design the Web application, both with regard to element positioning on a Web Form, and for specifying fonts, colors, and text.
Question: What are the tools in Visual Studio 2010 that make application development faster, easier, and more reliable?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Generating and Rendering Markup and Code
Key Points You can create your applications in Visual Studio 2010 by adding markup and code to your Web pages. However, during compilation, compilers work on your markup and code to generate markup and code that will display and behave correctly on the clients. This means that the markup adheres to certain standards that the browsers of the intended clients can render correctly.
Code Generation and Rendering When the compilers are requested to compile the code for your Web site, compilation moves through various stages.
Note: The following description is for working with an ASP.NET Web Site project, and not the ASP.NET Web application project. You will learn more about differences between the two project types in later modules. •
First, as part of the deployment to the Web server on which the Web site will run, all files in the Web site are copied to the destination Web server. This Web server may be local or remote. ASP.NET compiles the files when a user accesses the Web site. The ASP.NET compiler manages the compilation process dynamically, on an individual basis. The Web site content is parsed, and the actual compilation of each item is handed over to the appropriate compiler, such as the Visual Basic or Visual C# compiler. This ASP.NET compiler is called the ASP.NET just in time (JIT) compiler. This means that both inline code and code-behind files are compiled. The Web Forms or User Controls are turned into a class definition with methods for rendering the page or control.
•
When compiling the application, the application is compiled into one or more assemblies in the Temporary ASP.NET Files folder when the first page is requested. The first page can be any page—not
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-21
just the home page or default page. The assemblies are located in a subfolder with a name derived from a special naming convention that allows dynamic and random directory names. This makes it easy to locate the assemblies when requested. This compilation model can be very convenient. Developers can open a Web Form or a corresponding code-behind file and make modifications to it—even on the live server—and changes are effective immediately. Although the source code is available on the Web server, it does not imply that a Web site user can access the source code and markup; this is restricted by the Web server. However, the source code is accessible to any user on your network who has the correct access permissions to the folders on the Web server. If the visibility of the source code is of concern to you, you can either utilize the Web application project instead of the Web site project, or you can use the precompilation model.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
ASP.NET Dynamic Compilation Execution Model
Key Points ASP.NET Web pages and code files use dynamic compilation by default when a user requests a resource for the first time. The compiled resources are then cached, which ensures that subsequent requests are performed efficiently. Dynamic compilation execution allows you to modify your source code without having to explicitly compile your code before deploying the Web application. In this model, you will learn how dynamic compilation in ASP.NET works to send information to a requesting client.
First Request When a client requests a Web page for the first time, the following events occur: 1.
The client browser issues a GET HTTP request to the server.
2.
The ASP.NET parser interprets the source code.
3.
If the code is not already compiled in a dynamic-link library (DLL), ASP.NET invokes the compiler.
4.
The runtime loads, and runs the Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) code.
Note: MSIL is an assembly-level programming language that gets executed at run time. The various compilers, such as those for Visual Basic and Visual C#, compile the Visual Basic and Visual C# code into MSIL, which is then run.
Second Request When the user requests the same Web page for the second time, the following events take place: 1.
The client browser issues a GET HTTP request to the server.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
2.
1-23
The runtime loads and immediately runs the MSIL code that was already compiled during the first request of the page.
Note: The .aspx content may still be parsed, particularly if the content page has changed.
Precompilation You can choose to precompile an entire site before you make it available to users. The advantages of precompilation include: •
Improved response time for users, because pages and code files do not require compilation on first request.
•
Ability to identify compilation errors before users access the site.
•
Ability to deploy the Web site to a production server without the source code.
Web Application Precompilation ASP.NET can precompile a Web site before it is made available to users. This provides faster response time, error checking, source-code protection, and efficient deployment.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
ASP.NET Framework Extensions
Key Points There are a number of frameworks within the .NET Framework that provide specific functionality for ASP.NET. Two of these frameworks are ASP.NET Ajax, and ASP.NET Dynamic Data.
What Is ASP.NET Ajax? ASP.NET Ajax is the free Microsoft Ajax framework that you use for developing interactive and responsive Web applications that work with most popular browsers. ASP.NET Ajax provides the ability to asynchronously send a section or part of a Web page to the server, and respond to the server request in a manner that does not distract the user or interrupt what the user is currently doing. The ASP.NET Ajax framework can be used with server-side code and controls that automatically produce the client-side code. This framework can also be used for creating custom controls and client-side JavaScript code. The ASP.NET Ajax framework includes the Ajax Control Toolkit, which is a collection of highly interactive client-side controls, and the jQuery library, which is an extensive JavaScript library. Developers familiar with the ASP.NET server-side programming model can use ASP.NET Ajax server-side controls to add Ajax functionality to an ASP.NET application without writing any JavaScript code. The client-side ASP.NET Ajax library helps you build rich client-side applications. The jQuery library is an open source JavaScript library.
Note: For more information about ASP.NET Ajax, see Module 11, "Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Ajax-Enabled Web Forms Application."
What Is ASP.NET Dynamic Data? ASP.NET Dynamic Data brings major usability and rapid application development (RAD) changes to the existing ASP.NET data controls. RAD is significantly increased by using a rich scaffolding framework. When
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-25
connected to a data source, you can use ASP.NET Dynamic Data to create a fully functional and datadriven Web site. Full Create, Read, Update, and Delete (CRUD) operations are supported. Smart validation is automatically available, and it provides validation based on the database constraints for the data type, the field length, and the nullable fields. Therefore, ASP.NET Dynamic Data is a framework that allows you to easily create data-driven ASP.NET Web applications. It does this by automatically discovering the data-model metadata at run time and deriving UI behavior from it. A scaffolding framework provides a functional Web site for viewing and editing data. You can easily customize the scaffolding framework by changing the elements or creating new ones to override the default behavior. Existing applications can easily integrate scaffolding elements with the ASP.NET pages.
Note: For more information about ASP.NET Dynamic Data, see Module 10, "Managing Data by Using Microsoft ASP.NET Dynamic Data."
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 3
Overview of the Lab Application
In this lesson, you will explore the lab application that you will build throughout the remainder of this course. You will also explore a complete version of the lab application, and understand some of its functionality.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe the lab scenario.
•
Describe the lab application setup.
•
Explore the .NET Framework.
•
Explore Visual Studio 2010.
•
View the components of an ASP.NET 4.0 Web application project.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-27
Lab Scenario
You are a junior developer in Contoso, Ltd. As part of your job, you need to create a Customer Management Web application for managing your customers electronically from anywhere within the intranet, without installing any extra software on the client. The Web application will also be made available over the Internet to employees in remote locations who are not connected to the intranet. To do this, you need to select a development tool and platform that will enable you to create a simple Web application with the minimum amount of coding. The senior developer has advised you to become familiar with the features and functionalities of both the .NET Framework 4 and Visual Studio 2010, by viewing a Web application or solution that could potentially be a prototype for a new project.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Application Setup
This lab solution walkthrough will help build the Customer Management Web application, to enable the sales staff of Contoso, Ltd to maintain customer and country items.
Application Requirements The application must meet the functional and UI requirements listed in the Functional Requirements and User Interface Requirements sections.
Functional Requirements •
Provide logon abilities.
•
Store customer rows.
•
Create new customer rows.
•
Edit existing customer rows.
•
Display information about a single customer.
•
Display all customer names in a spreadsheet-like view.
•
Edit a customer row in spreadsheet-like view.
•
Validate user input, including ensuring required information is entered, and in the correct format.
•
Store country rows.
•
Create new country rows.
•
Edit existing country rows.
•
Display information about a single country.
•
Display all country-related data in a spreadsheet-like view.
•
Edit a country-related data in spreadsheet-like view.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-29
•
Go directly to customer-related or country-related information by passing the ID in the URL.
•
Expose all country rows to external customers and vendors by using a WCF service or an independent Web Form.
User Interface Requirements •
Present input validation error messages in place, that is, next to input fields that did not pass the input validation.
•
Make the navigation consistent throughout the application by displaying the same menu on all pages.
•
Display the path to the current location or page being displayed.
Application Building A single application will be built throughout the modules, even if the lab exercises in the first few modules only introduce the concepts to be used in later modules.
Working with the Customer Management Application The Customer Management application is designed to enable the sales staff of Contoso Pharmaceuticals to maintain customer and country data. A single customer is located in a specific country, but any number of customers can live in the same country, so there is a many-to-one relationship between customers and countries. The application consists of the following components: •
Home Page. This is a simple greeting page that the user sees whenever they open the application.
•
Menu. The Menu, which is accessible on all pages, is based on a sitemap XML file, and it provides the functionalities that are listed in the following table. Functionality
Description
Customers
New—Creates a new customer row. All—Shows all customer rows.
Countries
New—Creates a new country row. All—Shows all country rows.
Import
Imports countries from an XML file.
About
Displays a modal About dialog box.
Breadcrumb The breadcrumb displays the current location in the application, and the path to the page or Web Form.
Customers Page Customer rows are stored in the CustomerManagement database in the Customers table. The Customers page displays the following information. Field
Description
ID
The unique identifier of the customer. This field is read-only, and is automatically assigned. The value of this field can be used when navigating directly to a specific customer.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Field
Description
First Name
The first name of the customer is limited to 50 characters. This field is mandatory.
Last Name
The last name of the customer is limited to 30 characters. This field is mandatory.
Address
This is the address of the customer, which consists of street name, house and door number, and is limited to 50 characters. This field is mandatory.
Zip Code
This is the zip code for the customer, and is limited to 10 characters. This field is mandatory.
City
This is the name of the city in which the customer lives, and is limited to 30 characters. This field is mandatory.
State
This is the name of the state or region in which the customer lives, and is limited to 30 characters.
Country
This is the unique ID of the country in which the customer lives. This field is mandatory.
Phone
This is the phone number of the customer, saved in the appropriate format for the country in which the customer resides, and is limited to 30 characters.
E-mail Address
This is the e-mail address of the customer, and is limited to 50 characters.
Web Address
This is the Web address (URL) of the customer, and is limited to 80 characters
Credit Limit
This is the credit limit assigned to the customer. This field only accepts numeric characters 0–9, and is mandatory.
News Subscriber
This Boolean field indicates if the customer subscribes to newsletters. This field requires the E-mail Address field to be filled in.
Created Date
This is the date when the customer row is created in the application, and it is automatically assigned. This field is readonly.
Input Validation The Customers Web Form provides input validation by using various techniques. The input validation, which must take place at both the client-side and server-side, includes the following functionalities: •
You will be required to add information to the First Name, Last Name, Address, Zip Code, City, Country, and Web Address fields when adding or editing a customer row. A message will display if any mandatory information is left blank, or when saving or updating customer information.
•
The textbox for the Credit Limit field only accepts numeric characters, and only numbers less than or equal to 50,000.
•
The E-mail Address field must contain a valid e-mail address, if filled in.
•
The Web Address field must contain a valid Web address (URL).
Countries Page Country rows are stored in the Contoso database in the Countries table. The Countries page displays the information listed in the following table. Field
Description
ID
This is a read-only field with the unique identifier of a country. The value of this field can be used when navigating directly to a specific country.
Name
This is the English name of the country, and is limited to 50 characters. This field is
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
Field
1-31
Description mandatory.
Phone No. Format
This is the format for displaying and entering a phone number, and is limited to 30 characters. The formatting will be applied to the user input when this field has been specified in the database.
Dialing Country Code
This is the international dialing code when dialing from outside the country, such as 1 for Canada and United States, 45 for Denmark, 44 for Great Britain, 353 for Ireland, and 34 for Spain. This is often displayed as +1 or +45 to indicate the prefix that must be used to dial outside the country from where the call originates. This field is mandatory.
International Dialing Code
This is the code or number that must be used to dial a number outside the country from where the call originates, such as 011 for the United States, and 00 for member countries of the European Union. This field is mandatory.
Internet Top Level Domain
This is the country-specific Top-Level Domain (TLD) for Internet domains, such as .dk for Denmark, .de for Germany, .ie for Ireland, .no for Norway, or .au for Australia. This field is mandatory.
Input Validation The Countries Web Form provides input validation when creating or editing countries by using various techniques. The input validation—which must take place on both client-side and server-side—includes the following functionalities: •
You will be required to add information to the Name, Internet Top Level Domain, and International Dialing Code fields when adding or editing a country. A message will display if any information has been left out, when saving or updating country information.
•
The text box for the International Dialog Code field only accepts numeric characters in the format 999.
Login The user must log in, and the standard ASP.NET login controls must be visible on all pages. Using the standard ASP.NET Login controls, the user can see who has logged in. The user logs out by clicking the appropriate link. The user names and passwords are stored in the standard ASPNETDB profile database that is created in SQL Server 2008 Express Edition.
Login Page The Login page to which nonauthenticated users are automatically redirected allows a user to type the user name and password to access the application. The Login page displays the following information: •
User name: The user name of the user trying to authenticate.
•
Password: The password associated with the given user name. The value in this field must be case sensitive.
•
Login: The Login button, which will start the process of authenticating the given user credentials.
Input Validation The Login Web Form provides input validation when authenticating as a user. The input validation—which must take place on both client-side and server-side—includes the following: •
You will be required to add information to the User name and Password fields when authenticating. A message will display if any information has been left out, once the user clicks the Login button.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Database The CustomerManagement database is a SQL Server 2008 database with two tables: Customers and Countries. The Customers table includes the following fields. Default value / Transact-SQL (T-SQL) function
Field name
Data type
Size
Required
Description
ID
uniqueidentifier
N/A
Yes
FirstName
nvarchar
50
Yes
This is the first name of the customer. This is a nonunique, non-clustered index that is sorted in ascending order.
LastName
nvarchar
30
Yes
This is the last name of the customer. This is a nonunique, non-clustered index that is sorted in ascending order.
Address
nvarchar
50
Yes
This is the customer address, which includes street name and door number.
Phone
varchar
30
No
This is the customer phone number, which is saved in the appropriate format for the country in which the customer resides.
ZipCode
nvarchar
10
Yes
This is the customer zip code.
City
nvarchar
30
Yes
This is the name of the city in which the customer lives. This is a non-unique, nonclustered index sorted in ascending order.
State
nvarchar
30
No
This is the name of the state or region in which the customer lives.
CountryID
uniqueidentifier
N/A
Yes
This is the unique ID of the country in which the customer lives. This is a foreign key, referencing the ID of the corresponding country in the Countries table.
newsequentialid() This is the unique ID of the customer row, which is automatically assigned by the database, if not supplied on insert. This is the primary key.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
Field name
Data type
Default value / Transact-SQL (T-SQL) function
1-33
Size
Required
EmailAddress nvarchar
50
No
This is the e-mail address of the customer. This is also a non-unique, non-clustered index that is sorted in ascending order.
Url
nvarchar
80
No
This is the address of the customer’s Web site.
CreditLimit
int
N/A
Yes
NewsSubscri ber
bit
CreatedDate
smalldatetime
50,000
No
N/A
Yes
Description
This is the credit limit assigned to the customer. This indicates whether or not the customer subscribes to Contoso newsletters.
getdate()
This is the date that the customer row is created in the application. It is automatically assigned by the database.
The Countries table includes the following fields. Default value / Transact-SQL (T-SQL) function
Field name
Data type
Size
Required
Description
ID
uniqueidentifier
N/A
Yes
newsequentialid() This is a read-only field with the unique Identifier of a country. This is the primary key.
Name
nvarchar
50
Yes
This is the English name of the country. This is also a unique, non-clustered index that is sorted in ascending order.
PhoneNo Format
varchar
30
No
This is the format for displaying and entering a phone number.
DialingCountry Code
varchar
5
Yes
This is the international dialing code when dialing from outside the country, such as 1 for Canada and United States, 45 for Denmark, 44 for Great Britain, 353 for Ireland, and 34 for Spain. This is often displayed as +1 or +45 to indicate the prefix that must be used to dial outside the country from where the call
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Field name
Data type
Size
Required
Default value / Transact-SQL (T-SQL) function
Description originates.
International DialingCode
varchar
5
Yes
This is the code or number that must be used to dial a number outside the country from where the call originates, such as 011 for the United States, and 00 for member countries of the European Union. This field is mandatory.
InternetTLD
char
2
Yes
This is the country-specific TLD for Internet domains, such as .dk for Denmark, .de for Germany, .ie for Ireland, .no for Norway, or .au for Australia.
Existing Countries On a monthly basis, an update to the country rows is sent electronically to Contoso, Ltd, and these country rows are all placed in a single XML file. This data must be imported into the Countries table, but only those countries with a value for the PhoneNoFormat field should be imported.
Import Countries Page The Import Countries Web Form contains a Label, a file selection control for locating the XML file with the Country data to import, and buttons to load or import the data and export it to the SQL Server 2008 database.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-35
Walkthrough: The Lab Solution
In this demonstration, the instructor will demonstrate the features and functionalities of the Customer Management application. You can open the Lab solution on the virtual machine and view the steps demonstrated. Open the solution code by accessing the CustomerManagement solution file from the D:\Labfiles\Solution\M16\VB or D:\Labfiles\Solution\M16\CS folders. The Default.aspx Web Form is the home page for the Customer Management Web application. The Default.aspx Web Form—like the other Web forms in the application—is based on the Site.master master page. Users can browse to other Web Forms by using the Menu or SiteMapPath controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: Exploring the .NET Framework
Key Points In this demonstration you will examine the .NET Framework in the context of Web application development, and explore the ASP.NET framework extensions, including the Ajax Extensions, Ajax Library, and Dynamic Data.
Demonstration Steps The main tasks are as follows: 1.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
2.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Open the finished lab solution. •
In the Start page – Microsoft Visual Studio (Administrator) window, on the File menu, click Open Project.
•
In the Open Project dialog box, in the File name box, type D:\Labfiles\Starter\M16\VB\CustomerManagement.sln or D:\Labfiles\Starter\M16\CS\CustomerManagement.sln, and then click Open.
3.
Examine some of the .NET Framework namespaces and classes, including System.Web and System.Web.UI, and examine the System.Web.UI.Page class.
4.
Explore the Ajax Extensions and the Ajax Library features. •
Run the solution, and view the About box by clicking About on the Help menu.
Note: You will learn more about the features offered by Ajax Extensions and the Ajax Library in Module 11, “Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-Enabled Web Forms Application."
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
5.
6.
1-37
Explore how Dynamic Data works. •
Run the solution.
•
On the Customers menu, click All.
•
On the Countries menu, click All.
If time permits, view code for some of the Module 6 and later lab exercises.
Note: You will learn more about how Dynamic Data works in Module 10, "Managing Data by Using Microsoft ASP.NET Dynamic Data." Result: At the end of this demonstration, you will have a basic understanding of the.NET Framework 4 features in the context of Web application development, including some the new functionalities, such as Ajax, and Dynamic Data.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: Exploring the Views and Controls of Visual Studio 2010
In this demonstration you will learn how to use Visual Studio 2010 as a single tool for building Web applications by exploring views, designing Web Forms, adding code, and using components and controls.
Demonstration Steps The main tasks are as follows: 1.
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010. •
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
2.
Create a new ASP.NET Web site with the following settings: Name: WebSite1 Location: File system Language: Visual Basic or Visual C#
3.
•
In the Start Page – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click New Web Site.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, under Installed Templates, click Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, ensure that .NET Framework 4 is selected in the target framework list.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the middle pane, click ASP.NET Empty Web Site.
•
In the Web location list, ensure that File System is selected, and then click OK.
Add the Default.aspx Web Form to the CustomerManagement Web site. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click the Web site, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the Add New Item dialog box, in the middle pane, click Web Form, in the Name box, type Default.aspx, and then click Add.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
4.
5.
6.
1-39
Open the Web Form in both the Design view and the Source view. •
In the Default.aspx window, click Design.
•
In the Default.aspx window, click Source.
•
In the Default.aspx window, click Design.
Add a Button control to the Web Form. •
In the Default.aspx window, select the div element.
•
In the CustomerManagement – Microsoft Visual Studio (Administrator) window, point to Toolbox.
•
In Toolbox, expand Standard, and then double-click the Button control.
Add code to the Button Click event. •
In the Default.aspx window, click the Button control.
•
In the Properties window, click the Events icon, and then double-click the box next to the Click event.
Result: At the end of this demonstration, you will understand the advantages of using Visual Studio 2010 for developing ASP.NET applications.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: Exploring the Components of an ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application Project
In this demonstration, you will examine the various components of a Web application project, including the solution file, the project file, the ASP.NET folders, Web Forms, the code-behind files, the class files, the assembly info file, the references, the web.config files, and the designer code files.
Demonstration Steps The main tasks are as follows: 1.
Examine the solution and project files, and the references. •
2.
Examine the ASP.NET folders. •
3.
In Solution Explorer, review the ASP.NET folders, and if time allows create a new one.
Examine the Web Forms, designer code files, code-behind files, and class files. •
4.
In Solution Explorer, notice the solution and project files, and identify where project references go.
In Solution Explorer, review the various files.
Examine the assembly info file and the web.config files. •
In Solution Explorer, review the various files.
Result: At the end of this demonstration, you will have identified and examined the functionality and importance of the components of an ASP.NET 4.0 Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-41
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What is the major advantage of using ASP.NET?
2.
What is the purpose of the code-behind files in ASP.NET?
3.
What are Web Forms?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
Which components are included in the .NET Framework 4?
2.
What is the purpose of CLR?
3.
You need to create a programmable Web component that you can share among multiple Web applications. Which type of component should you create?
4.
You need to develop an application that contains projects that target multiple versions of the .NET Framework. Which tool enables you to accomplish this?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You are unsure of the functionality of a particular class. How can you determine the functionality of the class? Use the .NET Framework documentation, Web sites, or online communities.
2.
You are unsure whether to use dynamic compilation or precompilation. What are the factors that you need to consider? Use dynamic compilation in the following situations: •
When you want to modify your source code without having to explicitly compile your code before deploying your Web application
•
When you want to extend the ASP.NET build system by creating custom build providers for new file types that are called during compilation
Use precompilation in the following situations: •
When response time is a concern
•
To identify compilation errors before users access the site
•
To deploy the Web site to a production server without the source code
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Exploring Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010
1-43
Tools Tool
Purpose
Where to find it
Visual Studio 2010
Developing Web applications
Start menu
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
1-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-1
Module 2 Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages Contents: Lesson 1: Choosing a Programming Language
2-3
Lesson 2: Overview of Visual Studio 2010
2-13
Lesson 3: Creating a Simple Web Application
2-26
Lab: Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-41
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 is a comprehensive development environment that you can use to create powerful and reliable enterprise Web solutions. There are different programming languages that you can use when you develop Microsoft .NET Framework applications. You need to be aware of the fundamental aspects when writing code and creating components using two of the .NET Framework–based languages, Microsoft Visual C#® and Microsoft Visual Basic®. Visual Studio 2010 offers end-to-end Web development capabilities, and scalable and reusable server-side components. These capabilities and components enable you to improve your productivity, and effectively create applications and Microsoft ASP.NET Web sites.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-3
Lesson 1
Choosing a Programming Language
Key Points To create your Web applications, you have a wide choice of programming languages. For many years, the programmer’s choice of the programming language was based on the available platform, framework, and integrated development environment (IDE), although some programmers did choose a programming language purely because they liked the syntax of that programming language. However, all this changed when the .NET Framework was introduced, because it is programming language-independent. This is because the Microsoft intermediate language (MSIL) that is executed at runtime gets converted into machine code when the program is run by the .NET common language runtime (CLR). For a programming language to be compatible with the .NET Framework, the corresponding compiler—at build time—must compile the code into MSIL (or IL as it is generally called). At run time, MSIL is compiled by the just in time (JIT) compiler. In effect, the .NET CLR understands only one language—MSIL. Therefore, if your platform or framework is the .NET Framework, you have several options when choosing a programming language. Many programming languages for the .NET Framework have the .NET Framework Base Class Library (BCL), which has most of the functionality. It is generally not the functionality that sets the programming languages apart, but the syntax, the code structure, and the corresponding editor where you write your code. Visual Studio 2010 includes Visual Basic and Visual C# to help create Web applications. Web development has become very powerful, and yet simpler than ever before with the inclusion of ASP.NET Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax), the Ajax Library, Dynamic Data, language-integrated query (LINQ), many controls, support for cascading style sheets (CSS), and scripting such as JavaScript and jQuery. In this lesson, you will explore the features of Visual Basic and Visual C#, and examine the considerations for choosing between the two programming languages. You will have situations that require multiple programming languages within the same application; therefore, you need to know how to work with code in multiple-language scenarios.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe the features of Visual Basic.
•
Describe the features of Visual C#.
•
Describe the scenarios for mixed-language environments.
•
Describe the considerations for choosing between Visual Basic and Visual C# for an application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-5
Features of Visual Basic
Key Points While the current Visual Basic 10.0 version is designed around the .NET Framework, if you are used to developing applications in the Component Object Model (COM)–based Visual Basic 6.0 or earlier, you will find Visual Basic 10.0 easy to use. While Visual Basic 6.0 was mostly used for creating COM components and Windows®-based applications, Visual Basic 10.0 can be used for developing any type of .NET Framework application or service, including Web applications, Windows Forms applications, Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services, Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax)–based Web applications, device applications, and Microsoft Silverlight® applications. If you have worked in a previous version of Visual Basic, you will find that not much has changed, although many additions have been made. For example, there are changes to the COM-based deterministic finalization, which has now been replaced by the garbage collection feature of CLR, thus eliminating deterministic finalization and helping to reduce memory waste from unclaimed objects.
Visual Basic 10.0 Text Editor The Visual Basic Text Editor features the color-coding of keywords, variables, constants, and statements, like most other new .NET Framework–based languages. The default color displays keywords colored in blue, and strings colored in a dark red. The Visual Basic Text Editor also features a background compilation model, in which the code is compiled in the background as you type, to catch compile-time and syntax errors. Any errors caught by the background compilation are underlined with a squiggly line, and with different colors, depending on the type of error. If you hover the pointer over one of these squiggly lines, Microsoft IntelliSense® displays a description of the error, and the description is added to the Error window. The Visual Basic Text Editor automatically adds the method signatures for an interface when you add the interface to a type declaration, and then press ENTER. The following example shows how the code— between lines 2 and 33—has been inserted by the editor by pressing ENTER, after typing the Implements IDisposable statement.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
1 Public Class Class1 2 Implements IDisposable 3 4 #Region "IDisposable Support" 5 Private disposedValue As Boolean ' To detect redundant calls 6 7 ' IDisposable 8 Protected Overridable Sub Dispose(ByVal disposing As Boolean) 9 If Not Me.disposedValue Then 10 If disposing Then 11 ' TODO: dispose managed state (managed objects). 12 End If 13 14 ' TODO: free unmanaged resources (unmanaged objects) and override Finalize() below. 15 ' TODO: set large fields to null. 16 End If 17 Me.disposedValue = True 18 End Sub 19 20 ' TODO: override Finalize() only if Dispose(ByVal disposing As Boolean) above has code to free unmanaged resources. 21 'Protected Overrides Sub Finalize() 22 ' Do not change this code. Put cleanup code in Dispose(ByVal disposing As Boolean) above. 23 ' Dispose(False) 24 ' MyBase.Finalize() 25 'End Sub 26 27 ' This code added by Visual Basic to correctly implement the disposable pattern. 28 Public Sub Dispose() Implements IDisposable.Dispose 29 ' Do not change this code. Put cleanup code in Dispose(ByVal disposing As Boolean) above. 30 Dispose(True) 31 GC.SuppressFinalize(Me) 32 End Sub 33 #End Region 34 35 End Class
Question: How are namespaces used in Visual Basic?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-7
Features of Visual C#
Key Points Visual C# has always targeted the .NET Framework, and there are no remnant features from previous versions that are targeted at other platforms. The current Visual C# 4.0 version has many newly added features, and the syntax has been enhanced significantly since version 1.0. Visual C# 4.0 can be used for developing any type of .NET Framework application or service, including Web applications, Windows Forms applications, WCF services, Ajax–based Web applications, device applications, and Silverlight applications.
Visual C# 4.0 Text Editor The Visual C# Text Editor offers color-coding of keywords, variables, constants, and statements, like most other new .NET Framework–based languages. The default color displays keywords colored in blue, and strings colored in red. Visual C# also provides a background compilation model—similar to Visual Basic Text Editor—in which the code compiles in the background as you type, and catches compile-time and syntax errors. Any errors caught by the background compilation are underlined with a squiggly line, with different colors indicating the type of error. If you hover the pointer over one of these squiggly lines, IntelliSense displays a description of the error. The errors are added to the Error window when the project is rebuilt. When you add an interface to a type declaration, you can use the editor to add the method signatures for an interface by right-clicking the name of the interface. You can click the Implement Interface, and then click Implement interface again. In the following code, the code between lines 3 through 10 has been inserted by the Visual C# Text Editor after adding IDisposable to the class declaration. 1 public class Class1 : IDisposable 2 { 3 #region IDisposable Members 4 5 public void Dispose() 6 { 7 throw new NotImplementedException(); This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
8 9 10 11 }
} #endregion
When creating new types by using the Visual C# Text Editor, the default namespace will be added automatically as you type the code. There are a number of code-refactoring options in the Visual C# Text Editor. You can invoke an option by right-clicking a keyword or selected text, and then selecting the appropriate action from the context menu. Actions include: •
Renaming variables.
•
Promoting a local variable to a parameter in a method.
•
Extracting a method, which involves copying existing text for inclusion in a new method.
•
Encapsulating a field, which involves creating a property for an existing field member.
•
Removing and reordering parameters.
Visual C# 4.0 Code Structure and Syntax The syntax in Visual C# 4.0 is based on common English language keywords. Blocks of code following a statement are enclosed by using braces {}, as shown in the following code. if () {} switch () {} for () {} foreach () {} void {} class {} namespace {}
The code in Visual C# is case-sensitive, making it possible to have variables differ only by the casing of the name. However, this is discouraged because it can make your code more difficult to read, understand, and debug. Visual C# is fully object-oriented, which means that you cannot create global or application-level variables and constants. However, static classes and members make it possible to create the illusion of global variables and constants, as shown in the following code. public static class Class1 { public const int AppLevelConstant = 15; public static string AppName = "Application Name"; }
The AppLevelConstant constant and the AppName variable will be available to the entire project to which the class belongs, as follows. int appLevel = Class1.AppLevelConstant; string name = Class1.AppName;
In Visual C#, each project has a default namespace, which is automatically applied to all the types that you create. If the default namespace is CompanyName.ApplicationName and you have a namespace for a specific type—for example, Services.Customers—then the actual namespace for the type is Services.Customers, because the default namespace is ignored. In addition, types in project subfolders
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-9
are automatically created with a namespace that is made up of the default project namespace, followed by the folder name. Therefore, if a type is stored in a subfolder named Test, and the default namespace is CompanyName.ApplicationName, the actual namespace for that type is CompanyName.ApplicationName.Test. You can override this by specifying the full namespace for the type in code. Statements in Visual C# are terminated by a semicolon. Comments can be single line or multiline, as follows. // Single line /* Multi line */
By default, most code in Visual C# is inherently safe, but unsafe language constructs—such as pointers— are allowed. By default, numeric operations are not checked, thus allowing numeric overflow and numeric underflow.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Scenarios for Mixed-Language Environments
Key Points When working in a programming environment with many developers, you will encounter projects and solutions that are in different .NET Framework–based programming languages, such as Visual Basic and Visual C#. Therefore, as a developer, you need to at least understand both languages, because it is very likely that you will work with both. You might need to copy some functionality written in a programming language other than the one you master the best. Depending on the amount of code, you will either copy some lines of code, and then translate them into a programming language of choice, or you will add a project to your current solution. If you add a project to your current solution, then you have a solution made up of at least two projects, written in two different programming languages. This is an everyday reality for many .NET developers. Thus, even if you do not master the two languages, you should at least be able to read and understand the code written in either language. Question: In what real-world scenarios do you use mixed languages?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-11
Considerations for Choosing Between Visual Basic and Visual C# for an Application
Key Points Visual Studio 2010 comes with both Visual Basic and Visual C# compilers and editors, giving you a choice of programming languages. However, this also requires you to choose a programming language when starting a new project. Sometimes you are allowed to choose the programming language for a new project.. However, sometimes the decision is already made by an architect or team lead, and you need to work with the team and their decision. On smaller projects, you may get to make the choice if the company or department you are working for has not yet decided to use one of the programming languages exclusively. If this happens, there are things to consider before determining which programming language will best fit your project. Both Visual Basic and Visual C# are popular programming languages that are used by developers worldwide. Because there are no rules on choosing either language, you can make a decision based on the following considerations.
Considerations for Choosing a Programming Language When choosing a programming language, you need to evaluate the following considerations: •
Number of lines of code to write
•
Reuse of existing .NET Framework code
•
Porting of legacy code, including classic ASP
•
Use of unsafe constructs, such as pointers and numeric underflow and overflow
•
Text Editor formatting
•
Use of default namespaces
•
Case sensitivity
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Optional parameters
•
Statement termination
Another factor that may influence your choice is whether you prefer the verbose syntax in Visual Basic, or the more terse composition of Visual C#, and its use of braces. This is quite often the first factor that new .NET developers look at, especially if their background is not one of Microsoft Visual C++® or classic Visual Basic. Ultimately, the choice is generally a matter of preference. Question: What are the possible issues that you might need to handle in a mixed-language environment?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-13
Lesson 2
Overview of Visual Studio 2010
Visual Studio 2010 is a comprehensive tool for creating all types of .NET Framework–based applications, including Web applications and services. It consists of an IDE, integration of the .NET Framework, and the building of applications and services based on .NET Framework versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.5, and 4. Visual Studio 2010 IDE consists of a common user interface (UI), and set of tools that you can use for all the project types and programming languages that Visual Studio 2010 supports.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe the advantages of using Visual Studio 2010.
•
Identify the available project templates.
•
Describe the features of IDE.
•
Identify the elements of a Visual Studio 2010 Start page.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Advantages of Using Visual Studio 2010
Key Points Visual Studio 2010 simplifies the development of powerful and reliable enterprise Web solutions, and increases developer efficiency by providing a familiar, shared development environment. When you start Visual Studio 2010 for the first time, you are prompted to specify the settings for your development environment. Visual Studio 2010 provides prebuilt components, programming wizards, and the ability to reuse components that are written in any programming language. This helps significantly reduce development time. IntelliSense–based code completion enables you to quickly produce accurate code. Powerful, endto-end, cross-language debugging support helps you to make your applications more robust.
Single IDE Visual Studio 2010 has a single IDE that provides a consistent look and feel, regardless of the programming language that you use or the application type that you develop. Visual Studio 2010 supports development in several.NET Framework–based programming languages. This support enables you to work in your own preferred programming language, because you no longer have to learn a new programming language for each new project. You can also use the IDE in the design and testing phase of the development life cycle. For example, Visual Studio 2010 provides class diagrams and unit testing.
Multiple Programming Languages Visual Studio 2010 natively supports the following programming languages: •
Visual Basic
•
Visual C#
•
Visual C++
•
Visual F#
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-15
Multiple Project Types Visual Studio 2010 supports the development of multiple project types, including ASP.NET Web applications and XML Web services. This support for multiple project types enables you to simultaneously work on several projects; you do not have to change development environments or learn new tool interfaces or languages.
Integrated Browser Visual Studio 2010 contains a built-in browser that is based on Windows Internet Explorer®. The browser is integrated into IDE, and you can access it from multiple windows and menus. This browser accessibility enables you to view your Web site during the development cycle, instead of having to use another program.
ASP.NET Development Server The ASP.NET Development Server is built to run ASP.NET Web pages on the local computer. It provides an efficient way to test pages locally before you publish or deploy pages to a test, staging, or production server.
Debugging Support Visual Studio 2010 supports debugging from your initial code, through to the application’s release. Debugging support includes breakpoints, break expressions, watch expressions, and the ability to step through the code, one statement or one procedure at a time.
Note: For more information about debugging, see Module 7, "Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications."
Deployment Support After you have finished developing a Web site, you can deploy it to a Web server. The Web server can be either a test server or a production server. Visual Studio 2010 provides the following options for deploying a Web site: •
Copy Web Site. The Copy Web Site tool copies the current Web site to a target server.
•
Publish Web Site. The Publish Web Site utility compiles a Web site into a set of executable files that can be copied to the target server.
Deployment can happen to the local file system, an Internet Information Services (IIS)–based site, or an FTP server. The latter two can be local and remote. Note: You must use IIS to host the deployed Web application. IIS is a Microsoft Web server that is bundled with both client and server implementations of the Windows operating system. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a network protocol that is used to exchange and manipulate files over a network, which generally means you want to open the target Web site with the Web Development server. Question: Which Web server is the default server when creating your Web applications in Visual Studio 2010?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Available Project Templates
Key Points Visual Studio 2010 provides templates that support the creation of a number of common project types. These templates contain all the required files, and ensure that the IDE has the correct configuration for the selected project. When you use these templates, you do not have to set up the infrastructure, which means the template automatically creates the folders and files that are required for the specific type of project. Therefore, you can focus on adding functions to your projects.
Solutions and Projects When you create a project in Visual Studio 2010, you also create a larger container, called a solution. This solution can contain multiple projects in the same manner that a project container can contain multiple pages. Solutions enable you to focus on the project or set of projects that are needed to develop and deploy your application; you do not have to focus on the details of managing the objects and files that define them. A solution enables you to: •
Work on multiple projects in the same instance of the IDE.
•
Work on items, settings, and options that apply to a group of projects.
•
Manage miscellaneous files that are outside the context of a solution or a project.
You can use the Solution Explorer—which provides a graphical view of your solution—to organize and manage all of your application projects and files.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-17
Project Templates Visual Studio 2010 includes multiple project templates that are sorted by language and type. To select the correct template, you must first specify the language in which you want to work. The following table lists some of the available Visual Basic and Visual C# project templates. Project template
Description
Class library
Creates reusable classes and components that you can share with other projects.
ASP.NET Web application
Creates an ASP.NET Web application with the basic server files that you require for your application.
ASP.NET Web site
Creates an ASP.NET Web site with the basic server files that you require for your Web site.
WCF service application Creates a WCF service that can be consumed by other WCF services or applications on a network. WCF services are components that are available over the Internet, and are designed to interact only with other Web applications. ASP.NET server control
Creates custom ASP.NET server controls. This template adds the necessary project items that you require to create the control.
ASP.NET Ajax server control
Creates custom ASP.NET Ajax server controls. This template adds the necessary project items that you require to create the control.
Empty project
Creates your own project type. This template creates the necessary file structure that you require to store application information. You must manually add any references, files, or components.
ASP.NET Dynamic Data Creates an ASP.NET Web site with the basic server files that you require for Entities Web site your Web site, along with support for Dynamic Data based on an Entity Data Model. ASP.NET Dynamic Data Creates an ASP.NET Web site with the basic server files that you require for LINQ To SQL Web site your Web site, along with support for Dynamic Data based on a LINQ To SQL Data Model. Question: What are some of the additional project templates that are available in Visual Studio 2010?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Features of the Integrated Development Environment
Key Points The Visual Studio 2010 IDE contains multiple windows that provide a variety of tools and services. Many of the features of Visual Studio 2010 are available from several of the IDE windows, menus, and toolbars. You can move or hide IDE windows, depending on your personal preference. You can use the View menu to select the windows that you want to display. You can click the Auto Hide button to turn static windows into pull-out windows.
The Editor Window The Editor window is the primary interface window in Visual Studio 2010. It displays code for editing, and provides a graphical interface for control placement in the form of a what you see is what you get (WYSIWYG) interface. You can use drag-and-drop editing to create the visual design of your application. You can then manage the logical design of your application by modifying the default Web control code. The window options for the editor are the Design mode, the Split mode, and the Source mode: •
In the Design mode, you can use the editor to move controls and graphic elements around the window by using a drag-and-drop operation. When you add a control to a Web page in Design mode, Visual Studio 2010 adds the supporting code and default properties to the Web Form. You can then switch to the Source mode and edit that code.
•
In the Source mode, Visual Studio 2010 highlights your code so that the different elements—such as variable names and keywords—are instantly identifiable. The IntelliSense feature provides you with auto-completion suggestions, and enables you to build functions by simply selecting from the list of available syntax.
•
In the Split mode, the editor is split into two windows: one window for the design surface of the Web page, and the other window for the source code of the Web page.
When you use the Editor window in the Source mode, two drop-down lists appear at the upper part of the window—the Class Name list on the left, and the Method Name list on the right. The Class Name
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-19
list shows all the controls on the associated form. If you click a control name in the list, the Method Name list shows all the events for that control. Events are actions that the control can perform and your application can interpret. By using the Class Name and Method Name lists together, you can quickly locate and edit the code in your application.
Solution Explorer Pane Clicking on the Solution Explorer tab displays the Solution Explorer pane, which lists a hierarchy of project files. From this pane, you can: •
Use a drag-and-drop operation to rearrange items.
•
Select an item in the Solution Explorer pane to view its properties in the Properties window.
This feature enables you to change properties at the project level or page level. To view the available options—including adding, building and editing pages—right-click the file, project, or solution. The following is a list of some the file types that display in the Solution Explorer pane: •
Project references that list classes that are used by the page and Web controls
•
Web Forms in the project
•
Code-behind pages that contain the logic that supports the Web Forms, project-related folders, and sub-items
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Properties Pane Visual Studio 2010 enables you to adjust the properties of documents, classes, and controls by using a single Properties window. When you create or select an item, the Properties pane automatically displays the related properties.
Task List Window You can use the Task List window to track the status of tasks as you develop your application. The Categories list displays user tasks and comments: •
User Tasks. You can add tasks and set the description, priority, and completion of the tasks. To add a task in the Categories list, click User Tasks, and then click Create User Task.
•
Comments. You can add TODO comments to your code for tasks that you must complete. To access this section of code, in the Categories list, click Comments, and then double-click the TODO comment.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-21
Output Pane The Output pane displays status messages for various features in IDE. You can program your own applications to write diagnostic messages to the window at run time.
Manage Styles Window The Manage Styles window lists all CSS style rules that are defined in the page's external CSS. It also lists style rules that are defined on the page, but not as inline styles. You can use the Manage Styles window to move styles from an external style sheet to the style element on the page, and to move from the style element on the page to an external style sheet. You can also use the window to move the location of a style within the set of CSS style rules, and create a new CSS style by opening the Styles dialog box and attaching an existing style sheet to the current page.
Apply Styles Window The Apply Styles window lists all the CSS style rules that are defined for a page. This includes style rules that are defined in external style sheets, both as inline styles, and as styles defined on the page. Classbased and ID-based style rules appear under the name of the external .css file that contains the style. If the style rule is defined on the page, it appears under Current Page. Element-based style rules are organized the same way, but they appear under a separate heading titled, Contextual Selectors.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Toolbox Pane The Toolbox pane enables you to use drag-and-drop controls in your application. The tools are grouped by category in the Toolbox pane, and display only if they are available to use. Common Web application categories include: •
Standard. Contains standard controls that you can use to build the UI for a Web page.
•
Data. Contains objects that allow your application to connect and access the data in Microsoft SQL Server® and other databases.
•
Validation. Contains a number of different validation controls that are used to validate user input in Web server controls.
•
Navigation. Contains navigational controls for a Web site.
•
Login. Contains login controls for a Web site.
•
WebParts. Contains Web Parts for a Web site.
•
Ajax Extensions. Contains a set of server controls used for implementing Ajax functionality.
•
Dynamic Data. Contains controls for use with a Dynamic Data Web application.
•
HTML. Contains a set of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) controls that you can add to your Web page. These controls can run on either the server side or the client side.
•
Reporting. Contains a set of server controls used for creating SQL Server reports.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-23
Question: What are the four views available for editors and designers?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Visual Studio 2010 Start Page
Key Points The Visual Studio 2010 Start page provides an easy way to access or create projects, learn about upcoming product releases and conferences, or read the latest development articles. By default, the Start Page displays when opening Visual Studio 2010. You can also access it by clicking Start Page on the View menu. You can change the default Visual Studio 2010 startup settings from the Options dialog box, to enable one of the following actions at startup: •
Display the home page set in your browser.
•
Open the last loaded solution.
•
Show the Open Project dialog box.
•
Show the New Project dialog box.
•
Show an empty environment.
•
Show the Start Page.
In addition to the options mentioned above, there are also two options on the Start Page that affect how and when the Start Page opens and closes. You can choose whether or not to Close page after project load, or Show page on startup by selecting or clearing the corresponding check boxes located in the lower-left corner of the Start page. These check boxes are both selected by default.
Recent Projects Pane The Recent Projects pane in the Start Page displays a list of recently updated projects, which you can open or remove from the list by right-clicking the project. You can also open the folder in which the project is located, from the context menu.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-25
Get Started Tab The Get Started tab of the Content area displays a list of Help topics, Web sites, technical articles, and other resources that can help you increase your productivity and learn about features of the product.
Guidance and Resources Tab The Guidance and Resources tab of the Content area on the Start page provides general information on coding and development, and follows the same format as the Get Started tab. It includes categories for Development Process, MSDN Resources, and Additional Tools.
Latest News Tab The Latest News tab displays a list of articles from the Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed that is specified at the top of the pane. By default, the ASP.NET News RSS feed is used, but you can specify a custom RSS feed.
Customizing the Start Page You can customize the news channel that the Start Page uses, and remove entries from the Recent Projects pane. In addition, you can stop the Start Page from appearing every time you start Visual Studio.
Changing the Item Displayed at Development Environment Startup 1.
On the Tools menu, click Options.
2.
In the bottom left corner of the Options dialog box, ensure the Show all settings option is selected.
3.
Expand Environment, and then click Startup.
4.
From the At startup drop-down list, choose one of the options, and then click OK.
Your changes are implemented the next time you start Visual Studio. Question: Which area and tab of the Start Page displays a list of Help topics, Web sites, technical articles, and other resources?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 3
Creating a Simple Web Application
You can use Visual Studio 2010 to build your own ASP.NET Web application from start to finish. When you work with projects, Visual Studio 2010 creates a number of files that support your development. In this lesson, you will learn how to create, build, and view a simple ASP.NET Web application.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe how to develop ASP.NET Web application pages.
•
Describe Web application project files and folders in Visual Studio 2010.
•
Describe Web site project files and folders in Visual Studio 2010.
•
Choose between a Web site project and a Web application project.
•
Identify Web application files.
•
Explain how to create, build, and view an ASP.NET Web application.
•
Deploy a Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-27
Web Application Development Process
Key Points Visual Studio 2010 contains everything that you require to build your own ASP.NET Web application or Web site from start to finish. To create an ASP.NET Web application by using Visual Studio 2010, you must perform the following steps: 1.
Create a design specification. The design specification is the blueprint that you use to create a Web application. You should take time to design your application before you write any code. Although Visual Studio 2010 provides tools to help you quickly develop a solution, you can design your application more efficiently if you have a clear understanding of user requirements and the feature set. By using a design specification, you will also save time by minimizing the potential for rewriting unsuitable or redundant code. Visual Studio provides the Class Designer, which enables you to visualize the structure of classes and their relationships. You can easily create new classes, and refactor current classes by using this visual design environment.
2.
3.
Create a new project. When you select a new project template, Visual Studio 2010 automatically creates the files and the default code that are required to support the project. As part of this initial project creation, you should transfer the main coding tasks from your design specification into the Visual Studio 2010 Task List. This transfer enables you to track your development against the specification. Create the interface, and write the code. To create the interface for your Web application, you must first place controls and objects on the Web pages by using the Editor window in the Design mode. As you add objects to a form, you can set their properties by using the table in the Properties window, or by using code in the Editor window.
Note: For more information about adding controls to an ASP.NET Web Form, see Module 3, "Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form."
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
After you set the initial properties for the ASP.NET Web Form and its objects, you can write the event procedures that will run when different actions are performed on a control or object. You may also have to write code to add business logic, and to access data. Note: For more information about writing code in ASP.NET Web Forms, see Module 4, "Adding Functionality to a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form." 4.
Build a project. When you build a project, Visual Studio builds all the code on the Web pages and other class files into a dynamic-link library (DLL), called an assembly. Visual Studio 2010 has two build options: debug and release. When you first develop a project, you build debug versions. When you are ready to release the project, you create a release build of the project. You can build, rebuild, or clean an individual project, or the entire solution.
5.
•
Build. Visual Studio compiles only those project files and components that have changed since the last build. You usually build only your project or solution.
•
Rebuild. Visual Studio cleans the project or solution first, and then builds all project files and components. You must perform a rebuild when the project versions target out-of-sync components.
•
Clean. Visual Studio deletes any intermediate and output files. Only the project and component files remain, from which you can build new instances of the intermediate and output files. This means you really never have to clean your project or solution.
Test and debug. Testing and debugging is not a one-time step, but rather is iteratively done throughout the development process. Every time you make a major change to the application code, you must run a debug build of the application to ensure that the code works as expected. Visual Studio 2010 offers numerous debugging tools that you can use to find and fix errors in your application.
Note: For more information about debugging, see Module 7, "Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications." 6.
Deploy. When your project is fully debugged, and you have built a release build, you deploy the necessary files to a Web server.
Note: For more information about deploying an ASP.NET Web application, see Module 14, "Configuring and Deploying a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Application." Question: What are the three main phases of the Web application development process?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-29
Web Application Project Files and Folders
Key Points In Visual Studio 2010, you can create a Web application by using the ASP.NET Web application project template. The Web application project offers tighter control than the Web Site project by explicitly defining resources.
Web Application Project Template Files When you create a Web application by using the ASP.NET Web application project template, Visual Studio 2010 creates a Solution folder that contains the .sln solution file. The file is a map of all of the various files that link one or more projects together, and it stores global information. The Solution folder also contains the subfolders and files that are listed in the following table. Type
Name
Description
Folders
App_Data
A folder that contains application data files, including MDF files, XML files, and other data store files.
Bin
A folder that contains the project assembly file.
Obj
A folder that contains subfolders for your build configurations.
My Project
A Visual Basic–specific folder that includes a number of autogenerated code and XML files to support the project infrastructure (settings and resources), including Application.Designer.vb, Application.myapp, Resources.Designer.vb, Resources.resx, Settings.Designer.vb, and Settings.settings. In addition, the folder contains the AssemblyInfo.vb file, which contains general information—including assembly
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Type
Name
Description version and assembly attributes—about the assembly.
Files
Properties
A Visual C#–specific folder that includes the AssemblyInfo.cs file. This file contains general information about the assembly, including the assembly version and assembly attributes.
Default.aspx
The default ASP.NET Web Form.
Default.aspx.cs or Default.aspx.vb The code-behind file for the Web Form. Default.aspx.designer.cs or Default.aspx.designer.vb
The design-time partial class for the Web Form.
Web.config
The Web configuration file that contains the configuration settings for the Web application.
WebApplicationName.csproj or WebApplicationName.vbproj
The XML document that contains references to all project items—such as forms and classes—in addition to project references and compilation options.
WebApplicationName.csproj.user The project settings for the user. or WebApplicationName.vbproj.use r
Note: The Bin and Obj folders are hidden by default. In Solution Explorer, use the Show All Files button to display the folders. When you build an ASP.NET Web application project, Visual Studio 2010 creates an assembly in the Bin folder of the project. An assembly is one .dll file that is created from all the code-behind pages that make up a Web application. A solution file, .sln, is also created. This file has the same name as the project, followed by the .sln extension, and it contains information about the projects and miscellaneous nonproject-specific files. Initially, the solution file only contains information about the Web application project. To open a previously created ASP.NET Web application project, open the solution file in Visual Studio 2010.
Containers: Solutions and Projects Solutions and projects contain items that represent the references, data connections, folders, and files that you need to create your application. A solution can contain multiple projects, and a project typically contains multiple items. These containers enable you to utilize IDE in the following ways: •
Manage settings for your entire solution, or for individual projects.
•
Use Solution Explorer to manage the file management details, while you focus on project development.
•
Add items to the solution, or to multiple projects in the solution, without referencing any item in each individual project.
•
Work on miscellaneous files that are independent from solutions or projects.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-31
Items: Files, References, and Data Connections Items can be files or other parts of your project, such as references, data connections, or folders. In Solution Explorer, items can be organized in the following ways: •
As project items, which are items that compose your project. Project items include forms, source files, and classes within a project in Solution Explorer. The project item organization and display depends on the project template that you select, and any modifications that you make.
•
As solution items for files that are applicable to your solution as a whole. Solution items display in the Solution Items folder of Solution Explorer.
•
As miscellaneous files that are not associated with either a project or a solution. These files display in a Miscellaneous Files folder.
Question: What containers does Visual Studio provide?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Web Site Project Files and Folders
Key Points In Visual Studio 2010, you can create a Web site by using the ASP.NET Web site project template. The Web site project model generally offers more features and additional flexibility in the management of Web applications, than that of a Web application project model.
Web Site Project Template Files When you create a Web site by using the ASP.NET Web site project template, Visual Studio 2010 creates a Solution folder for the project. However, unlike the Web application project Solution folder, the .sln solution file is not contained in this folder. Instead, this file is by default stored in the Visual Studio 2010\Projects subfolder of the user’s Documents folder. This file stores some of the information contained in the project file, if you create a Web application project. This is necessary to identify the content of the Web site project. The Web site project Solution folder contains the subfolders and files listed in the following table. Folder/file name
Description
Account
This folder contains a number of files, all relating to user authentication.
App_Data
This folder is for storing data files, such as SQL Server 2008 Express edition database files.
Scripts
This folder contains jQuery script files, but it can also be used for any type of script files.
About.aspx, and either About.aspx.vb or About.aspx.cs
This is the About Web Form and the corresponding code-behind file. The Web form displays an About this Web site message.
Default.aspx, and
This is the Default Web Form and the corresponding code-behind file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
Folder/file name
Description
Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs
The Web Form is the home page for the Web site.
Global.asax
This is the Global Application File, which contains a number of methods relating to the Web Application or the current user session.
Site.master, and Site.master.vb or Site.master.cs
This is the master page and the related code-behind file for the Web site.
Web.config
This is configuration file for the Web site.
2-33
When you publish a Web site project, Visual Studio 2010 can create multiple assemblies for the Web site. To open a previously created ASP.NET Web site project, open the Solution file in Visual Studio 2010. Alternatively, you can open the file by using the File, Open, Web Site menu command.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Choosing Between a Web Site and a Web Application Project
Key Points In Visual Studio 2010, you can create a Web application by using either the ASP.NET Web application project template, or the ASP.NET Web site project template. The choice of a project template depends on your requirements, and your preferred development workflow. Some developers will find the Web site project model easy to use, because resources are defined implicitly by being in a folder. Other developers will prefer to use the Web application project model in which they have tighter control over their project, because resources are defined explicitly in the project file.
ASP.NET Web Applications The main difference between the two types of Web application project templates in Visual Studio 2010 is the inclusion of a project file in the ASP.NET Web application project template. The ASP.NET Web site project template creates a project that is folder-based—that is, all content in the main Web site project folder is automatically part of the project. This effectively means that you can drag and drop files into this folder, whereas with a Web application project, you must add the new files to the project from within Visual Studio 2010. When compiling and building a Web application project, all class files included in the project are compiled into a single assembly that is placed in the Bin folder. The assembly is the binary unit of deployment, which means that none of the code must be deployed, except for code written in the markup files. In addition, the Web form (.aspx) files, the user control (.ascx) files, and other static content files, must be deployed. When building a Web site project, you compile the code to test it. To deploy a Web site project, you should deploy the actual source files and rely on ASP.NET dynamic compilation to compile the pages and classes in the application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-35
To run or debug any page in a Web application project, you must build the entire project, whereas with a Web site project, you can configure the build options to build the site, build an individual page, or not build at all. Because of the use of dynamic compilation, there is a distinct advantage to using the Web site project if files that need compiling will be added after the initial deployment. However, if you are concerned about deploying the source code, you should use the Web application project, since only the assembly must be deployed with the markup files, the Web form files, user control files, and other static content files. Other reasons for using the Web site project template are that you want to generate one assembly for each page, or you want to open and edit any directory as a Web project, without creating a project file. Alternatively, the reason for choosing the Web application project template is that you need to control the names of the output assemblies, which also means that you can have stand-alone classes, reference pages and user control classes. In addition, the Web application project template is the best choice if you need to build a Web application that contains multiple Web projects, or if you need to add pre-build or post-build steps and have more control over the compilation.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Web Application Files
Key Points In Visual Studio 2010, you can create different file types to support the development of your Web application.
Web Application Files Visual Studio 2010 supports the following application file types and extensions: •
ASP.NET Web Forms (.aspx). You can use ASP.NET Web Forms to build dynamic Web sites that users can access directly. ASP.NET Web Forms are supported by a code-behind file that is designated by either the extension WebForm.aspx.vb, or the extension WebForm.aspx.cs.
•
WCF services (.svc). You can use WCF services to create services that will be accessed only by other programs. WCF services are based on contracts or interfaces and code-behind files (.vb or .cs).
•
Classes. Class files use the Visual C# extension, (.cs), or Visual Basic extension (.vb). For example, the full file name for a class file named Test is Test.cs for a Visual C# project, or Test.vb for a Visual Basic project.
•
JavaScript files (.js). These files are used for containing JavaScript scripts and methods used in your Web application.
Note: For more information about code-behind pages, see Module 4, "Adding Functionality to a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form." •
Global application classes (Global.asax). The Global.asax file—also known as the ASP.NET application file—is an optional file that contains code for responding to application-level events that are raised by ASP.NET or by HttpModules. At run time, Global.asax is parsed and compiled as a dynamically generated .NET Framework class that is derived from the HttpApplication base class.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
•
2-37
Master page files (.master). Master pages allow you to create a consistent layout for the pages in your application. A single master page defines the look and feel, and standard behavior that you want for all of the pages (or a group of pages) in your application.
Note: For more information about master pages, see Module 5, "Implementing Master Pages and User Controls." •
Resource files (.resx). A resource is any non-executable data that is logically deployed with an application. A resource can be displayed in an application as an error message, or as part of the UI. Resources can contain data in a number of forms, including strings, images, and persisted objects. Storing your data in a resource file enables you to change the data without recompiling your entire application.
•
Styles.css. A CSS is a simple mechanism for adding styles—such as fonts, colors, and spacing—to Web documents. Styles.css is the default style sheet file for the Web application.
•
Web.config file. The web.config file contains configuration settings that the CLR component reads, such as the assembly binding policy and WCF services. This file also contains settings that the application can read, and the global application classes that support a project.
•
Web.sitemap file. The Web.sitemap file contains XML elements, or items that can be used to display a Menu or breadcrumb in your Web application.
Question: What are examples of files that are not based on a programming language, but will have their own extensions?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: How to Create a Simple Web Application Project
Key Points In this demonstration, you will see how to create a Web application project.
Demonstration Steps 1.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
2.
Create a Web application project. a. b. c.
3.
4.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
In the Start Page – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click New Project. In the New Project dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#. In the middle pane, click ASP.NET Web Application, and then click OK.
Add TextBox and Button controls to the Default Web Form. a.
In the Default.aspx window, click Design.
b.
In Design view, click the text You can also, click p, press the RIGHT ARROW key, and then click ENTER.
c.
In the Toolbox, expand Standard, and then double-click the Button control.
d.
In the Toolbox, under Standard, double-click the TextBox control.
Add code for the Click event handler of the Button control. •
In the Default.aspx window, double-click the Button control, and then add the following code to the Click event handler. [Visual Basic] TextBox1.Text = "You clicked the button" [Visual C#]
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-39
TextBox1.Text = "You clicked the button";
5.
Write code to catch PostBack in the Page_Load event handler. •
Type the following code in the Page_Load event handler. [Visual Basic] Protected Sub Page_Load(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Me.Load If Me.IsPostBack Then Response.Write("Server roundtrip due to postback") Else Response.Write("First time page is loaded") End If End Sub [Visual C#] protected void Page_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) { if (this.IsPostBack) { Response.Write("Server roundtrip due to postback"); } else { Response.Write("First time page is loaded"); } }
6.
Build and debug the solution. a. b.
Place the breakpoint by clicking the mouse at the beginning of the code where you check for the PostBack. In the WebApplication1 – Microsoft Visual Studio (Administrator) window, on the Debug menu, click Start Debugging.
Note: If you see a Debugging Not Enabled message box, click OK. c.
d. e. f. g.
Run the application in the debug mode, and step through the lines of code by pressing the F10 key. When the browser opens after the first debugging session, click Page on the toolbar, and then click View Source to view the source in Internet Explorer. Click the Button to post back to the server. In the Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs code window, step through the lines of code by pressing F10. In the http://localhost:1186/Default.aspx-Original Source window, click the Close button. In the http://localhost:1186/Default.aspx window, click the Close button.
Question: When you create a Web site, what folders or files does Solution Explorer display?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Deploying a Web Application
Key Points After creating and testing your Web application—whether based on the ASP.NET Web site or the ASP.NET Web application template—you will need to build and deploy the Web application on a test or production server. Visual Studio 2010 helps you build and deploy your Web application.
Servers In a development environment, you deploy the Web application on the test server after you complete the development and personal testing. The application is then thoroughly tested. There is often more than one test server, all depending on the various test phases a Web application goes through, including an integration test, and a user acceptance test (UAT). After the Web application has been fully tested and released, you can deploy it to the production server.
IIS Microsoft provides an IIS Web server for hosting Web applications. IIS supports most Windows® operating system versions, including all editions of Windows Server®, and many of the editions of Windows XP, Windows Vista®, and Windows 7.
Deployment Options There are a number of deployment options available with Visual Studio 2010. However, these are covered in later modules.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-41
Lab: Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab either by using the Visual Basic or Visual C# programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 1 of the lab page. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab page.
Introduction In this lab, you will create a simple ASP.NET Web site project, then add a server control, to a Web Form, and then configure its properties. In addition, you will build and deploy an ASP.NET Web site.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: 1.
Create a simple ASP.NET Web site project.
2.
Add a server control to a Web Form and configure its properties.
3.
Build and deploy an ASP.NET Web site.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following user name and password: •
User name: Student
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-43
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization uses Microsoft .NET applications to create, customize, and manage its customer information. Your organization decides to create a Web site for fast and easy interaction with its customers. In addition to external Customers Web site, your organization plans to create a Web site to manage customer data and services in ASP.NET. You are assigned the task of creating the Web site by using the ASP.NET Web site template, and then deploying the Web site to an IIS virtual directory.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 1: Visual C# Exercise 1: Creating an ASP.NET Web Site The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Create an empty ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Use a static port with the ASP.NET Development server.
3.
Save the Solution file.
4.
Add an existing CSS file to the Web site.
Task 1: Create an empty ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Create the empty CustomerManagement Web site with the following settings, by using the New Web Site dialog box: •
Template: Empty ASP.NET Web Site
•
Name: CustomerManagement
•
Location: File system
•
Path: D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\CS\CustomerManagement
•
Language: Visual C#
Task 2: Use a static port with the ASP.NET Development server •
In Solution Explorer, click D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\CS \CustomerManagement.
•
In the Properties window, in the Use dynamic ports list, click False.
•
In the Properties window, in the Port number box, type 1110, and then press ENTER.
Note: It may take a few seconds before the Port number property is ready for editing after setting the Use dynamic ports property.
Task 3: Save the Solution file •
In Solution Explorer, click Solution 'CustomerManagement' (1 project), and then save the solution file as D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\CS \CustomerManagement.sln, by using the Save As command on the File menu.
Task 4: Add an existing CSS file to the Web site •
Create a folder named, Styles, in the CustomerManagement Web site. Right-click the Web site in Solution Explorer, and then click New Folder.
•
Add the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\Styles\Site.css file to the Styles folder, by using the Add Existing Item dialog box. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have created a file system–based ASP.NET site, and added styles to the Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-45
Exercise 2: Adding and Configuring Server Controls in Web Forms The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a default Web Form to the Web site.
2.
Close Visual Studio 2010.
3.
Add the application title to the default Web Form.
4.
Set the control properties of the default Web Form.
5.
Apply the predefined style to the Web Form.
Task 1: Add a default Web Form to the Web site •
Add the Default.aspx Web Form to the CustomerManagement Web site by using the Add New Item dialog box.
Note: The Default Web Form displays in Source view, where you can see the elements such as form, div, and body, are empty.
Task 2: Close Visual Studio 2010 •
Save modified files.
•
Close Visual Studio 2010.
Task 3: Add the application title to the default Web Form •
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 as an administrator, by using the Run as administrator command on the context menu.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\CS folder, by using the Open Project dialog box.
•
Add a Literal control from the Toolbox to the div element in the Default.aspx window, and set its Text attribute to Customer Management, and ID property to AppTitleLiteral, by using the Properties window.
•
Save the changes, and view the default Web Form in a Web browser, by using the View in Browser context menu command.
Note: You can now view the text that you have entered in the Literal control.
Task 4: Set the control properties of the default Web Form •
Open the default Web Form in Design view.
•
Set the Visible property of the Literal control to False by using the Properties window, and then save the changes.
•
View the Web Form in the browser, and then view the source rendered to the browser, by using the Source command on the View menu of Internet Explorer.
•
Close the open Internet Explorer windows.
•
Set the Visible property of the Literal control to True. Set the Styles property of the div element by using the following properties in the Modify Style dialog box, which are accessible from the Style property in the Property window: •
Font-family: Trebuchet MS
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
•
Font-size: 22
•
Color: Gray
Save the changes, and view the default Web Form in a Web browser.
Task 5: Apply the predefined style to the Web Form •
View the changes in the Source view.
•
Add a reference to the Site.css file in the Styles folder from within the head element by dragging the Styles/Site.css file to the Default.aspx window, next to the title element.
•
Set the Class property of the div element to appTitle, and then remove the specific styles applied for the Styles property, by using the Properties window.
•
Save the changes, and view the default Web Form in a Web browser.
Note: You can now view the changes that you have made to the Literal control. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have designed the initial version of the default Web Form for your Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-47
Exercise 3: Building and Deploying an ASP.NET Web Application The main task for this exercise is to build and deploy the CustomerManagement Web site.
Task 1: Build and deploy the CustomerManagement Web site •
Build the CustomerManagement Web site, and then verify that the Web site has no errors.
•
Open the Copy Web Site tool, by selecting the Web site in Solution Explorer and then using the Web site menu.
•
Connect to local IIS in the Copy Web Site tool.
•
Create a new virtual directory below the Default Web Site, by selecting Default Web Site, and then clicking the Create New Virtual Directory button. Use the following settings: •
Alias name: CustomerManagement
•
Folder: C:\inetpub\wwwroot\CustomerManagement
•
Select and open the new virtual directory in the Open Web Site dialog box.
•
Copy the CustomerManagement Web site to the new virtual directory on the local IIS, by selecting all files and folders in the left pane of the Copy Web Site tool, and then clicking the Copy selected files from source to remote web site button.
•
View the deployed Web site in Internet Explorer at the address http://localhost:1112/CustomerManagement.
Task 2: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have built and deployed the CustomerManagement Web site to the local IIS.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 2: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Creating an ASP.NET Web Site The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Create an empty ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Use a static port with the ASP.NET Development server.
3.
Save the Solution file.
4.
Add an existing CSS file to the Web site.
Task 1: Create an empty ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Create the empty CustomerManagement Web site with the following settings, by using the New Web Site dialog box: •
Template: Empty ASP.NET Web Site
•
Name: CustomerManagement
•
Location: File system
•
Path: D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\VB\CustomerManagement
•
Language: Visual Basic
Task 2: Use a static port with the ASP.NET Development server •
In Solution Explorer, click D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\VB \CustomerManagement.
•
In the Properties window, in the Use dynamic ports list, click False.
•
In the Properties window, in the Port number box, type 1111, and then press ENTER.
Note: It may take a few seconds before the Port number property is ready for editing after setting the Use dynamic ports property.
Task 3: Save the Solution file •
In Solution Explorer, click Solution 'CustomerManagement' (1 project), and then save the solution file as D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\VB \CustomerManagement.sln, by using the Save As command on the File menu.
Task 4: Add an existing CSS file to the Web site •
Create a folder named Styles, in the CustomerManagement Web site
•
Add the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\Styles\Site.css file to the Styles folder, by using the Add Existing Item dialog box. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have created a file system–based ASP.NET site, and added styles to the Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-49
Exercise 2: Adding and Configuring Server Controls in Web Forms The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a default Web Form to the Web site.
2.
Close Visual Studio 2010.
3.
Add the application title to the default Web Form.
4.
Set the control properties of the default Web Form.
5.
Apply the predefined style to the Web Form.
Task 1: Add a default Web Form to the Web site •
Add the Default.aspx Web Form to the CustomerManagement Web site by using the Add New Item dialog box.
Note: The Default Web Form displays in Source view, where you can notice that the elements such as form, div, and body, are empty.
Task 2: Close Visual Studio 2010 •
Save modified files.
•
Close Visual Studio 2010.
Task 3: Add the application title to the default Web Form •
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 as an administrator by using the Run as administrator command on the context menu.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M2\VB folder, by using the Open Project dialog box.
•
Add a Literal control from the Toolbox to the div element in the Default.aspx window, and set its Text attribute to Customer Management, and ID property to AppTitleLiteral, by using the Properties window.
•
Save the changes, and view the default Web Form in a Web browser, by using the View in Browser context menu command.
Note: You can now view the text that you have entered in the Literal control.
Task 4: Set the control properties of the default Web Form •
Open the default Web Form in Design view.
•
Set the Visible property of the Literal control to False by using the Properties window, and then save the changes.
•
View the Web Form in the browser, and then view the source rendered to the browser, by using the Source command on the View menu of Internet Explorer.
•
Close the open Internet Explorer windows.
•
Set the Visible property of the Literal control to True.
•
Set the Styles property of the div element by using the following properties in the Modify Style dialog box, which are accessible from the Style property in the Property window:
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
•
Font-family: Trebuchet MS
•
Font-size: 22
•
Color: Gray
Save the changes, and view the default Web Form in a Web browser.
Task 5: Apply the predefined style to the Web Form •
View the changes in the Source view.
•
Add a reference to the Site.css file in the Styles folder from within the head element by dragging the Styles/Site.css file to the Default.aspx window, next to the title element.
•
Set the Class property of the div element to appTitle, and then remove the specific styles applied for the Styles property, by using the Properties window.
•
Save the changes, and view the default Web Form in a Web browser.
Note: You can now view the changes that you have made to the Literal control. Result: After completing this exercise, you will have designed the initial version of the default Web Form for your Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-51
Exercise 3: Building and Deploying an ASP.NET Web Application The main task for this exercise is to build and deploy the CustomerManagement Web site.
Task 1: Build and deploy the CustomerManagement Web site •
Open the Copy Web Site tool by selecting the Web site in Solution Explorer, and then using the Website menu.
•
Connect to local IIS in the Copy Web Site tool.
•
Create a new virtual directory below the Default Web Site, by selecting Default Web Site, and then clicking the Create New Virtual Directory button. Use the following settings: •
Alias name: CustomerManagement
•
Folder: C:\inetpub\wwwroot\CustomerManagement
•
Select and open the new virtual directory in the Open Web Site dialog box.
•
Copy the CustomerManagement Web site to the new virtual directory on the local IIS, by selecting all files and folders in the left pane of the Copy Web Site tool, and then clicking the Copy selected files from source to remote web site button.
•
View the deployed Web site in Internet Explorer at the address http://localhost:1112/CustomerManagement.
Task 2: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes. •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine. Result: After completing this exercise, you will have built and deployed the CustomerManagement Web site to the local IIS.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Review
1.
How did you create a Web site?
2.
Can you think of a reason why an ASP.NET Web Form (.aspx) has an associated code-behind file?
3.
How do you show or hide a server control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 and Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
2-53
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
How would you select a .NET-based programming language to create a new Web application project?
2.
What role does common language runtime play in running an ASP.NET page?
3.
What is the role of the JIT compilation?
4.
List some of the languages that are currently supported by the .NET Framework.
5.
Why would you create a component for a Web application?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You want to create a WCF service. What is the easiest way to implement this? Use the WCF Service Application project template.
2.
You want to create a reusable component that you can share with other projects. What is the easiest way to implement this? Use the Class Library project template.
Tools Tool
Function
Where to find it
Editor window
Displays code for editing and a graphical interface for control placement.
Visual Studio IDE
Solution Explorer
Displays the hierarchy of project files, and enables you to move and modify files.
Visual Studio IDE
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
2-54
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Tool
Function
Where to find it
Properties window
Enables you to adjust the properties of documents, classes, and controls.
Visual Studio IDE
Task List
Enables you to track the status of tasks as you develop your application.
Visual Studio IDE
Output
Displays status messages for various features in IDE.
Visual Studio IDE
Toolbox
Enables you to use a drag-andVisual Studio IDE drop operation on the controls in your application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-1
Module 3 Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form Contents: Lesson 1: Creating Web Forms
3-3
Lesson 2: Adding and Configuring Server Controls in a Web Form
3-10
Lab: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form
3-28
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Forms are the user interface (UI) elements that give your Web applications their look and feel. A Web Form presents information to the user in any type of browser, and it implements application logic by using server-side code. Microsoft Visual Studio provides an intuitive drag-and-drop interface to help create the UI for your Web application. In this module, you will learn how to create Web Forms, and populate them with server controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-3
Lesson 1
Creating Web Forms
Web Forms consist of a combination of markup, code, and controls that run on a Web server, such as Internet Information Services (IIS). Web Forms are commonly referred to as ASP.NET pages, or .aspx pages. You can create Web Forms by using Microsoft Visual Basic® or Microsoft Visual C#®. When creating Web Forms, you can choose whether or not to place the code in a separate file. In this lesson, you will learn what a Web Form is, and how to create a Web Form. You will also learn how to identify the key characteristics of Web Forms.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe an ASP.NET Web Form.
•
Explain how to create an ASP.NET Web Form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is a Web Form?
Key Points Web Forms are the containers for the text and controls that you want to display in the browser. Web Forms generate Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), and send it to the browser. However, controls that run the UI remain on the Web server. This split between the client-side interface and the server-side code is a crucial difference between Web Forms and traditional Web pages. On a traditional Web page, the browser on the client side processes the code. By contrast, Web Forms send only the markup and any client-side script to the browser, while the page processing remains on the server. This split between the client-side interface and the server-side code increases the number of supported browsers, and enhances the security and functionality of the Web page.
The .aspx Extension •
Web Forms have an .aspx extension, and often consist of two separate files:
•
The .aspx file that contains the UI for the Web Form.
•
The .aspx.vb (Virtual Basic code) or .aspx.cs (Virtual C# code) file that contains the supporting code. This file is called the code-behind file.
Page Directives, Declarations, and Elements Five levels of directives, declarations, and elements define the functions of a Web Form: •
The Page directive and associated attributes define global functions.
•
The !DOCTYPE element and associated attributes specify the document type definition (DTD) to which the Web Form conforms.
•
The HTML element and associated attributes verify that the Web Form contains HTML elements.
•
The BODY element and associated attributes defines and contains all the content a page.
•
The FORM element and associated attributes define how groups of controls are processed.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-5
Page Directive and Attributes The page directive @ Page defines the page-specific attributes that are used by the ASP.NET page parser and compiler. You must include only one page directive tag for each Web Form. The following examples show the typical attributes for the page directive, for a new Visual C# and Visual Basic Web Form. [Visual Basic] [Visual C#]
The attributes of a page directive include: •
AutoEventWireUp. The AutoEventWireUp attribute is used to indicate if the event methods pagelevel events are automatically wired up. This means that the Page_Load event, for instance, is automatically wired up to be caught and handled—if you add the corresponding event handler and add some code to it—to the code-behind file. For Visual C#, the default value is true, but for Visual Basic, the default value is false. When AutoEventWireup is true, ASP.NET does not require that you explicitly bind event handlers to page events, such as Load or Init. Instead, handlers are automatically bound to events at run time, based on their name and signature. For each event, ASP.NET searches for a method that is named according to the pattern Page_eventname, such as Page_Load or Page_Init. ASP.NET first checks for an overload that has the typical event-handler signature Object and EventArgs. If an event handler with this signature is not found, ASP.NET checks for an overload that has no parameters. When AutoEventWireup is false, you must explicitly bind event handlers to events. In that case, the method names do not have to follow a pattern.
•
CodeBehind. The CodeBehind attribute specifies the name of the compiled file that contains the class associated with the page. This attribute is used with Web application projects (WAPs).
•
CodeFile. The CodeFile attribute specifies the path to the referenced code-behind file for a page that uses the two-file configuration. This attribute is used together with the inherits attribute to associate the code-behind file carrying the logic that supports the Web Form. This attribute is used with Web Site projects (WSP).
•
Inherits. The Inherits attribute defines the name of the code-behind class that the page inherits. The Inherits attribute is case sensitive when the page language is Visual C#, and it is not case sensitive when the page language is Visual Basic. This attribute is used with the CodeFile attribute, which contains the path to the source file for the code-behind class. Notice how the CodeFile attribute in the preceding examples specifies a file starting with Default, but the value for the Inherits attribute is set to _Default. This is because Default is a keyword in Visual Basic, and Visual Studio 2010 automatically prefixes the class name with an underscore to prevent name conflicts. This is the same for Visual C#, where there is no capitalized Default keyword. However, remember that lowercase default is a keyword in Visual C#, which is case sensitive.
•
Language. The Language attribute specifies the programming language in which the server-side code on the Web Form is written. This includes the code-behind file, the inline code, and code declaration blocks on the page. Some of the values for this attribute are Visual C# and Visual Basic, and the values are used to indicate which compiler to use to parse and compile the page.
•
Title. The Title attribute specifies the title of the page, and displays as the caption of the browser, and on the tab if your browser session is tabbed. Setting this attribute has the same effect as adding a TITLE element within the HTML element. However, if both are specified, the title attribute of the Page directive takes precedence.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Note: When you create a Web Form and select the option to place code in a separate file (which is the default), the CodeFile and Inherits attributes are used in a two-file configuration. Singlefile Web Forms do not use these attributes.
!DOCTYPE Element and Attributes The !DOCTYPE element and associated attributes specify the DTD to which the Web Form conforms. The following is a typical !DOCTYPE element created by Visual Studio 2010.
The !DOCTYPE element is generally used to specify the HTML or Extensible HTML (XHTML) version that the Web Form complies with. You can find more information about the !DOCTYPE declaration element in the Visual Studio 2010 Help.
The HTML Element and Attributes The HTML element and associated attributes identify that the Web Form contains HTML. In the standards-compliant mode, the HTML element represents the entire surface on which a document's content can be rendered. The HTML element also becomes the positioning container for positioned elements that do not have a positioned parent, for example, a parent element or container that is positioned differently than the default behavior. The following is a typical HTML element. This element is not rendered, and typically does not contain any attributes. ...
The BODY Element and Attributes The BODY element and attributes define how objects appear on the client's browser. In the nonstandards-compliant mode, the body element represents the entire surface on which you can render content. The following is a typical body element.
The attributes of a BODY element include: •
class. The class attribute determines the cascading style sheets (CSS) class that provides the style elements in the body of the Web Form.
•
title. The title attribute defines a string that will be used as the tool tip when the pointer is placed on any HTML elements or server controls that are in the body of a Web Form.
Note: You can use CSS to describe the look and formatting of a Web Form, or to style HTML Web pages, by specifying the colors, fonts, borders, and layout. CSS helps separate the markup from the presentation. This introduces reuse of styles across more than a single Web Form to cover an entire Web site. Although styles are reused, different styles will generally be applied to different pages. In Visual Studio 2010, you can use the Apply Styles window to apply styles to a specific HTML element or Web server control, and you can use the Manage Styles window to manage and keep track of all the styles in your Web application. Both of these windows are accessible from the View menu.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-7
The FORM Element and Attributes The tag is different from the tag that defines the entire Web page. The tag attributes define how groups of controls are processed. Although you can have many HTML forms on a page, you can have only one server-side form on an .aspx page. The following is a typical FORM element. ...
Attributes of a FORM element include: •
id. This id attribute identifies the form server-side code when programmatic access is required.
•
method. The method attribute identifies the method for sending control values back to the server. The options for this attribute are:
•
•
post. Data is passed in name/value pairs in the body of the HTTP request. This is the default value.
•
get. Data is passed in a query string.
runat. The runat="server" attribute indicates that the form should be processed on the server. The runat="server" attribute causes the form to post control information back to the ASP.NET page on the server on which the supporting code runs. If the runat attribute is not set to "server" or is omitted, the form works as a regular HTML form.
Question: What are the two components that make up Web Forms?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
How to Create a Web Form
Key Points When you create a new, empty Web application or an empty Web site in Visual Studio 2010, only a web.config file is included.
Creating a New ASP.NET Web Application Project 1.
In Visual Studio 2010, on the File menu, click New Project.
2.
In the New Project dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
3.
In the middle pane, click Empty ASP.NET Web Application.
4.
In the Name and Location boxes, type the name and location for the project, and then click OK. Visual Studio 2010 creates a new Web application.
Creating a New ASP.NET Web Site Project 1.
In Visual Studio 2010, on the File menu, click New Web Site.
2.
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, click Visual Basic or Visual C#.
3.
In the middle pane, click Empty ASP.NET Web Site.
4.
In the Location box, type the location for the Web site, and then click OK. Visual Studio 2010 creates a new Web site.
Adding a Web Form to an Existing Web Application or Web Site If you are expanding an existing project, you can use Solution Explorer to add additional Web Forms. 1.
In Solution Explorer, right-click an existing Web application project name or Web site project name, and then click Add New Item. Alternatively, in Solution Explorer, right-click an existing Web application project name or Web site project name, and on the Website menu, click Add New Item, or press the CTRL+SHIFT+A keys.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-9
2.
In the Add New Item dialog box, in the middle pane, click the Web Form template.
3.
In the Name box, type the name of the Web Form.
4.
To create a code-behind file for a Web site project, select the Place code in separate file check box, and then click Add. Visual Studio 2010 creates a new Web Form and adds it to the existing Web project or Web site.
Question: Which tool can you use to add additional Web Forms if you are expanding an existing project?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 2
Adding and Configuring Server Controls in a Web Form
ASP.NET server controls run on the server and encapsulate UI and other related functionalities. These server controls—such as buttons, text boxes, and lists—are different from standard HTML controls in that the supporting logic runs on the server, and not in the user's browser. In this lesson, you will learn how to use ASP.NET server controls.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe an ASP.NET server control.
•
Describe the types of server controls.
•
Save the View state of server controls.
•
Add and configure HTML server controls.
•
Add and configure Web server controls.
•
Determine the appropriate server control for a Web Form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-11
What Is a Server Control?
Key Points ASP.NET server controls run on the server and encapsulate the UI. You can use server controls in ASP.NET Web Forms, and use them to respond to events in ASP.NET Web Form code-behind classes. The following is an example of a Button Web server control.
The following is an example of an input HTML server control.
runat="server" Server controls have a runat attribute, which can only be set to the value of server. Note: In some situations, server controls require a client script to function correctly. If a user has disabled scripting in the browser, the controls might not function as you intend. However, most of the intrinsic controls will work correctly with or without client-side scripting. Another feature of server controls is that the View state, the settings, and the user input for the control are automatically saved when the page passes between the client and the server. Traditional HTML elements are stateless and revert to their default settings when the page returns from the server to the client. Note: For more information about View state, see the “Saving View State" topic later in this lesson.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Built-in Functionality The functionality of a server control relates to what happens when the user clicks a command button or a list box. These processes are called event handlers. As a Web Form programmer, you need to determine the event handlers that will be implemented for each server control.
Common Object Model In ASP.NET, server controls use a common object model; as a result, they share several attributes. For example, when you want to set the background color for a Web server control, you always use the same BackColor attribute, regardless of the control. The following markup for a Web server control button shows some of the typical attributes of a server control.
Creating Browser-Specific HTML When a page is rendered for a browser, the Web server controls determine the type of browser that is requesting the page, and then deliver the appropriate HTML. For example, if the requesting browser supports client-side scripting such as Windows Internet Explorer® 8, the controls create client-side script to implement their functionality. However, if the requesting browser does not support client-side script, the controls create server-side code and require more round trips to the server to obtain the same functionality. The following is the XHTML script that you would write to create a text box with the default text “Enter your Username”. Enter your Username
When a user using Internet Explorer 8 accesses this page, the common language runtime creates the following HTML element, which is customized for Internet Explorer 8.
Because the server control creates customized HTML for the features that are available in the client's browser, you can write code for the newest browsers and not be concerned about browser errors. Your code will work even if users do not have the latest browser versions. Question: Which attribute makes a control a server control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-13
Types of Server Controls
Key Points ASP.NET has many different available server controls. Some server controls closely resemble traditional HTML elements, while other server controls are specific to ASP.NET. The wide range of controls helps you customize your Web Form to match your application.
HTML Server Controls By default, HTML elements on a Web Form are not available to the server. HTML elements are treated as plain text that is passed through to the browser. However, you can add the runat="server" attribute and value to convert HTML elements to HTML server controls. This changes the HTML elements to elements that you can program by using server-side code. The following table lists some of the most commonly used HTML elements. Both HTML server controls and Web server controls are rendered as one or more of these elements. Element name
Description
Example
a
An anchor element that links to another page, image, or other resource.
Page 2
br
A self-closing element that adds a line break to the page.
img
A self-closing element that embeds an image on the page.
input
Specifies different types of input elements, including
select
Creates a selection “menu” with at least one option.
Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
title
Specifies the page title.
Login Page
Web Server Controls Web server controls include form-type controls—such as buttons, lists, and text boxes—and specialpurpose controls, such as calendars. Web server controls are more abstract than HTML server controls. Since the object model does not necessarily reflect the HTML syntax, Web server controls are more flexible and powerful than HTML server controls. Web server controls are server controls that are created specifically for ASP.NET. Unlike HTML server controls, Web server controls will not function if the runat="server" attribute is missing. Because Web server controls are based on a common object model, all controls share several attributes, including asp:ControlType and an id attribute. Web server controls exist in the System.Web.UI.WebControls namespace, and you can use them in any Web Form.
Standard Web Server Controls Standard controls contain two groups of controls: intrinsic controls, and complex controls. •
Intrinsic controls. Intrinsic controls match the simple HTML elements, such as buttons, lists, and text boxes. You use these controls in the same manner that you use HTML server controls.
•
Complex controls. Complex controls can either be controls that work with static and dynamic data, controls that act as containers for other controls, or controls that include multiple functions. An example of a complex control is the Calendar control, which provides an appointment calendar that helps a user select a date in the correct format.
Intrinsic standard Web server controls correspond to simple HTML elements. The following table describes some of the commonly used intrinsic Web server controls. Web server control
HTML control equivalent
Web server control function
Creates a button that sends a request to the server.
Creates a check box that the user can select.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
Web server control
HTML control equivalent
Web server control function
Creates a hyperlink to an HTML anchor tag.
Creates an image.
Creates a button that incorporates the display of an image, instead of text.
Creates text that users cannot edit.
Creates a list of choices, and enables multiple selections.
Creates a borderless division on the form that serves as a container for other controls.
Creates a single radio button control.
Creates a table.
Creates a text box control.
3-15
Complex standard controls insert complex functions into your Web Form. The following table describes some of the complex controls. Control
Function
AdRotator
Displays a predefined or random sequence of images.
Calendar
Displays a graphic calendar on which users can select dates.
FileUpload
Provides users with a way to upload a file from to the server.
Wizard
Provides navigation and a UI to collect related data across multiple steps.
Data Controls Data controls contain two groups of controls: data-bound controls, and data source controls: •
Data-bound controls. Data-bound controls are used to display data from a data source.
•
Data source controls. Data source controls are used as an intermediary control between a data source such as a database or an XML file, and one or more data controls.
Note: For more information about data controls, see Module 8, "Managing Data in a Microsoft ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application." The following table describes some of the most common data-bound controls. Control
Function
Chart
Enables you to create ASP.NET pages with simple, intuitive, and visually compelling charts for complex statistical or financial analysis.
DataList
Displays rows of database information in a customizable format.
DetailsView
Displays a single row of data from a data source by using a tabular layout, where
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Control
Function each row field is displayed as a row of its own.
FormView
Displays a single row of data from a data source by using a layout defined by a template.
GridView
Displays tabular data in a grid.
ListView
Displays data in a format that you define by using templates and styles. Implicitly supports Edit, Insert, and Delete operations, in addition to the sorting and paging functionality. This is also true if the control is not bound to a data source.
QueryExtender
Used to create filters for data that is retrieved from a data source. The control can be used to filter data in the markup of a Web page by using a declarative syntax.
Repeater
Displays information from a data set by using a set of HTML elements and controls that you specify. The Repeater control repeats the element once for each record in the data set.
The following table describes some of the commonly used data source controls. Control
Function
AccessDataSource
Connects to data from a Microsoft Access® database for use with data-bound controls.
EntityDataSource
Represents an Entity Data Model (EDM) to data-bound controls in an ASP.NET application.
LinqDataSource
Connects to data from either a database or an in-memory data collection (such as an array), and exposes language-integrated query (LINQ) to Web developers.
SiteMapDataSource
Exposes navigation data retrieved from a site map provider.
SqlDataSource
Connects to data that is located in a relational data base, such as Microsoft SQL Server®.
XmlDataSource
Connects to data in XML format, whether hierarchical or tabular.
Note: For more information about LINQ, see Module 9, "Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ."
Validation Controls Validation controls are hidden controls that validate user input against predetermined patterns. If the user input does not conform to the requirements, an error message displays. Validation controls incorporate logic that allows you to test user input. To test user input, you can associate a validation control with the input control, and then specify the conditions for valid user input. Note: For more information about validation controls, see Module 6, "Validating User Input."
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-17
The following table describes the validation controls. Control
Function
CompareValidator
Requires that the input matches a second input or existing field.
CustomValidator
Requires that the input matches a condition such as prime or odd numbers.
RangeValidator
Requires that the input is within a specified range.
RegularExpressionValidator
Requires that the input matches a specified format such as a U.S. telephone number, or a strong password that consists of numbers and letters.
RequiredFieldValidator
Requires that the user enters some value before the control is processed.
ValidationSummary
Collects all the validation control error messages for centralized display.
Login Controls Login controls work together to provide a robust login solution that requires very little code. Note: For more information about login controls, see Module 15, "Securing a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Application." The following table describes the Login controls. Control
Function
ChangePassword
Enables users to change the Web site password.
CreateUserWizard
Adds a new user to the Web site.
Login
Displays a user interface for user authentication, including user name and password text boxes, and a Login button.
LoginName
Displays a user's login name, if logged in.
LoginStatus
Displays a login link for users who log in, and a logout link for logged-in users.
LoginView
Displays different information to anonymous users and logged-in users.
PasswordRecovery
Used to retrieve user passwords.
Navigation Controls Navigation controls are used to create navigational aids on ASP.NET Web pages, including menus and breadcrumbs. The following table describes the navigation controls. Control
Function
Menu
Supports displaying a main menu and submenus, but also allows you to define dynamic menus.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Control
Function
SiteMapPath
Displays a navigation path/breadcrumb showing the current page location.
TreeView
Displays hierarchical data in a tree structure.
Example of Equivalent Controls The following example shows the HTML code for three button controls: an HTML button, an HTML server control button, and a Web server control button. All button controls appear identical on the user’s browser. The HTML button raises only client-side events, while the HTML server control button and the Web server control button raise server-side events. The following example is of an HTML button control.
Adding the attribute runat="server" converts the preceding HTML button control into an HTML server control that will run on the server. Note that in addition to the runat="server" attribute, you must add an id attribute for the control to function as a server control. The following example is of an HTML server control button.
The following example is of a Web server control button.
Question: Which types of server controls exist for ASP.NET?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Form
3-19
Saving View State
Key Points One of the difficulties for Web sites is to save the state of controls (settings and user input) while the HTML is sent back and forth between the client and the server. It is true for any HTTP-based technology that Web Forms are stateless by nature, which means that the server does not retain any information between client requests. ASP.NET Web Forms saves the state of controls by adding the hidden control __VIEWSTATE, which records the state of the controls on the Web Form. Specifically, Web Forms adds __VIEWSTATE to the server-side form element, and only records the state of controls in this section. As the page travels back and forth from the client to the server, the server control state is kept with the page and can be updated at either the client or at the server end of the transaction. View state is the method that the ASP.NET page framework uses to preserve page and control values between round trips. When the HTML markup for the page is rendered, the current state of the page and values that must be retained during postback are serialized into base 64-encoded strings. These values are then entered into the View state hidden field. This process makes it easier for server controls to automatically retain their values between server round-trips, without any coding. View state is only useful within the same Web Form as it travels back and forth between the client and server. You cannot use View state between different Web Forms. View state lowers the server load, but performance can suffer because of the increased HTML size, which means that it takes longer to render the page on the client. Because the state of the Web page is kept inside the server form, the Web page can be randomly routed in a Web server farm, and does not have to keep returning to the same server. The advantage of the View state process is that the programmer can focus on the page’s design, and does not have to build infrastructure to track Page state. You can use View state to persist application data that is specific to a single page, including a product ID or a user ID. You can also use View state in other scenarios, such as for statistical reasons if you want to know how many times a user postbacks the same page in sequence to the server.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
3-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Disabling and Enabling ViewState By default, a Web Form saves the controls’ View state on the Web Form. However, for Web Forms with multiple controls, the size of the __VIEWSTATE properties value field can slow the performance. To maximize page performance, you might want to disable the __VIEWSTATE attribute at the page level, and enable the View state only for selected controls. To disable the View state at the Web page level, set the EnableViewState attribute of the Page directive to false. The following code illustrates this.
To disable the View state for a specific control, set the EnableViewState attribute of the control to false. The following code illustrates this. Keep in mind that if the EnableViewState attribute of the Page directive is set to false, you cannot override this for an individual control on that page.
You can also use the ViewStateMode property to control how View state is enabled for individual controls, such as when View state is disabled for a page. ...
9.
•
In the Order.aspx window, place the cursor next to the OrderCancelButton TextBox control, and then press ENTER.
•
In the Toolbox, expand Validation, and then double-click ValidationSummary.
•
In Properties window, in the (ID) box, type OrderValidationSummary.
Save the Order Web Form, and view the changes in the browser. •
In the Validation– Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click Save Order.aspx.
•
In Solution Explorer, right-click Order.aspx, and then click View in Browser.
Note: Notice that today’s date has been added to the Order Date box. 10. Save the order. •
In the Order Entry – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Save button.
Note: Notice that there is an asterisk next to the Due Date box, and an error message in the validation summary at the bottom. 11. Specify an invalid due date, and save the order. •
In the Order Entry – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Due Date box, type a date that is 31 days from today’s date, in the format m/d/yyyy, and then click the Save button.
Note: Notice that there is an asterisk next to the Due Date box, at the same location as the one shown on the previous try to save the order, and there is a different error message in the validation summary at the bottom. 12. Specify a valid due date, and save the order. •
In the Order Entry – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Due Date box, type a date that is 30 days or less from today’s date, in the format m/d/yyyy, and then click the Save button.
Note: Notice that there are no validation errors. 13. Specify an invalid email address and save the order. •
In the Order Entry – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Email Address box, type claus@cohowinery, and then click the Save button.
Note: Notice that there is an asterisk next to the Email Address box, and an error message in the validation summary at the bottom. 14. Specify a valid email address, and save the order. •
In the Order Entry – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Email Address box, type
[email protected], and then click the Save button.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-25
Note: Notice that there are no validation errors. 15. Close Windows® Internet Explorer®. •
In the Order Entry – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
Question: Why do validation controls share the same validation properties?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Positioning and Configuring Validation Controls on a Web Form
Key Points Input validation controls can display an error message when an input violation has occurred. It is important to position input validation controls so that it is clear to the user which control has the incorrect input. In Visual Studio 2010, you must position the validation control on the page where the error message text should appear. The following code is the standard markup for an input validation control.
ASP.NET input validation controls contain two error message properties—an ErrorMessage property, and a Text property—both of which can be displayed at the location of the input validation control. The distinction between these two error message properties is as follows: •
ErrorMessage. This property is the error message that displays at the location of a validation control when the validation control is triggered, if the Text property is not set. This message will also be included in a ValidationSummary control, if you use one on the Web Form.
•
Text. This property is the alternative text that will display at the location of the validation control when both the ErrorMessage property and Text property are used and the validation control is triggered. If you use a ValidationSummary control to collect error messages, you typically use a red asterisk (*) to the right of the invalid input control to indicate the location of the error.
In Visual Studio 2010, by default, the value for the Text property is placed between the begin and end tags of the validation control. The following code illustrates this scenario. TextValue
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-27
You can explicitly declare the Text property. The following code illustrates this approach. or
Setting the Display Property The Display property sets the spacing of error messages from multiple validation controls on a Web Form. The Display property affects only error messages at the validation control location. Messages that are displayed in the ValidationSummary are not affected by the Display property. The following table describes the Display property options. Option
Description
Static
Defines a fixed layout for the error message that causes each validation control to occupy space, even when no error message text is visible. This option allows you to define a fixed layout for the page, and it is the default option in Visual Studio 2010.
Dynamic
Enables validation controls to render on the page as part of the text flow. You can use this option to prevent the display of blank spaces on the page when input validation controls are not triggered. This option sometimes causes controls to move on the Web Form when error messages display.
None
Blocks the display of the error message at the location of the validation control.
The ValidationSummary control should be placed where it makes sense for the user to look, if the page is not posted back to the server. This quite often means placing the ValidationSummary control near the submit button(s).
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 3
Validating Web Forms
You should always validate user input at the source, as a best practice. However, to avoid script exploits and to ensure that validation is performed, you should manually apply server-side validation. You can add server-side validation code to your ASP.NET Web Forms by using Visual Studio 2010.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Add the ValidationSummary control.
•
Programmatically validate Web Forms.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-29
Adding the ValidationSummary Control
Key Points The ValidationSummary control displays error messages when the Page.IsValid property returns false. Each of the validation controls on the page is polled, and the ValidationSummary control aggregates the ErrorMessage messages. The ValidationSummary control is not a control that performs validations on the content input in your Web Forms; instead, this control is the reporting control that is used by the other validation controls on a page. You can use this validation control to consolidate error reporting for all the validation errors that occur on a page, instead of requiring each and every individual validation control to do this.
Display Text and Error Messages The ValidationSummary control can display a message box or a text area, with a static header and a list of errors. Depending on the value of the DisplayMode property, you can display the error messages as a bulleted list or as a single paragraph. You can use the ValidationSummary control for larger forms, which have a comprehensive form validation process. It is user-friendly to have all the possible validation errors reported to the user in a single and easily identifiable manner. ValidationSummary controls are usually placed near the Submit button so that all the error messages are visible to the user when the input validation controls are triggered. The following HTML code example demonstrates a typical ValidationSummary control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Locating Errors The Text property of a validation control displays at the location of the validation control, and the ErrorMessage property displays in the ValidationSummary control display. A Text property with a red asterisk (*) typically displays to the right of the input control to warn the user that the input control has not been filled in correctly. An ErrorMessage property with a description of the input error displays in the ValidationSummary control, which is usually placed near the event that triggers the control. Question: How will you summarize error messages from a group of validation controls on a Web Form?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-31
Programmatically Validating Web Forms
Key Points The ASP.NET validation controls perform validation automatically when a Web Form is posted back to the server. This happens after page initialization, but before the control event-handling code is run. Sometimes you may want to apply your own validation programmatically: •
If you are adding controls dynamically at run time.
•
If you are setting validation values at run time, such as the MinimumValue or MaximumValue of the RangeValidator control.
•
If you need to determine the validity of a page or an individual control in the Page_Load event handler, such as preventing the access of certain server-side resources—like a database—when a page is invalid.
The IsValid property determines the validity of the page or a validation control. The problem with this property is that when it is set, it is accessible without an exception being thrown. So, if you want to determine validity before the validation control event handler methods are run, you can programmatically start the validation by calling the Validate method of the page or control. The following code examples demonstrate how you can call the Validate method. [Visual Basic] Me.Validate()
[Visual C#] this.Validate();
Another example for apply your own programmatic validation is when you are working with the RangeValidator control, and you are setting the MinimumValue property at run time based on values read from a configuration file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
After the validation runs, you can check the IsValid property of the Page. If the IsValid property is false, then you will need to find out which of the individual controls are failing the validation by checking the IsValid property of each validation control. When a control performs its validation check, the IsValid property is set accordingly. When an error is detected and the page is returned to the user, the error messages display. The following code examples illustrate how you can validate a page on postback, and find the validation control that caused the validation error. [Visual Basic] ' User postback? If Me.IsPostBack Then ' Validate page Me.Validate() ' Is page valid? If Not Me.IsValid Then ' Loop through validation controls to see which ' generated the error(s) For Each controlValidator As IValidator In Validators If controlValidator.IsValid = False Then ... End If Next End If End If
[Visual C#] // User postback? if (this.IsPostBack) { // Validate page this.Validate();
}
// Is page valid? if (!this.IsValid) { // Loop through all validation controls to see which // generated the error(s) foreach (IValidator controlValidator in this.Validators) { if (!controlValidator.IsValid) { ... } } }
Question: How do you verify if the content of a control or a page is valid?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-33
Lab: Validating User Input
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab either by using either the Microsoft Visual Basic® or Microsoft Visual C#® programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab document. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab document.
Lab Introduction In this lab, you will add and configure validation controls in a user control to help you ensure valid user inputs in a Web project. You will use client-side scripting, which will help you avoid frequent crosschecking of user inputs with the server. In addition, you will perform server-side validation to protect the Web project against spoofing and malicious code.
Lab Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Add validation controls.
•
Configure validation controls.
•
Add server-side validation.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: •
User name: Student
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization uses a Web site to manage its customer information. For effective communication, the organization should maintain updated customer information in their database. To meet this requirement, you need to add and configure validation controls to the Customer Management project without causing administrative overheads or performance issues from frequent cross-checking with the server.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-35
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Adding Validation Controls The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing Web site.
2.
Add validation controls to the user control.
Task 1: Open an existing Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M6\VB folder.
Task 2: Add validation controls to the user control •
View the markup of the Customer user control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerFirstNameRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerFirstNameTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerLastNameRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerLastNameTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerAddressRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerAddressTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerZipCodeRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerZipCodeTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerCityRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerCityTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerWebAddressTextBox control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox control.
•
Add a RegularExpressionValidator control named CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator, for the CustomerEmailAddressTextBox control.
•
Add a RegularExpressionValidator control named CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator, for the CustomerWebAddressTextBox control.
•
Add a RangeValidator control named CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator, for the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox control.
•
Add a ValidationSummary control named CustomerValidationSummary, for the CustomerInsertButton control.
•
Format the Customer.ascx user control.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
•
Test the functionality of the Customer user control.
•
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®. Result: After completing this exercise, you will have added validation controls to a user control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-37
Exercise 2: Configuring Validation Controls The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Remove validation from the Cancel button.
2.
Add error indicators and error messages to the validation controls.
3.
Set the e-mail address and credit limit validation controls.
Task 1: Remove validation from the Cancel button •
View the default Response.Redirect method of the Cancel button. ''' ''' Redirects to home page ''' ''' ''' ''' Protected Sub CustomerCancelButton_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles CustomerCancelButton.Click ' Redirect to home page Response.Redirect("~/Default.aspx") End Sub
•
Disable the validation caused by the CustomerCancelButton control by setting the CausesValidation property in the user control to false.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
Note: Notice that the Web browser is redirected to the default Web Form, instead of displaying the error messages.
Task 2: Add error indicators and error messages to the validation controls •
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerFirstNameRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerFirstNameRequiredFieldValidator control to The Customer First Name must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerLastNameRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerLastNameRequiredFieldValidator control to The Customer Last Name must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerAddressRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerAddressRequiredFieldValidator control to The Address must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerZipCodeRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerZipCodeRequiredFieldValidator control to The Zip Code must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCityRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCityRequiredFieldValidator control to The City must be filled in.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control to A country must be selected.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator control to The Email Address must be valid.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator control to The Web Address must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator control to The Web Address must be valid.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator control to The Credit Limit must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control to The Credit Limit must be within the valid range.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Email Address box, type contoso.com, press the TAB key, in the Web Address box, type www.contoso, and then press the TAB key again.
Note: If an AutoComplete message box displays, click No. Note: Notice the error indicator that displays next to the Email Address and Web Address boxes, because of the invalid e-mail and web addresses. •
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Insert button.
Note: Notice the error indicator and error messages next to the First Name, Last Name, Address, Zip Code, City, Country, and Credit Limit controls. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
Task 3: Set the e-mail address and credit limit validation controls •
View the InsertCustomer.aspx Web Form in a browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Insert button.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-39
Note: Notice that the value for Credit Limit box is set to 0 and the error indicator text for the Web Address box is not aligned with the other error indictors. Also notice that the error message for the Credit Limit box is The Credit Limit must be within the valid range. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
•
Add a Display property with the value of Dynamic to the CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator control to change the display of the error indicator text.
•
Add a Display property with the value of Dynamic to the CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator control to change the display of the error indicator text.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
•
Click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the location of the error indicator for the Credit Limit box has changed. However, the error message for the Credit Limit box is still The Credit Limit must be within the valid range. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
•
Add a ValidationExpression property with the value of \w+([-+.']\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)* to the CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Add a ValidationExpression property with the value of \w+([-+.']\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)* to the CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Set the Type property with the value of Integer to the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control.
•
Change the MinimumValue property of the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control to 0.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Email Address box, type
[email protected], in the Web Address box, type http://www.contoso.com, and then click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the error indicator and error messages do not display for the Email Address, Web Address, and Credit Limit boxes. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have removed validation control from the Cancel button, and added error indicators and error messages to the validation controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Adding Server-Side Validation The main task for this exercise is to validate the Customer user control.
Task 1: Validate the Customer User Control •
Open the Customer.ascx.vb code window.
•
Add the code to validate the user control within the CustomerInsertButton_Click event handler method. ''' ''' Saves the current customer information and adds default values ''' ''' ''' ''' Protected Sub CustomerInsertButton_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles CustomerInsertButton.Click ' Did page validation succeed? If Not Page.IsValid Then Return End If ' Add the current user name currentCustomer.CreatedBy = Context.User.Identity.Name ' Add the user credit limit currentCustomer.CreditLimit = 50000 End Sub
•
Add postback validation to the Page_Load event handler method. ''' ''' Instantiates Customer object ''' ''' ''' ''' Protected Sub Page_Load(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Me.Load If Page.IsPostBack Then ' Validate Page Page.Validate() ' Did page validation succeed? If Not Page.IsValid Then Return End If End If ' Instantiate Customer instantiateCustomerObject() ' Populate the UI controls populateUI() End Sub
•
Disable the client-side validation for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control by setting the EnableClientScript property of the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control to false.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
•
6-41
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer, type the following settings, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Note: Notice the postback of the Web page with the inputs. Also notice that after the postback, the error indicator for the Country list and associated error message display. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
•
Remove the EnableClientScript property for the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control to enable the client-side validation for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control, and format and save the Customer user control.
•
In the CustomerManagement – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
Task 2: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added server-side validation controls to the Customer user control.
Note: The answers to the exercises are on the Course Companion CD.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Adding Validation Controls The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing Web site.
2.
Add validation controls to the user control.
Task 1: Open an existing Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M6\CS folder.
Task 2: Add validation controls to the user control •
View the markup of the Customer user control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerFirstNameRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerFirstNameTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerLastNameRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerLastNameTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerAddressRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerAddressTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerZipCodeRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerZipCodeTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerCityRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerCityTextBox control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerWebAddressTextBox control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-43
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator, for the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox control.
•
Add a RegularExpressionValidator control named CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator, for the CustomerEmailAddressTextBox control.
•
Add a RegularExpressionValidator control named CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator, for the CustomerWebAddressTextBox control.
•
Add a RangeValidator control named CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator, for the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox control. The minimum value is 500 and the maximum value is 50000.
•
Add a ValidationSummary control named CustomerValidationSummary, for the CustomerInsertButton control.
•
Format the Customer.ascx user control.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
•
Test the functionality of the Customer user control.
•
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®. Result: After completing this exercise, you will have added validation controls to a user control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Configuring Validation Controls The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Remove validation from the Cancel button.
2.
Add error indicators and error messages to the validation controls.
3.
Set the e-mail address and credit limit validation controls.
Task 1: Remove validation from the Cancel button •
View the default Response.Redirect method of the Cancel button. /// /// Redirects to home page /// /// /// protected void CustomerCancelButton_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Redirect to home page Response.Redirect("~/Default.aspx"); }
•
Disable the validation caused by the CustomerCancelButton control by setting the CausesValidation property in the user control to false.
•
Save the Customer user control and view the changes in the browser.
Note: Notice that the Web browser is redirected to the default Web Form, instead of displaying the error messages.
Task 2: Add error indicators and error messages to the validation controls •
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerFirstNameRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerFirstNameRequiredFieldValidator control to The Customer First Name must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerLastNameRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerLastNameRequiredFieldValidator control to The Customer Last Name must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerAddressRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerAddressRequiredFieldValidator control to The Address must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerZipCodeRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerZipCodeRequiredFieldValidator control to The Zip Code must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCityRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCityRequiredFieldValidator control to The City must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-45
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control to A country must be selected.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator control to The Email Address must be valid.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator control to The Web Address must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator control to The Web Address must be valid.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator control to The Credit Limit must be filled in.
•
Add a Text property with the value of * to the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control.
•
Change the ErrorMessage property in the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control to The Credit Limit must be within the valid range.
•
Save the Customer user control and view the changes in the browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Email Address box, type contoso.com, press the TAB key, in the Web Address box, type www.contoso, and then press the TAB key.
Note: If you see the AutoComplete message box display, click the No button. Note: Notice the error indicator that displays next to the Email Address and Web Address boxes, because of the invalid e-mail and web addresses. •
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Insert button.
Note: Notice the error indicator and error messages next to the First Name, Last Name, Address, Zip Code, City, Country, and Credit Limit controls. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
Task 3: Set the e-mail address and credit limit validation controls •
View the InsertCustomer.aspx Web Form in a browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Insert button.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Note: Notice that the value for Credit Limit box is set to 0, and the error indicator text for the Web Address box is not aligned with the other error indictors. Also notice that the error message for the Credit Limit box is The Credit Limit must be within the valid range. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
•
Add a Display property with the value of Dynamic to the CustomerWebAddressRequiredFieldValidator control to change the display of the error indicator text.
•
Add a Display property with the value of Dynamic to the CustomerCreditLimitRequiredFieldValidator control to change the display of the error indicator text.
•
Save the Customer user control, and view the changes in the browser.
•
Click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the location of the error indicator for the Credit Limit box has changed. However, the error message for the Credit Limit box is still The Credit Limit must be within the valid range. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
•
Add a ValidationExpression property with the value of \w+([-+.']\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([.]\w+)* to the CustomerEmailAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Add a ValidationExpression property with the value of \w+([-+.']\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([.]\w+)* to the CustomerWebAddressRegularExpressionValidator control.
•
Set the Type property with the value of Integer to the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control.
•
Change the MinimumValue property of the CustomerCreditLimitRangeValidator control to 0.
•
Save the Customer user control and view the changes in the browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, in the Email Address box, type
[email protected], in the Web Address box, type http://www.contoso.com, and then click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the error indicator and error messages do not display for the Email Address, Web Address, and Credit Limit boxes. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have removed validation control from the Cancel button, and added error indicators and error messages to the validation controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-47
Exercise 3: Adding Server-Side Validation The main task for this exercise is to validate the Customer user control.
Task 1 : Validate the Customer User Control •
Open the Customer.ascx.cs code window.
•
Add the code to validate the user control within the CustomerInsertButton_Click event handler method. /// /// Saves the current customer information and adds default values /// /// /// protected void CustomerInsertButton_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Did page validation succeed? if (!Page.IsValid) return;
}
•
// Add the current user name currentCustomer.CreatedBy = Context.User.Identity.Name; // Add the user credit limit currentCustomer.CreditLimit = 50000;
Add postback validation to the Page_Load event handler method. protected void Page_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) { if (Page.IsPostBack) { // Validate Page Page.Validate();
}
}
•
// Did page validation succeed? if (!Page.IsValid) return;
// Instantiate Customer instantiateCustomerObject(); // Populate the UI controls populateUI();
Disable the client-side validation for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control, by setting the EnableClientScript property of the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control to false.
•
Save the Customer user control and view the changes in the browser.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer, type the following settings, and then click the Insert button. •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Note: Notice the postback of the Web page with the inputs. Also notice that after the postback, the error indicator for the Country list and its associated error message displays. •
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
•
Remove the EnableClientScript property for the CustomerCountryRequiredFieldValidator control to enable the client-side validation for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control, and format and save the Customer user control.
•
In the CustomerManagement – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
Task 2: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added server-side validation controls to the Customer user control.
Note: The answers to the exercises are on the Course Companion CD.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-49
Lab Shutdown After you complete the lab, you must turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine and revert the changes. 1.
In Microsoft Hyper-V™ Manager, in the Virtual Machines pane, right-click 10267A-GEN-DEV, and then click Turn Off.
2.
In the Turn Off Machine dialog box, click Turn Off.
3.
In Hyper-V Manager, in the Virtual Machines pane, right-click 10267A-GEN-DEV, and then click Revert.
4.
In the Revert Virtual Machine dialog box, click Revert.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
Why have you added the RegularExpressionValidator control for the e-mail address field?
2.
Why do you use a ValidationSummary control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Validating User Input
6-51
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
Which control will you use to perform the following validation tasks?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You want to make sure that an input control is always filled in by the user, but you also want it to be in a specific format. What is the easiest way to add this? Add a RequiredFieldValidator and a RegularExpressionValidator control.
2.
None of the intrinsic ASP.NET validation controls fit your validation needs. What would you do to solve the issue? Create a new CustomValidator control, and add the validation logic as code.
Best Practices Mention some best practices in the context of your own business situations. •
Always add server-side validation code when using validation controls, because client-side scripting might be disabled, or a malicious user could compromise the user input, which could then be sent to the server.
•
Always validate user input that is used for performing actions server-side, such as searching a database or accessing server-side resources.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
6-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-1
Module 7 Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications Contents: Lesson 1: Debugging in ASP.NET
7-3
Lesson 2: Tracing in ASP.NET
7-17
Lab: Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications
7-25
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
When you develop a Web application, it is difficult to find every possible error in code. Errors could include compile-time errors, logic errors, or runtime errors. You can use the Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010 compilers to identify compile-time errors. To find runtime errors and logic errors, you can use the Visual Studio 2010 debugger, or use Visual Studio 2010 along with the Debug and Trace objects. Debugging is an important part of development to ensure that a Web application meets specified requirements. During the debugging process, you can identify errors and fix them. You can also trace the application to capture its runtime information and analyze its performance. This module describes the steps required to enable tracing and debugging, including how you can use debugging and tracing in a Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-3
Lesson 1
Debugging in ASP.NET
You can use debugging to find errors in an ASP.NET Web application. Debugging is the process of identifying and resolving the logical and technical errors in a Web application. For most debugging operations, you can run the Visual Studio 2010 debugger on the computer hosting the Web application. You can debug a Web application by adding breakpoints, and stepping through the code in debug mode. While local debugging helps you debug applications on your local computer, remote debugging enables you to debug a Web application that runs at a remote location. This lesson describes how you can perform both local debugging and remote debugging.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe types of errors.
•
Describe debugging.
•
Describe the Debug class.
•
Explain how to gather debug information at run time.
•
Describe the methods for printing Debug information.
•
Describe debugging in a Web application.
•
Describe remote debugging in a Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Discussion: Types of Errors
Key Points When you develop applications, you could encounter several types of errors. Before you can resolve these errors, you need to identify the type of error to fix it appropriately. There are three kinds of errors that you need to handle when you develop applications: syntax errors, runtime errors, and semantic errors.
Syntax Errors The syntax of an application must be correct for a compiler to be able to compile the code, and for the application to run. Syntax refers to the application structure, and the rules associated with the structure. For example, this could be the curly braces that surround a block of code in Microsoft Visual C#® ((!this.IsPostBack) { Block of Code }), or the matching Begin and End statements in Microsoft Visual Basic® (Sub SubName() ... End Sub.). If you leave out one of the matching curly braces in Visual C#, or the End Sub statement in Visual Basic, a syntax error occurs. Syntax errors are part of what is referred to as compile-time errors. Visual Studio 2010 warns you of potential errors at design time. Syntax notifications or squiggles under code indicates that the code will not compile or that might cause an error. You can identify syntax errors in order to resolve them when you compile the application.
Runtime Errors Runtime errors occur while the application is running. Runtime errors are also known as exceptions. For example, an application may rely on another file at runtime. However, if the file is not available when the application tries to access it, an exception is thrown, and your application must decide whether or not to handle the exception. Exception handling can be implemented by wrapping code in a Try...Catch/try...catch construct, like the following example. [Visual Basic] Try
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-5
' Place any code here, that are critical to your application, ' that potentially throws an exception Catch ' Add any cleanup/resolve code here to handle the exception ' thrown, or code to log the exception details Finally ' Add any code that must be executed whether an exception ' is thrown or not End Try [Visual C#] try { // Place any code here, that are critical to your application, // that potentially throws an exception } catch { // Add any cleanup/resolve code here to handle the exception // thrown, or code to log the exception details } finally { // Add any code that must be executed whether an exception // is thrown or not }
Semantic Errors Semantic errors are the hardest to locate and fix, because your application will appear to run successfully and you will not see any error messages. However, your application may not perform as intended. For example, a user performs a calculation, and the correct result displays on the screen. If the calculation and related operations are not saved to the data storage, a second user will view the same data initially viewed by the first user. This means that the semantics of the application are wrong. Identifying this type of error can be very tricky and confusing, because it requires you to follow the input, output, and the flow of the application’s logic to locate the bug.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is Debugging?
Key Points Programming errors are generally referred to as “bugs,” and the process of tracking them is called debugging. When you encounter a bug, you first need to decide whether you should fix it, then identify the source of the error, and finally, fix the bug by using the tools provided by Visual Studio 2010.
Determining Whether the Bug Should Be Fixed There are a number of factors that determine whether or not a bug should be fixed: •
Is the bug too costly to fix at that stage of the development?
•
Is it a serious flaw or a minor inconvenience?
•
Is there a workaround?
Note: At development time, most bugs are fixed, but not always. Bug fixing does not apply to released software only, it is also for projects under development.
Locating the Bug Without Using the Debugger When you decide to fix a bug, you need to find the source of the error. The simplest way to do this is to start looking at the input and output of the application, and manually checking where the bug starts occurring. When you find a single class or a single method that is responsible for the bug, you can start looking at each individual line of code—either manually, or by commenting out lines of code to locate exactly which line of code is responsible for the bug. This process can be accompanied by sending the output of the intermediary results to a file or the user interface (UI); eventually, you will locate the bug. In general, you search for and locate the bug at runtime, when an action—such as user input—leads to an unexpected error or result.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-7
Fixing the Bug After you have found the problem line or lines of code, you need to fix them according to the specification of the particular method or class that you are working with. Based on the type of bug found, you have to determine how to fix it. Some errors require simple fixes, such as removing a line of code that is not needed; others require a new expression or calculation. There are also other bugs that after extensive research require you to redesign an entire class or even a module. While it is entirely possible to locate and fix a bug manually, it is more convenient to fix bugs by using various tools. In most cases, it will save time if you use one or more tools for debugging your code. Visual Studio 2010 provides you with the Visual Studio 2010 debugger, and Microsoft .NET Framework objects and constructs that help you fix bugs. The Visual Debugger tool helps you set breakpoints, and step through the code line by line. You set a breakpoint on a specific line of code. When the line of code is hit at runtime, the code opens in the debugger. At this point, you can examine the code to fix it, and then proceed through the code that follows, line by line, if needed. Question: How will you ensure that your program or code is without any errors?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Debug Class
Key Points The Debug class provides a set of methods and properties that can help debug your code by printing debug information and checking your code with assertions. Using the Debug class, you can ensure that your code is robust, without affecting the performance and the code size of your released product. This is because when compiling in Release mode, the calls to methods and properties of the Debug class are not compiled in the assembly at compile time. The Debug class is globally available to your application when you import the System.Diagnostics namespace. So, you do not have to create an instance of it. You cannot create an instance of the Debug class, because it has no constructors, and you cannot inherit the class because it is sealed. The following table lists the methods of the Debug class. Method
Description
Debug.Write
Use this method to write a string of text of your choice, or to write the output from an object’s ToString method. The message or string of text is written to the trace listeners in the Listeners collection.
Debug.WriteLine
Use this method to write a line of text of your choice, or to write the output from an object’s ToString method. The message or string of text, followed by a line terminator, is written to the trace listeners in the Listeners collection.
Debug.WriteIf
Use this method to conditionally write a string of text of your choice, or to write conditionally the output from an object’s ToString method.
Debug.Print
Use this method to write a formatted line of text of your choice.
Debug.Assert
Use this method to display a message if a specified condition is false. The call stack that is being shown in the dialog box when calling Debug.Assert contains the same information as the Call Stack window within
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
Method
7-9
Description Visual Studio 2010 in a break state.
Note: A listener produces formatted output when debugging and tracing. The Listeners collection contain listeners monitors the debug and trace output.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Gathering Debug Information at Run Time
Key Points While ensuring that your application follows the required path of execution or performs the necessary actions, you can view diagnostic information about page requests by enabling the tracing feature for your page or application. Using the Debug and TraceContext classes, you can collect and display diagnostic information at runtime: •
The Debug class. You can use the Debug class to output debug information. Statements that use the Debug class run only when you compile the application using the debug mode, and when the Web application is run in the debugger. If you create a release build, the statements will not be included in the compiled assembly. With the Debug class, messages are sent as output to the current collection of trace listeners, which, by default, displays the output in the Debug pane of the Output window in Visual Studio 2010. A listener produces formatted output from the debug output. When you use the Debug class to print debug information and check your logic, you can make your code more stable without affecting the performance of the final product or the code size.
•
The TraceContext class. The TraceContext class enables you to display information on a Web page, or to the trace log in memory. It is used to capture and present execution details about a Web request. In a Web Form, the TraceContext class is accessible by using the Trace property of the Page class. You need to remember that the Trace property is different from the Trace class in the System.Diagnostics namespace.
Note: To use the Debug class, you must import the System.Diagnostics namespace in your code file, or prefix the class method call with the namespace. Question: What are the two default configurations in Visual Studio 2010?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-11
Methods for Printing Debug Information
Key Points To print any debug information, you can use a number of methods, including the Write and WriteLine methods. •
Write. Writes a text string to the trace listeners. There are four overloads of this method—two that write a single line of text, and two others that write a single line of text and the category name. The category name can be used to group the output messages.
•
WriteLine. Writes a text string to the trace listeners, and adds a new line character at the end of the text, so that any new text following your call will be written on the next line. There are four overloads of this method—two that write a single line of text, and two others that write a single line of text and the category name. You can use the category name to group the output messages.
The following code examples show how you can use the Write and WriteLine methods. [Visual Basic] Debug.Write("Writing a string of text...") Debug.WriteLine("Writing a line of text...") Debug.Write("Writing a string of text...", "Category 1") Debug.WriteLine("Writing a line of text...", "Category 2") [Visual C#] Debug.Write("Writing a string of text..."); Debug.WriteLine("Writing a line of text..."); Debug.Write("Writing a string of text...", "Category 1"); Debug.WriteLine("Writing a line of text...", "Category 2");
To conditionally print any debug information, you can use two other methods: the WriteIf method, and the WriteLineIf method.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
WriteIf. Conditionally writes a text string to the trace listeners. There are four overloads of this method—two that write a single line of text, and two that write a single line of text and the category name that can be used to group the output messages.
•
WriteLineIf. Conditionally writes a text string to the trace listeners, and adds a new line character at the end of the text, so that any new text following your call will be written on the next line. There are four overloads of this method: two that write a single line of text, and two that write a single line of text and the category name. You can use the category name to group the output messages. The following code examples show how to use the WriteIf and WriteLineIf method. [Visual Basic] Debug.WriteIf(Page.IsPostBack, "Writing a string of text...") Debug.WriteLineIf(Page.IsPostBack, "Writing a line of text...") [Visual C#] Debug.WriteIf(Page.IsPostBack, "Writing a string of text..."); Debug.WriteLineIf(Page.IsPostBack, "Writing a line of text...");
To format any debug information when printing, you can use the Print method, which uses the String.Format method to convert the value of an object to its text representation, and then embed that representation in a string. The Print method writes a formatted line of text to the trace listeners. There are two overloads of this method, as shown in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] Debug.Print("Printing a line of text...") Debug.Print("Printing a line a text, Postback = {0}", Page.IsPostBack) [Visual C#] Debug.Print("Printing a line of text..."); Debug.Print("Printing a line a text, Postback = {0}", Page.IsPostBack);
If you need to display either a message or the call stack if a specific condition is false, you can use the Debug.Assert method to check for the condition. The method has four overloads, as shown in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack) Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack, "Brief Message") Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack, "Brief Message", "Detail description message") Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack, "Brief Message", "Detail description message", objectArrayToFormat) [Visual C#] Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack) Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack, "Brief Message") Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack, "Brief Message", "Detail description message"); Debug.Assert(Page.IsPostBack, "Brief Message", "Detail description message", objectArrayToFormat);
A dialog box displays whether you run the application with or without debugging, and whether you compile the application in debug or release mode. The dialog box generates with the method overload, which takes three parameters: condition, message, and description. The first overload shown above takes only a condition parameter, and shows only the call stack. The next overload shows only the message and
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-13
the call stack. The call stack shows you the names of the functions on the call stack, the parameter types, and the parameter values, at a given point in time.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Debugging a Web Application
Key Points If one of your Web pages contains an error, you can use debugging to identify the source of the problem. When you want to debug a Web application, you first need to enable debugging, and then decide if you need to generate an output of debug information while your Web application is running. In addition, you need to decide if you want to add breakpoints in your code, where you want execution to pause, and finally, you need to run the Web application in the debug mode. If you have added any breakpoints, you can step through the code when a breakpoint is hit.
Enabling Web Application Debugging You must enable debugging—if you want to debug your Web application—and you need to do this in the web.config file. You need to locate the opening compilation element that is found within the system.web element, and then set the value of the debug attribute to true. The following code examples show how to set the value of the debug attribute. [Visual Basic] ... [Visual C#] ...
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-15
Adding and Removing Breakpoints If you want the execution of your Web application to pause at specific points in your code, you can add a breakpoint. You need to first locate the line of code to which you want to add the breakpoint, and then press the F9 key, or click Toggle Breakpoint on the Debug menu. To remove the breakpoint, press F9 again, or click Toggle Breakpoint on the Debug menu. By default, the lines of code with the breakpoints are highlighted in a white text color on a dark red background color. If you have many breakpoints and you decide to remove them all, you can press CTRL+SHIFT+F9, or click Delete All Breakpoints on the Debug menu to remove all the breakpoints using a single action. You will be prompted to confirm this action.
Running in Debug Mode To run your application in debug mode, you must press F5, or click Start Debugging on the Debug menu. If debugging has not yet been enabled at this point, you will be prompted to enable debugging by the appearance of the Debugging Not Enabled message box. In the message box, simply click OK to enable debugging. This will modify the web.config file.
Stepping Through Code When the debugger reaches the line with the breakpoint, execution pauses. You can then step through the code and examine the logic of your application. Press F10, or click Step Over on the Debug menu, if you want the current line of code to be executed without stepping into any of the underlying code (such as a method in the same class, or a method in another class). Execution will pause on the next line of code. Press F11, or click Step Into on the Debug menu, if you want to step into the underlying code of the current line of code to be executed, if there is any. Execution will pause on the next line of code in the underlying code. By default, properties are normally stepped over, because they generally do not contain any complex logic, but it is possible to step into a property. You can right-click the line of code that is calling the property getter or setter, then, on the context menu, point to Step Into Specific, and then click NamespaceName.ClassName.set_PropertyName.
Use Debugger Variable Windows The Visual Studio 2010 debugger provides several windows, collectively known as variable windows, for displaying variable information during debugging. These windows are: Autos, Locals, Watch, and Watch1 through Watch 4. Each variable window has a grid with three columns: Name, Value, and Type. The Autos and Locals windows display names of the variables that are added automatically, in the Name column. In the Watch window, the Name column is where you can add your own variables or expressions. The Value and Type columns display the value and data type of the corresponding variable or expression result. You can edit the value of a variable in the Value column.
To display a variable window •
On the Debug menu, choose Windows, and then choose the name of the variable window you want to display. To display these menu items, the debugger must be running or in break mode; you cannot access these menu items or display these windows in design mode.
Question: How will you examine a variable or a value of the variable during a debugging session?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Remote Debugging
Key Points Remote debugging is the process of debugging Web applications that are running on a separate server. Remote debugging enables you to debug Web applications on numerous disparate servers, from a single workstation. You may want to use remote debugging if you cannot run your Web application locally, or if you want to test the application while it is deployed on a Web server.
Remote Debugging Monitor When you perform remote debugging, you can use the Remote Debugging Monitor—or msvsmon.exe— which is a small application to which Visual Studio 2010 connects. You can either install the Remote Debugging Monitor on the remote computer, or run the monitor remotely from a shared folder. By default, the Remote Debugging Monitor runs as a Windows®-based application. To debug in ASP.NET or another server environment, you can configure the monitor to run as a Windows service by using the Visual Studio 2010 Remote Debugger Configuration Wizard. You can start this wizard from the Visual Studio Tools folder on the Start menu. Before you start remote debugging, you must configure the environments on both the debugger host and the remote computer. You must also consider security features. For example, the remote server must grant access to the user who performs the debugging.
Remote Debugging Setup Visual Studio 2010 supports remote debugging from one computer to another. When you perform remote debugging, the host computer can be any platform that supports Visual Studio 2010. Reasons for performing remote debugging are when the program you are debugging is on the Web server, or if the program is performing differently on your computer. Question: In what scenarios will you perform remote debugging?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-17
Lesson 2
Tracing in ASP.NET
Tracing is the process of receiving informative messages about the execution of a Web application at runtime—that is, it is a way to monitor the execution of your Web application. These informative messages from the Web application can help you identify problems or analyze performance in a manner that does not affect the program's output. This includes recording any exception details, and recording the program flow. Tracing is typically used in a production environment, or a similar environment in which you cannot perform debugging. Tracing statements can remain in your code when you release your Web application, because by default, tracing is not enabled, which means any trace output is ignored. You can then enable tracing when you find an error, or if you have a performance issue. So, tracing is useful when it is impractical to use the debugger. Visual Studio 2010 provides the TraceContext class for this purpose. This lesson describes how to use the TraceContext class to implement tracing in a Web application.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe tracing.
•
Describe the TraceContext class.
•
Perform tracing in a Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is Tracing?
Key Points Tracing is the process of receiving informative messages about the execution of a Web application at runtime. If one of your Web pages contains an error and you want to analyze the error, or if you want to follow the path of execution and view how much time was spent in the various methods, you can use tracing. To trace a Web application, you first need to enable tracing, and then you need to decide if you need to get an output of the trace information while your Web application is running. You also need to decide if you want to use page-level tracing, or application-level tracing.
ASP.NET Trace ASP.NET introduces a function called tracing, which allows you to view diagnostic information about a single request for an ASP.NET page simply by enabling it for your page or application. Tracing also allows you to write debug statements directly in your code without having to remove them from your application when you deploy it to production servers. You can write variables or structures in a page, assert whether a condition is met, or simply trace through the execution path of your page or application. In order for these messages and other tracing information to be gathered and displayed, you must enable tracing for the page or application. When you enable tracing, two events occur: •
ASP.NET appends a series of diagnostic information tables immediately following the page's output. The information is also sent to a trace viewer application, if you have enabled tracing for the application.
•
ASP.NET displays your custom diagnostic messages in the Trace Information table of the appended performance data.
Question: What is the purpose of using tracing functionality?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-19
TraceContext Class
Key Points You can use the TraceContext class to write trace messages on a page, or to the trace log in memory. You implement the trace log by using the TraceRecords messages collection, which is a collection of trace records that are associated with the current request. Because the TraceContext class is readily available when working in an ASP.NET Web Form through the Trace property of the Page class, you do not need to create an instance of it. In fact, the TraceContext class is of type System.Web.HttpContext, which encapsulates all HTTP-specific information about a Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) request. Therefore, you should never create an instance of this class, because the constructor supports the .NET Framework infrastructure; it is not intended to be used directly from your code. Also, the TraceContext class cannot be inherited, because it is sealed. To write information to the trace log, you can use any of the following methods of the TraceContext class: •
Write. Writes a trace message to the trace log. There are three overloads of the Write method, all of which write a trace message to the trace log. The second overload specifies the category name that indicates the category that will receive the trace message. The third overload takes a third parameter, of type Exception, which indicates that you can supply a caught or user-defined exception.
•
Warn. The Warn method is similar to the Write method. However, unlike the Write method, all warnings appear in the log as red text.
The following code examples show how you can write trace messages. [Visual Basic] Trace.Write("Trace Message") Trace.Write("Category 1", "Trace Message") Trace.Write("Category 2", "Trace Message", New Exception("En Exception was thrown, because..."))
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
[Visual C#] Trace.Write("Trace Message"); Trace.Write("Category 1", "Trace Message"); Trace.Write("Category 2", "Trace Message", new Exception("En Exception was thrown, because..."));
If you enable tracing, the output will be appended to the page in which the code has been executed. On the trace information page, the category parameter enables you to classify and group trace messages. For example, you can set the sort order of trace messages to display messages of the same category together. The TraceMode attribute can be used to specify the order in which you want your trace messages to appear. Set TraceMode to SortByTime, to sort trace messages in the order in which they are processed. The following code shows how you can set TraceMode to SortByCategory, to sort trace messages by the categories that you specified in the Warn and Write method calls.
You can use the IsEnabled property of the TraceContext class to dynamically change the state of tracing in a page.
TraceContext.IsEnabled Statement TraceContext class has a Boolean property named IsEnabled, which enables you to call the Write and Warn methods only when tracing is enabled. The following code examples illustrate how to use the Trace.IsEnabled statement. [Visual Basic] If Trace.IsEnabled Then Trace.Write("Tracing is enabled!") End If [Visual C#] if (Trace.IsEnabled) { Trace.Write("Tracing is enabled!"); }
You can also use the IsEnabled property to dynamically change the state of tracing for a page. The following code examples illustrate this. [Visual Basic] Trace.IsEnabled = False [Visual C#] Trace.IsEnabled = false;
The following screen shot displays the trace information for a page in a Web application:
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-21
You can use the TraceContext class to append messages to specific trace categories, and to obtain a set of trace records at the end of request execution for custom processing.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Tracing a Web Application
Key Points You can enable tracing at the page-level or at the application-level. To enable page-level tracing, you must set the Trace attribute of the Page directive to true for the Web Form.
Enabling Web Application Tracing The following code examples show how you can enable page-level tracing. [Visual Basic] [Visual C#]
When you use page-level tracing, all trace messages append to the end of the Web page, which enables you to quickly view the trace messages when you view the Web page. To enable application-level tracing, you need to configure the web.config file for the Web application, and add the trace element. The following code shows how you can enable application-level tracing. ... ...
If you need to view the trace information when your application is running, you can use the methods of the TraceContext class.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-23
When you enable application-level tracing, you enable tracing for all the pages in the Web application. Application-level tracing also gives you flexibility when you write trace statements. For example, with page-level tracing, all trace messages are appended to the page. However, with application-level tracing, you can write trace messages to the page, or to memory. Trace statements that you save to memory are accessible by the application-level trace viewer trace.axd. To view the application-level trace viewer, type the URL for your application, and add trace.axd to the URL—for example, http://www.contoso.com/trace.axd. When a page in your Web application is requested, the page gathers trace information, and then runs any trace statements that it contains. You can view the trace output in the trace viewer. The trace viewer lists the requests in the order in which they were processed, and you can choose a specific request from any of the application pages that have been requested.
Trace Results Page-level trace results are appended to the end of the .aspx page for which they are enabled. The trace results contains lot of information, along with the custom messages that you created by using the Trace.Write and Trace.Warn statements.
Trace Categories Trace results contain several categories of information. The following table lists each category, and provides the description about the type of information it contains. Category
Description
Request Details
Contains information about the request: session identification (ID), time of request, type of request, and request status.
Trace Information
Contains output from standard and custom trace statements. The From First(s) column contains the total time from execution until the trace is run, and the From Last(s) column displays the increment duration. This is a very useful section for debugging. The timing information located here is valuable when profiling and searching for methods in your application that take too long to execute.
Control Tree
Lists of all of the items that are on the page, along with the size of each item. Presents an HTML representation of the ASP.NET Control Tree. Shows each control’s unique ID, runtime type, the number of bytes it took to be rendered, and the bytes it requires in ViewState and ControlState. The three columns showing the weight of each control indicates the number of bytes occupied in ViewState or ControlState by that particular control. You must be aware of the number of bytes used by each of your controls, especially if you write your custom controls. You want your controls to return as few bytes as possible to keep the overall page weight down.
Session State
Contains information about values stored in Session state, if any.
Application State
Contains information about values stored in Application state, if any.
Cookies Collection
Displays a list of cookies that are in use for the request and response.
Headers Collection
Displays a list of request and response message header name/value pairs.
Form Collection
Displays a list of controls, and their values on the form that is posted.
Querystring
Displays a list of values passed in the URL.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Category
Description
Collection Server Variables
List of all the server variables and their values.
You can view trace information at the bottom of each page. The following screen shot displays the requests in the trace viewer:
Question: How will you view trace information?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-25
Lab: Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab by using either the Visual Basic or Visual C# programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab page. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab page.
Introduction In this lab, you will debug an ASP.NET Web application for runtime errors by adding breakpoints and watches. In addition, you will implement tracing in the Web application to view information such as Session state, Application state, and server variables.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Debug a Web application to view runtime information.
•
Enable and implement tracing in a Web application.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: •
User name: Student
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization uses a Web site to manage its customer information. To maintain correct user information, you need to debug the customer management Web application for logical issues in its functionality. You need to debug the application by adding appropriate output statements, breakpoints, and watches. You also need to enable tracing by using the web.config file to identify possible errors in the code after the application’s deployment. The version of the Web application that was finished in the previous module has been deployed to a staging server where debugging is not possible. However, there seems to be a performance issue when loading or rendering the InsertCustomer.aspx Web Form. You are not allowed to append trace information to each page, so you must therefore enable application-level tracing, and then test that you can view the timings for the InsertCustomer.aspx Web Form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-27
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Debugging a Web Application The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Enable debugging of the CustomerManagement Web project.
3.
Add debug output statements to the user control.
4.
Find and fix a bug.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M7\VB folder.
Task 2: Enable debugging of the CustomerManagement Web project •
Open the web.config file of the CustomerManagement Web project.
•
Set the debug attribute of the compilation element to true.
•
Save and close the web.config file.
Task 3: Add debug output statements to the user control •
Open the Customer user control.
•
Import the System.Diagnostics namespace. Imports System.Diagnostics
•
In the Page_Load event handler, send the message, “Page Postback detected in Page_Load” to the trace listeners, when the page is loaded in response to a postback. Debug.WriteLine("Page Postback detected in Page_Load")
•
In the Page_Load event handler, send the message, “No Page Postback detected in Page_Load” to the trace listeners, when the page is not loaded in response to a postback. Debug.WriteLineIf(Not Page.IsPostBack, "No Page Postback detected in Page_Load")
•
At the end of the Page_Unload event handler, send the message, “Page has been unloaded” to the trace listeners. Debug.WriteLine("Page has been unloaded")
•
At the end of the Click event of the CustomerInsertButton control, send the message, “Customer has been inserted in CustomerInsertButton_Click” to the trace listeners. Debug.WriteLine("Customer has been inserted in CustomerInsertButton_Click");
•
At the end of the private populateUI method, send the message, “UI controls have been populated” to the trace listeners. Debug.WriteLine("UI controls have been populated")
•
At the end of the private instantiateCustomerObject method, send the message, “Customer object has been instantiated” to the trace listeners.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Debug.WriteLine("Customer object has been instantiated")
•
Save the user control code file.
•
Add a default item to the Country DropDownList control. •
In the Customer.ascx.vb window, right-click and then click View Designer.
•
In the Customer.ascx window, click the CustomerCountryDropDownList control.
•
Click the Smart Tag button, and then click Edit Items.
•
In the ListItem Collection Editor dialog box, click Add.
•
In the ListItem properties pane, in the Text box, type USA, and then click OK.
•
Save and close the user control file.
•
Run the Web application in the debug mode.
•
Verify the output for the Page_Load, Page_Unload, and instantiateCustomerObject methods, by creating a new customer and viewing the Output pane of the Debugger variable windows.
Note: In the Debug pane of the Output window, notice that the output of the Debug statements displays. You may have to scroll up to see the statements. •
•
Verify the output for the Click event handler of the CustomerInsertButton control, by creating a new customer, using the following information, and then clicking the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Close Windows Internet Explorer®.
Note: In the Debug pane of the Output window, notice that the Customer has been inserted in CustomerInsertButton_Click message is displayed.
Task 4: Find and fix a bug •
Run the CustomerManagement Web application to test its functionality.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
•
7-29
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Note: Notice that the value for the Credit Limit box is set to 0 by default. •
Click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the value for the Credit Limit box is set to 50, which is incorrect. •
Close Windows Internet Explorer®.
•
Add a breakpoint in the Page_Load event handler method in the line of code that calls the instantiateCustomerObject method. instantiateCustomerObject();
•
Run the Web application in debug mode.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, on the Customers menu, click New.
•
Step into the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Step over the first line of code and then check for postback in the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Add a watch to the Text property of the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox control.
•
Continue to debug the Web application.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Note: Notice that in the Watch 1 window, the value of the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox Text property is set to 0. •
Step over the call to the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Step over the call to the populateUI method.
Note: In the Watch1 window, notice that the value for the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox is changed to 50. •
Stop debugging the Web project.
•
Examine the code in the populateUI method that assigns a value to the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox.Text property.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Note: Notice that the value of 50 for the CreditLimit property is not assigned here. •
Re-run the Web application in debug mode to examine the Customer class.
•
Create a new customer, and ignore the first breakpoint, by continuing program execution.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
•
Step into the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Step over the first line of code, and then the check for postback.
•
Step into the method that instantiates the customer object.
Note: Stepping into the instantiation of the customer object action may take some time. •
Step over each single line of code in the Customer.vb code window, until the following line of code in the constructor that initializes the CreditLimit property is reached. Me.CreditLimit = creditLimit
•
Step through the assignment of the passed value to the CreditLimit property.
•
Locate the step that adds the extra 50 to the private customerCreditLimit member Credit Limit box. Me.customerCreditLimit = value + 50
•
View the functions and procedure calls that are currently on the stack, by viewing the Call Stack window.
•
Stop debugging the Web project.
•
Remove the extra value from the customerCreditLimit property. Me.customerCreditLimit = value
•
Save and close the class file.
•
Run the Web application to verify the Credit Limit value.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
•
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
7-31
Click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the value for the Credit Limit box is still 0. •
Close Windows Internet Explorer®. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have enabled debugging for the CustomerManagement Web project, added debug output statements to the user control, and fixed a bug in the CustomerManagement Web application functionality.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Tracing a Web Application The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Enable application-level tracing of the CustomerManagement Web project.
2.
Implement application tracing.
Task 1: Enable application-level tracing of the CustomerManagement Web project •
Add a trace element to the web.config file as the first element within the system.web, and set the value of the enabled attribute to true.
•
Save and close the web.config file.
Task 2: Implement application tracing •
Run the Web application, and view the trace details.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
•
View the trace details for the application, by using the http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/trace.axd URL in the browser.
•
View the details for the InsertCustomer.aspx Web page. •
In the http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/trace.axd - Windows Internet Explorer window, click View Details of /InsertCustomer.aspx corresponding to the Verb, GET.
Note: Scroll down to see all of the information output, including the control tree, session and application state, form and querystring collection, and server variables of the InsertCustomer.aspx Web page. Verify that you can see the Trace Information section, which gives you information about how much time is spent when loading, rendering, and unloading the Web Form. •
Close Windows Internet Explorer®.
Task 3: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have enabled and implemented application-level tracing for the CustomerManagement Web application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-33
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Debugging a Web Application The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Enable debugging of the CustomerManagement Web project.
3.
Add debug output statements to the user control.
4.
Find and fix the bug.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M7\CS folder.
Task 2: Enable debugging of the CustomerManagement Web project •
Open the web.config file of the CustomerManagement Web project.
•
Set the debug attribute of the compilation element to true.
•
Save and close the web.config file.
Task 3: Add debug output statements to the user control •
Open the Customer user control.
•
Import the System.Diagnostics namespace to the user control. using System.Diagnostics;
•
In the Page_Load event handler, send the message, “Page Postback detected in Page_Load” to the trace listeners, when the page is loaded in response to a postback. Debug.WriteLine("Page Postback detected in Page_Load");
•
In the Page_Load event handler, send the message, “No Page Postback detected in Page_Load” to the trace listeners, when the page is not loaded in response to a postback. Debug.WriteLineIf(Not Page.IsPostBack, "No Page Postback detected in Page_Load");
•
At the end of the Page_Unload event handler, send the message, “Page has been unloaded” to the trace listeners. Debug.WriteLine("Page has been unloaded");
•
At the end of the Click event of the CustomerInsertButton control, send the message, “Customer has been inserted in CustomerInsertButton_Click” to the trace listeners. Debug.WriteLine("Customer has been inserted in CustomerInsertButton_Click");
•
At the end of the private populateUI method, send the message, “UI controls have been populated” to the trace listeners. Debug.WriteLine("UI controls have been populated");
•
At the end of the private instantiateCustomerObject method, send the message, “Customer object has been instantiated” to the trace listeners.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Debug.WriteLine("Customer object has been instantiated");
•
Save the user control code file.
•
Add a default item to the Country DropDownList control. •
In the Customer.ascx.cs window, right-click and then click View Designer.
•
In the Customer.ascx window, click the CustomerCountryDropDownList control.
•
Click the Smart Tag button, and then click Edit Items.
•
In the ListItem Collection Editor dialog box, click Add.
•
In the ListItem properties pane, in the Text box, type USA, and then click OK.
•
Save and close the user control file.
•
Run the Web application in the debug mode.
•
Verify the output for the Page_Load, Page_Unload, and instantiateCustomerObject methods, by creating a new customer and viewing the Output pane of the Debugger variable windows.
Note: In the Debug pane of the Output window, notice that the output of the Debug statements display. You may have to scroll up to see the statements. •
•
Verify the output for the Click event handler of the CustomerInsertButton control, by creating a new customer using the following information, and then Click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Close Windows Internet Explorer®.
Note: In the Debug pane of the Output window, notice that the Customer has been inserted in CustomerInsertButton_Click message is displayed.
Task 4: Find and fix a bug •
Run the CustomerManagement Web application to test its functionality.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
•
7-35
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Note: Notice that the value for the Credit Limit box is set to 0 by default. •
Click the Insert button.
Note: Notice that the value for the Credit Limit box is set to 50, which is incorrect. •
Close Windows Internet Explorer®.
•
Add a breakpoint in the Page_Load event handler method in the line of code that calls the instantiateCustomerObject method. instantiateCustomerObject();
•
Run the Web application in debug mode.
•
Step into the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Step over the first line of code and the check for postback in the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Add a watch to the Text property of the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox control.
•
Continue to debug the Web application.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
Note: Notice that in the Watch 1 window, the value of the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox Text property is set to 0. •
Step over the call to the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Step over the call to the populateUI method.
Note: In the Watch1 window, notice that the value for the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox is changed to 50. •
Stop debugging the Web project.
•
Examine the code in the populateUI method that assigns a value to the CustomerCreditLimitTextBox.Text property.
Note: Notice that the value of 50 for the CreditLimit property is not assigned here. This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Re-run the Web application in debug mode to examine the Customer class.
•
Create a new customer, and ignore the first breakpoint, by continuing program execution.Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
•
Step into the instantiateCustomerObject method.
•
Step over the first line of code and then the check for postback.
•
Step into the method that instantiates the customer object.
Note: Stepping into the instantiation of the customer object action may take some time. •
Step over each single line of code in the Customer.cs code window, until the following line of code in the constructor that initializes the CreditLimit property is reached. this.CreditLimit = creditLimit;
•
Step through the assignment of the passed value to the CreditLimit property.
•
Locate the step that adds the extra 50 to the private customerCreditLimit member Credit Limit box. this.customerCreditLimit = value + 50;
•
View the functions and procedure calls that are currently on the stack, by viewing the Call Stack window.
•
Stop debugging the Web project.
•
Remove the extra value from the customerCreditLimit property. this.customerCreditLimit = value;
•
Save and close the class file.
•
Run the Web application to verify the Credit Limit value.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-37
Note: Notice that the value for the Credit Limit box is still 0. •
Close Windows Internet Explorer®. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have enabled debugging for the CustomerManagement Web project, added debug output statements to the user control, and fixed a bug in the CustomerManagement Web application functionality.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Tracing a Web Application The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Enable application-level tracing of the CustomerManagement Web project.
2.
Implement application tracing.
Task 1: Enable application-level tracing of the CustomerManagement Web project •
Add a trace element to the web.config file as the first element within the system.web, and set the value of the enabled attribute to true.
•
Save and close the web.config file.
Task 2: Implement application tracing •
Run the Web application, and view the trace details.
•
Create a new customer, by using the following information, and then click the Insert button:
•
•
First Name: Claus
•
Last Name: Hansen
•
Address: 4567 Main St.
•
Zip Code: 98052
•
City: Buffalo
•
State: NY
•
Web Address: http://www.cohowinery.com
View the trace details for the application, by using the http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/trace.axd URL in the browser. View the details for the InsertCustomer.aspx Web page. •
In the http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/trace.axd - Windows Internet Explorer window, click View Details of /InsertCustomer.aspx corresponding to the Verb, GET.
Note: Scroll down to see all of the information output, including the control tree, session and application state, form and querystring collection, and server variables of the InsertCustomer.aspx Web page. Verify that you can see the Trace Information section, which gives you information about how much time is spent when loading, rendering, and unloading the Web Form. •
Close Windows Internet Explorer®. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have enabled and implemented application-level tracing for the CustomerManagement Web application.
Task 3: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes After you complete the lab, you must turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine and revert the changes. •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Troubleshooting Microsoft® ASP.NET Web Applications
7-39
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What are the steps required to enable page-level tracing?
2.
How will you explicitly turn on tracing in a component by using code?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
7-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What is the difference between the System.Diagnostics.Trace object and the System.Diagnostics.Debug object?
2.
What is the difference between page-level tracing and application-level tracing?
3.
How do you enable application-level tracing?
4.
What are the types of errors that you need to handle when you develop applications?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
In a method, you want to write the value of a variable to the trace listeners, but only if a specific condition is true. What is the easiest way to implement this? Call the Debug.WriteIf method.
2.
On a production server, you need to start tracing, but you do not want the users to see the trace output on each page they request. How will you implement this? You enable application-level tracing, and use the trace viewer trace.axd to view the trace output.
Best Practices Mention some best practices in the context of your own business situations. •
Messages written to the trace listeners that should not be included in a release version of your application should always be written by using the Debug object.
•
Always disable tracing in a Web application before deployment to a production server.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-1
Module 8 Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application Contents: Lesson 1: Overview of ADO.NET
8-3
Lesson 2: Connecting to a Database
8-13
Lesson 3: Managing Data
8-23
Lab: Managing Data in an ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-36
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Microsoft® ADO.NET is the technology that you can use to connect Microsoft .NET Framework–based applications to data sources such as Microsoft SQL Server® databases and XML files. ADO.NET is designed to work in disconnected environments such as the Internet, and it provides a flexible and simple way for you to integrate data access and data manipulation into your Web applications. Considering the reach of the Internet as the means of data communication, a data technology such as ADO.NET makes data accessible and updatable in a disconnected architecture. This module explains what ADO.NET is, and how you can incorporate ADO.NET into a Microsoft ASP.NET Web application by using the tools that are built into Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-3
Lesson 1
Overview of ADO.NET
Because of the importance of data storage in Web applications, you must be familiar with the data access methods that ADO.NET provides for ASP.NET Web Forms. ADO.NET is a part of the .NET Framework base class library that helps you access and manipulate data. You can use ADO.NET to access and manage data in both non-relational data sources, and relational database systems such as SQL Server 2008. The two components in ADO.NET—data providers and DataSet—help you connect to and access data sources. This lesson explains what ADO.NET is, and how it works.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe ADO.NET.
•
Describe the ADO.NET object model.
•
Describe the ADO.NET Entity Framework.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is ADO.NET?
Key Points ADO.NET is a part of the .NET Framework base class library, and is a set of components that you can use to access and manipulate data. Even though ADO.NET can be used to access data in non-relational data sources, its primary use is to access and manage data that is stored in relational database systems, such as SQL Server 2008.
ADO.NET ADO.NET is specifically designed for data-related connections in a disconnected environment. Therefore, ADO.NET is a good choice for Internet-based Web applications. ADO.NET uses XML as the format for data transmission between the database and your Web application. ADO.NET consists of two layers—a disconnected layer, and a connected layer.
Disconnected Layer The disconnected layer consists of a number of classes for storing data and relations. The DataSet class is the main class that represents an in-memory cache of data. The DataSet contains a collection of one or more DataTable objects that consist of rows and columns of data, and the primary key, foreign key, constraint, and relation information about the data in the DataTable objects. You can think of the DataSet class as an in-memory representation of a database.
Connected Layer The connected layer manages the traffic of data to and from the data source, and is specific to a data source, such as SQL Server or an XML file. The connected layer is also known as the data provider. ADO.NET ships with a number of ready-to-use data providers, including: •
SQL Server .NET Framework Data Provider, for accessing SQL Server 7.0 and newer databases.
•
OLE DB .NET Framework Data Provider, for accessing any OLE DB data source for which you have an OLE DB provider.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
•
8-5
ODBC .NET Framework Data Provider, for accessing any ODBC data source for which you have an ODBC driver.
A number of third-party vendors, including IBM and Oracle, have created .NET Framework Data Provider implementations. Most data sources from major vendors facilitate data access by using ADO.NET. Question: What is the primary use of ADO.NET?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
ADO.NET Object Model
Key Points The ADO.NET object model provides an infrastructure that you can use to access data from different data sources. There are two layers of the ADO.NET object model: the disconnected layer, which is usually made up of the DataSet class and related classes, and the connected layer, also known as the data provider.
Disconnected Layer The disconnected layer includes the DataTable, DataRow, DataColumn, Constraint, DataRelation, and DataView classes. The disconnected layer is independent of a data source, and can be used to manage inmemory data. As a result, it can be used with multiple data sources or XML data, or to manage data that is local to the application. Optionally, you can connect the disconnected layer to a data source by using the connected layer. The disconnected layer consists of common types for storing data and relations, which are found within the System.Data namespace. The following table lists these common types. Type
Description
Constraint
Represents a constraint that can be enforced on one or more DataColumn objects. A constraint is a rule that is used to maintain the integrity of the data in a table. The abstract Constraint base class has two derived classes that are used for primary keys and/or unique column values by using the UniqueConstraint class. The ForeignKeyConstraint class determines whether the values in the related tables are also deleted, set to null values, set to default values, or if no action should be taken.
DataColumn
Represents the schema of a single column in a DataTable. Multiple DataColumn objects are used to specify the structure or schema of a DataTable.
DataRelation
Represents a parent/child relationship between two DataTable objects. A
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
Type
8-7
Description DataRelation object is tied to an equal number of DataColumn objects in two different DataTable objects. The DataRelation object allows for navigation between related data tables.
DataRow
Represents a row of data in a DataTable object.
DataSet
This is the general container object that represents an in-memory database, consisting of one or more DataTable objects, and zero or more DataRelation objects. This class is serializable, and can be transported over the wire.
DataTable
Represents one table of in-memory data. The structure of the data is made of one or more DataColumn objects, and the data is saved in DataRow objects. This class is serializable, and can be transported over the wire.
DataTableReader
Obtains the contents of one or more DataTable objects in the form of one or more read-only, forward-only result sets.
DataView
Represents a customized view of a DataTable, which can be used for sorting, filtering, searching, editing, and navigation.
Connected Layer The ADO.NET connected layer provides the link between the data source and the disconnected layer, which is either a DataSet and/or a DataTable object. The common base types are found within the System.Data.Common namespace. The connected layer includes classes such as the DataAdapter, Connection, Command, and DataReader classes. The .NET Framework Data Providers are designed for data manipulation, and for fast, forwardonly, read-only access to data. •
The Connection object provides connectivity to a data source.
•
The Command object enables access to database commands, which can be used to return data, modify data, run stored procedures, and send or retrieve parameter information.
•
The DataReader class provides a high-performance stream of data from the data source.
•
The DataAdapter class provides the bridge between the DataSet object and the data source. The DataAdapter class uses Command objects to run SQL commands at the data source, to both load the DataSet object with data, and reconcile the changes that were made to the data in the DataSet object, back to the data source.
The following table lists the common base types provided by the connected layer. Type name
Type description
DbCommand
Represents an SQL statement or stored procedure to run against a data source. This type is generally split into four different command objects when managing data—one for selecting data, another for inserting data, a third for updating data, and the fourth for deleting data.
DbConnection
Represents the actual connection to a data source, and connects by using a connection string.
DbDataAdapter
Represents a database connection and a set of SQL commands that are used to fill the DataSet and/or DataTable, and update the data source. This type is the bridge between the client-side and the server-side, and it uses a connection
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Type name
Type description object and command objects to perform its duties.
DbDataReader
Reads a forward-only, read-only stream of rows from a data source.
The types listed in the previous table are all abstract base types that must be inherited. Therefore, you need to use the following types for specific data source implementation: •
With the SQL Server .NET Framework Data Provider, use the SqlDataAdapter, SqlDataReader, SqlCommand, and SqlConnection classes, which are all found in the System.Data.SqlClient namespace.
•
With the OLE DB .NET Framework Data Provider, use the OleDbDataAdapter, OleDbDataReader, OleDbCommand, and OleDbConnection classes, which are all found in the System.Data.OleDb namespace.
•
With the ODBC .NET Framework Data Provider, use the OdbcDataAdapter, OdbcDataReader, OdbcCommand, and OdbcConnection classes, which are all found in the System.Data.Odbc namespace.
•
With the Oracle .NET Data Provider, use the OracleDataAdapter, OracleDataReader, OracleCommand, and OracleConnection classes, which are all found in the System.Data.OracleClient namespace. You can use the Oracle .NET Data Provider if you want to connect to an Oracle database version 8.1.7 or newer.
Note: You cannot mix and match the types from the connected layer. All the types used for managing data with a single data source must come from the same .NET Data Provider. Question: How will you work with a DataSet to populate data?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-9
Overview of ADO.NET Entity Framework
Key Points The Entity Framework is a set of technologies in ADO.NET that support development of data-oriented software applications, and it is part of the Microsoft data platform. Architects and developers of data-oriented applications have struggled with the need to achieve two very different objectives: they must model the entities, relationships, and logic of the business problems they are solving, and they must also work with the data engines that are used to store and retrieve the data. The data may span multiple storage systems, each with its own protocols; even applications that work with a single storage system must balance the requirements of the storage system against the requirements of writing efficient and maintainable application code. The Entity Framework enables you to work with data in the form of domain-specific objects and properties—such as customers and customer addresses—without having to be concerned with the underlying database tables and columns where this data is stored. This is enabled by elevating the level of abstraction at which you can work when working with data, and by reducing the code that is required to create and maintain data-oriented applications. Because the Entity Framework is a component of the .NET Framework, Entity Framework applications can run on any computer on which the .NET Framework 4 is installed.
Conceptual Models A longstanding and common design pattern for data modeling is the division of the data model into three parts: a conceptual model, a logical model, and a physical model. The conceptual model defines the entities and relationships in the system that is being modeled. The logical model for a relational database normalizes the entities and relationships into tables with foreign key constraints. The physical model addresses the capabilities of a particular data engine by specifying storage details, such as partitioning and indexing. The physical model is refined by database administrators to improve performance, but programmers writing application code primarily confine themselves to working with the logical model by writing SQL
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
queries and calling stored procedures. You can use conceptual models as a tool for capturing and communicating the requirements of an application, and frequently these conceptual models are used as inert diagrams that are viewed and discussed in the early stages of a project, and then abandoned. Many development teams skip creating a conceptual model and begin by specifying tables, columns, and keys in a relational database. The Entity Framework gives life to conceptual models by enabling you to query entities and relationships in the conceptual model while relying on the Entity Framework to translate those operations to data source-specific commands. This frees applications from hard-coded dependencies on a particular data source. The conceptual model, the storage model, and the mapping between the two are expressed in an external specification, known as the Entity Data Model (EDM).The storage model and mappings can change as needed, without requiring changes to the conceptual model, data classes, or application code. Because storage models are provider-specific, you can work with a consistent conceptual model across various data sources. An EDM is defined by the following three model and mapping files that have corresponding file name extensions: •
Conceptual schema definition language file (.csdl). Defines the conceptual model.
•
Store schema definition language file (.ssdl). Defines the storage model, which is also called the logical model.
•
Mapping specification language file (.msl). Defines the mapping between the storage and conceptual models.
The Entity Framework uses these XML-based models and mapping files to transform, create, read, update, and delete operations against entities and relationships in the conceptual model to equivalent operations in the data source. In addition, the EDM supports mapping entities in the conceptual model to stored procedures in the data source.
Mapping Objects to Data Object-oriented programming poses a challenge for interacting with data storage systems. Frequently, the organization of classes closely mirrors the organization of relational database tables; however, the fit is not perfect. Multiple normalized tables frequently correspond to a single class, and relationships between classes are represented differently from relationships between tables. For example, to represent the customer for a sales order, an Order class uses a property that contains a reference to an instance of a Customer class, but an Order table row in a database contains a foreign key column or set of columns with a value that corresponds to a primary key value in the Customer table. A Customer class might have a property named Orders that contains a collection of instances of the Order class, but the Customer table in a database has no comparable column. Existing solutions help to bridge this gap—which is frequently called an impedance mismatch—by only mapping object-oriented classes and properties to relational tables and columns. Instead of taking this traditional approach, the Entity Framework maps relational tables, columns, and foreign key constraints in logical models to entities and relationships in conceptual models. This enables greater flexibility both in defining objects, and in optimizing the logical model. The EDM tools generate extensible data classes that are based on the conceptual model. These classes are partial classes that can be extended with additional members that the developer adds. The classes that are generated for a particular conceptual model derive from base classes that provide Object Services for materializing entities as objects, and for tracking and saving changes. You can use these classes to work with the entities and relationships as objects that are related by navigation properties.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-11
Accessing and Changing Entity Data The Entity Framework enables applications to access and change data that is represented as entities and relationships in the conceptual model. Object Services uses the EDM to translate object queries against entity types that are represented in the conceptual model into data source-specific queries. Query results are materialized into objects that Object Services manages.
EntityDataSource Control The EntityDataSource control supports data binding scenarios based on EDM. The EDM specification represents data as sets of entities and relationships. The Entity Framework uses EDM in object-relational mapping, and in other scenarios such as ADO.NET Data Services. Users accustomed to the design-time model of ASP.NET data-binding controls will find the programming surface of the EntityDataSource control similar to that of other data source controls. The EntityDataSource control manages the read, create, update, and delete operations with a data source on behalf of data-bound controls on the page. The EntityDataSource works with editable grids, forms with user-controlled sorting and filtering, 2-way bound drop-down list controls, and master-detail pages. The EntityDataSource control is able to obtain query parameter values from page controls, query parameters appended to the page URI, cookies, and other ASP.NET parameter objects.
EDM Tools The EDM tools are designed to help you build Entity Framework applications. With the EDM tools, you can create a conceptual model from an existing database, and then graphically visualize and edit your conceptual model. Or, you can graphically create a conceptual model first, and then generate a database that supports your model. In either case, you can automatically update your model when the underlying database changes and automatically generate object-layer code for your application. Database generation and object-layer code generation are customizable. Together with the Entity Framework runtime, the .NET Framework 4 includes the EDM Generator. This command-line utility can connect to a data source by using a data source–specific .NET Framework data provider, and generate the conceptual model (.csdl), storage model (.ssdl), and mapping (.msl) files that are used by the Entity Framework. The EDM Generator can validate an existing model, and generate a Microsoft Visual Basic® or Microsoft Visual C#® code file that contains the object classes generated from a conceptual model (.csdl) file. It can also generate a Visual Basic or Visual C# code file that contains the pre-generated views for an existing model.
Data Platform Components In .NET Framework 4, the ADO.NET Entity Framework provides the Data Platform components that are listed in the following table. Component
Description
EDM
A design specification that defines application data as sets of entities and relationships. Data in this model supports object-relational mapping and data programmability across application boundaries. EDM data types and relationships are defined in a conceptual model. This is an XML schema written in conceptual schema definition language (CSDL). You use the conceptual model to build programmable classes that represent application data. You can extend these objects as required to support various application needs.
Object Services
Allows programmers to interact with the conceptual model through a set of common language runtime (CLR) classes. These classes can be automatically generated from the conceptual model, or can be developed independently to reflect the structure of the conceptual model. Object Services also provide
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Component
Description infrastructure support for the Entity Framework, including services such as state management, change tracking, identity resolution, loading and navigating relationships, propagating object changes to database modifications, and query building support for Entity SQL.
LINQ to Entities
A language-integrated query (LINQ) implementation that allows you to create strongly-typed queries against the Entity Framework object context by using LINQ expressions and LINQ standard query operators. LINQ to Entities allows developers to work against a conceptual model with a very flexible objectrelational mapping across SQL Server and third-party databases.
Entity SQL
A text-based query language designed to interact with an EDM. Entity SQL is a SQL dialect that contains constructs for querying in terms of higher-level modeling concepts, such as inheritance, complex types, and explicit relationships. You can also use Entity SQL directly with Object Services.
EntityClient
A.NET Framework data provider that allows you to interact with an EDM. EntityClient follows the .NET Framework data provider pattern of exposing EntityConnection and EntityCommand objects that return an EntityDataReader. EntityClient works with the Entity SQL language, providing flexible mapping to storage-specific data providers.
EDM Tools
The Entity Framework provides command-line tools, wizards, and designers to facilitate building EDM applications. The EntityDataSource control supports data binding scenarios based on the EDM. The programming surface of the EntityDataSource control is similar to other data source controls in Microsoft Visual Studio®.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-13
Lesson 2
Connecting to a Database
You can use ADO.NET to connect data in a data source (such as a database) to objects and controls in your Web Forms. You can establish a connection to a data source by using the Visual Studio 2010 integrated development environment (IDE). You can also use the DataAdapter object and DataReader object to establish data communication between the client and server. Some of the common tasks you might perform programmatically by using ADO.NET are selecting, inserting, updating, and deleting data. This lesson explains how to programmatically work with data by using ADO.NET, and how to create a connection to access the data that is stored in a SQL Server database.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Create a connection to a data source.
•
Enable data transport between clients and servers.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Creating a Connection
Key Points You can use Visual Studio 2010 IDE to easily establish a connection to a data source, and then verify the connection at design time. You can also create a connection programmatically.
Creating a Connection by Using Server Explorer Server Explorer—which is part of the Visual Studio 2010 IDE—allows you to connect to data sources, create database objects, explore the properties of existing objects, and preview the data. Whenever you explore the server of a data source, the connection state is open; it remains open whenever the window has focus. This can have an impact on availability, especially if the server is remote and heavily used.
To connect to a SQL Server database 1.
In Server Explorer, right-click Data Connections, and then click Add Connection. The Add Connection dialog box appears.
2.
In the Add Connection dialog box:
3.
In the Data source box, ensure that the correct data provider and data source type is selected. •
In the Add Connection dialog box, when you click Change, a Change Data Source dialog box appears and enables you to choose your data source type.
4.
In the Server name box, type or select the name of the data source server.
5.
In the Add Connection dialog box, under Log on to the server pane, click either Use Windows Authentication or Use SQL Server Authentication. If you select SQL Server authentication, provide your credentials.
6.
Under Connect to a database, in the Select or enter a database name list, select a database, and then click OK.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-15
After you create a connection, Server Explorer displays the connection in Data Connections. In Server Explorer, expand the connection, and then expand the Tables folder to view the tables in the database connection. The connection created by using Server Explorer is useful in scenarios where you want to design new tables, or modify existing tables or stored procedures. You can also use the connection created to drag table objects directly to a Web Form, in which case a GridView control is added to the form with a data source control.
Creating a Connection Programmatically If you want your connection to be readily available from your code, you can create a connection object programmatically. For creating a connection to SQL Server 7.0 or newer, you need to first import the System.Data.SqlClient namespace as follows. [Visual Basic] Imports System.Data.SqlClient [Visual C#] using System.Data.SqlClient;
After importing the namespace, you can create your connection object as follows. [Visual Basic] Dim orderConnection As New SqlConnection() [Visual C#] SqlConnection orderConnection = new SqlConnection();
After you have created the connection object, you need to set the connection string. The connection string directs the connection object to the server and database to connect with, as the following code examples show. [Visual Basic] orderConnection.ConnectionString = "Data Source=DatabaseServer;Initial Catalog=OrderDatabase;Integrated Security=True" [Visual C#] orderConnection.ConnectionString = "Data Source=DatabaseServer;Initial Catalog=OrderDatabase;Integrated Security=True";
Notice how a data source or server, an initial catalog or database, and the credentials used for accessing the database, have all been specified. You can get these details by contacting your database administrator. If you are connecting to a SQL Server, integrated security is often used as specified. However, that is not always the case; therefore, you may have to specify the credentials by using the User ID and Password attributes. Tip: If you have created a connection to a database by using Server Explorer, you can copy the connection string form there, and use it directly in code. Open Server Explorer, and then click the data connection. Next, press the F4 key to open the Properties window—if it is not already open—and select and copy the text from the Connection String property. Finally, paste the copied text into your code.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
After the connection object is initialized and instantiated, it must be opened before it can be used by the DataAdapter and/or DataReader classes, which is done as follows. [Visual Basic] orderConnection.Open() [Visual C#] orderConnection.Open();
Note: Because a connection object uses an unmanaged resource, garbage collection does not happen automatically. Therefore, you must close or dispose of the connection object after using it. Otherwise, you will keep the connection to the server open, waste valuable server resources, and potentially degrade server performance—or even deny other users from accessing the server. When you are done with your connection, you must close or dispose of it, as follows. [Visual Basic] ' Close connection orderConnection.Close() ' Dispose of connection orderConnection.Dispose() [Visual C#] // Close connection orderConnection.Close(); // Dispose of connection orderConnection.Dispose();
You need to close the connection or dispose of it, because both operations will eventually dispose of both the unmanaged and managed resources. However, there is no penalty in calling both methods, and it can make your code easier to read from a maintenance point of view. Often, this is a matter of personal preference, or is based on the coding conventions in your workplace. Another method to ensure the disposal of a connection object is to wrap it in a Using/using statement, as in the following examples. [Visual Basic] Using orderConnection As New SqlConnection() orderConnection.ConnectionString = _ "Data Source=DatabaseServer;Initial Catalog=OrderDatabase;Integrated Security=True" orderConnection.Open() ... orderConnection.Close() End Using [Visual C#] using (SqlConnection orderConnection = new SqlConnection()) { orderConnection.ConnectionString = "Data Source=DatabaseServer;Initial Catalog=OrderDatabase;Integrated Security=True"; orderConnection.Open(); ...
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
}
8-17
orderConnection.Close();
When you use the Using/using statement, it is not necessary to call the Close method explicitly, as is done by the Dispose method, which is implicitly called when you wrap the object instantiation in a Using/using statement. However, it may help make your code easier to read. Question: How can you change the data source type for a connection?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Facilitating Data Transport Between Clients and Servers
Key Points After you have created a connection to the database, you need an object to facilitate the transport and synchronization of data between the client and the server. This is where the DataAdapter object is helpful. However, if you only want to retrieve data from the database and not manipulate it in any way, then the DataReader object is your best choice.
DataAdapter The DataAdapter object uses the Connection object to connect to a database, and uses command objects to issue the commands for managing the data. The DataAdapter object has four command object–related properties: •
SelectCommand. Issues an SQL SELECT statement for retrieving data from the data source.
•
UpdateCommand. Issues an SQL UPDATE statement for updating the data in the data source whenever changes are made on the client.
•
InsertCommand. Issues an SQL INSERT statement for inserting new data on the server, whenever new data is created on the client.
•
DeleteCommand. Issues an SQL DELETE statement for deleting data on the server, whenever data is deleted on the client.
Of these four properties, only the SelectCommand must be set, but if you try to update, insert, or delete data, an exception is thrown if the corresponding property has not been set. Each of these properties can have SQL statements, or can be calls to stored procedures in the database. You can use stored procedures to reduce the amount of code that is required to perform SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE operations. You also get an extra layer of security, because the actual SQL code for performing the action is located on the server. Execute permission can be limited to the stored procedures.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-19
Creating a DataAdapter Programmatically If you want your data adapter to be readily available from your code, you can create a DataAdapter object programmatically. For creating a DataAdapter object to work with a SQL Server version 7.0 or newer database, you first need to import the System.Data.SqlClient namespace. After importing the namespace, you can create the SqlDataAdapter object as shown in the following code examples. Note: The examples shown in the rest of this topic have been created with the lab exercise application to show how you can create the DataAdapter object manually, so that it fits into an overall concrete solution. [Visual Basic] ' Declare and instantiate data adapter Dim ordersDataAdapter As New SqlDataAdapter() [Visual C#] // Declare and instantiate data adapter SqlDataAdapter ordersDataAdapter = new SqlDataAdapter();
When you instantiate the data adapter, you can set the command properties as follows. [Visual Basic] ' Declare and instantiate command objects Dim selectCommand As New SqlCommand("SELECT * FROM Orders", orderConnection) Dim deleteCommand As New SqlCommand("DELETE FROM Orders WHERE ID=@ID", orderConnection) Dim insertCommand As New SqlCommand("INSERT INTO Orders (CustomerID, InvoiceDate, CreatedDate, CreatedBy) VALUES(@CustomerID, @InvoiceDate, @CreatedDate, @CreatedBy)", orderConnection) Dim updateCommand As New SqlCommand("UPDATE Orders SET CustomerID=@CustomerID, InvoiceDate=@InvoiceDate, "ModifiedDate=@ModifiedDate, ModifiedBy=@ModifiedBy WHERE ID=@ID", orderConnection) ' Assign command objects ordersDataAdapter.SelectCommand ordersDataAdapter.DeleteCommand ordersDataAdapter.InsertCommand ordersDataAdapter.UpdateCommand
= = = =
selectCommand deleteCommand insertCommand updateCommand
[Visual C#] // Declare and instantiate command objects SqlCommand selectCommand = new SqlCommand("SELECT * FROM Orders", orderConnection); SqlCommand deleteCommand = new SqlCommand("DELETE FROM Orders WHERE ID=@ID", orderConnection); SqlCommand insertCommand = new SqlCommand("INSERT INTO Orders (CustomerID, InvoiceDate, CreatedDate, CreatedBy) VALUES(@CustomerID, @InvoiceDate, @CreatedDate, @CreatedBy)", orderConnection); SqlCommand updateCommand = new SqlCommand("UPDATE Orders SET CustomerID=@CustomerID, InvoiceDate=@InvoiceDate, "ModifiedDate=@ModifiedDate, ModifiedBy=@ModifiedBy WHERE ID=@ID", orderConnection); // Assign command objects ordersDataAdapter.SelectCommand ordersDataAdapter.DeleteCommand ordersDataAdapter.InsertCommand ordersDataAdapter.UpdateCommand
= = = =
selectCommand; deleteCommand; insertCommand; updateCommand;
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
When setting the command properties of the data adapter object, if you create the Command object in a separate step and then assign it to the command properties, you make your code more readable. Using this method, you can easily assign parameters to Command objects where needed. In the code, the selectCommand object uses the SQL SELECT statement to retrieve all the rows from the Orders table. The deleteCommand object deletes all the rows that contain a value of @ID in the ID column. The @ID part is also known as a named parameter, and it can be assigned a value at a later stage. At this stage, you have declared and instantiated the Command object. Note: The ID column in the Orders table is unique, so when a value is assigned to the @ID parameter, only one row with that value will be found. The updateCommand object also makes use of the @ID parameter to identify the correct row to update (WHERE ID=@ID). In addition, it assigns values to the various columns by using named parameters (SET CustomerID=@CustomerID, Invoicedate=@Invoicedate, ...). The insertCommand object performs the same function as the updateCommand, although with a different syntax. You can assign the parameter values as follows. [Visual Basic] ' Declare and instantiate parameter objects Dim deleteIDParameter As New SqlParameter("@ID", SqlDbType.UniqueIdentifier, 0, "ID") Dim updateIDParameter As New SqlParameter("@ID", SqlDbType.UniqueIdentifier, 0, "ID") Dim updateInvoiceDateParameter As New SqlParameter("@InvoiceDate", SqlDbType.SmallDateTime, 0, "InvoiceDate") ... Dim insertInvoiceDateParameter As New SqlParameter("@InvoiceDate", SqlDbType.SmallDateTime, 0, "InvoiceDate") ... ' Assign parameters to command object deleteCommand.Parameters.Add(deleteIDParameter) updateCommand.Parameters.Add(updateIDParameter) ... insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertInvoiceDateParameter) ...
[Visual C#] // Declare and instantiate parameter objects SqlParameter deleteIDParameter = new SqlParameter("@ID", SqlDbType.UniqueIdentifier, 0, "ID"); SqlParameter updateIDParameter = new SqlParameter("@ID", SqlDbType.UniqueIdentifier, 0, "ID"); SqlParameter updateInvoiceDateParameter = new SqlParameter("@InvoiceDate", SqlDbType.SmallDateTime, 0, "InvoiceDate"); ... SqlParameter insertInvoiceDateParameter = new SqlParameter("@InvoiceDate", SqlDbType.SmallDateTime, 0, "InvoiceDate"); ... // Assign parameters to command object deleteCommand.Parameters.Add(deleteIDParameter);
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-21
updateCommand.Parameters.Add(updateIDParameter); ... insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertInvoiceDateParameter); ...
Note: The SqlDbType enumeration used to specify the data type for the various parameters is part of the System.Data namespace; therefore, the System.Data namespace must be imported to your code files. When setting the parameter properties of the Command objects, if you create the Parameter objects in a separate step and then add them to the command parameters, you make your code more readable. Using this method, you can specify the data type, the size, the parameter name, and the source column name. Notice that some parameters are duplicated because they are assigned to more than one Command object. You can assign a parameter object only to a single Command object.
Creating a DataReader Programmatically If you want to create a fast, read-only, forward-only stream of rows from your data source, you should create a DataReader object. For creating a DataReader object to work with SQL Server 7.0 or newer, you first need to import the System.Data.SqlClient namespace. After importing the namespace, you can create your SqlDataReader object by using the ExecuteReader method of the SqlCommand object, as the following code examples illustrate. [Visual Basic] Dim ordersDataReader As SqlDataReader = selectCommand.ExecuteReader() ' Any more rows? While ordersDataReader.Read() ... End While ' Always call Close when done ordersDataReader.Close() [Visual C#] SqlDataReader ordersDataReader = selectCommand.ExecuteReader(); // Any more rows? while (ordersDataReader.Read()) { //... } // Always call Close when done ordersDataReader.Close();
Notice how the SqlCommand object selectCommand is used to create the DataReader object, which selects all the rows from the Orders table. When the ExecuteReader method is called, the SqlConnection object that is associated with the SqlCommand object must be open; otherwise, an exception is thrown. To read any row from the DataReader object, you need to call the Read method, which returns a Boolean value indicating if the cursor is located at a valid row. If the cursor is not located in a valid row, it indicates that there are no more rows in the DataReader object. So, if you want to loop through the rows This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
in a DataReader object, calling the Read method is your only choice because the DataReader is a forward-only construct. (Though you can close it and re-open it, it is an expensive operation in terms of server resources.) Finally, ensure you call the Close method on the DataReader object to allow the connection object to be reused for other purposes. The DataReader is actually used behind the scenes by the DataAdapter to retrieve data and schema from the data source when populating a DataSet or DataTable. Note: When you open a DataReader object, it will monopolize the connection associated with the command object that is used for creating the DataReader object, until you close the DataReader object. You cannot use the connection object—for example, for a DataAdapter object—while it is being used by the DataReader object. To retrieve data from a single database table without creating the various command objects manually, you can use the CommandBuilder class. Question: What are the four command-type properties of the DataAdapter object?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-23
Lesson 3
Managing Data
When you have a connection to a data source and can transport data to and from the server, you need a method to manage the data on the client. This might be for the presentation of the data, or for allowing the users to manipulate the data. You can achieve these tasks by using the types from the connected and disconnected layers of ADO.NET. The DataSet object provides a disconnected copy of all or some of the data in the database. For longrunning Web applications, you can use a DataSet object. However, you often perform basic operations, such as displaying a single set of data directly to the user, or accessing a password. For such operations, you do not have to maintain a DataSet object. Instead, you can use a DataReader object. This lesson explains how to use the DataSet and DataReader objects to support the local data storage and data manipulation requirements of Web Forms.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Retrieve simple data by using the DataReader class.
•
Retrieve non-simple data by using the DataSet class and DataTable class.
•
Manipulate data by using the DataAdapter object.
•
Bind data to server controls by using the Visual Studio 2010 IDE.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Retrieving Simple Data
Key Points When you need to retrieve a single value—such as a password or the number of rows from the database—you can use the ExecuteScalar method of the SqlCommand class. If you want to retrieve data from the database that will only be displayed to the users, the DataReader class is a good choice as a container for the retrieved data.
Retrieving Read-Only Data You can use the Command object to call the ExecuteReader method, send the SELECT command to the data source, and then have the results returned in a DataReader object. You can then use the Read method of the DataReader object to access the result set. If the SELECT command returns multiple result sets, you can use the NextResult method to move to the next result set. Multiple result sets are often the result of multiple SELECT statements. For example, the following SelectCommand object is used with the SQL Server .NET Framework Data Provider. SELECT * FROM Orders;SELECT * FROM Customers
Note that the two SELECT statements are separated by a semicolon. The following code examples create and open a connection, execute the command, store the result in the ordersDataReader object, and then close the connection after processing the results. [Visual Basic] ' Declare and instantiate connection Dim orderConnection As New SqlConnection() ' Initialize connection orderConnection.ConnectionString = "..." ' Declare and instantiate command object Dim selectCommand As New SqlCommand("SELECT * FROM Orders", orderConnection)
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-25
' Open connection orderConnection.Open() ' Declare, instantiate and initialize datareader Dim ordersDataReader As SqlDataReader = _ selectCommand.ExecuteReader() ' Any rows returned? If Not ordersDataReader.HasRows Then ' ... Else ' Any more rows? While ordersDataReader.Read() ... End While End If ' Close datareader ordersDataReader.Close() ' Close connection orderConnection.Close()
[Visual C#] // Declare and instantiate connection SqlConnection orderConnection = new SqlConnection(); // Initialize connection orderConnection.ConnectionString = "..."; // Declare and instantiate command objects SqlCommand selectCommand = new SqlCommand("SELECT * FROM Orders", orderConnection); // Open connection orderConnection.Open(); // Declare, instantiate and initialize datareader SqlDataReader ordersDataReader = selectCommand.ExecuteReader(); // Any rows returned? if (!ordersDataReader.HasRows) { ... } else { // Any more rows? while (ordersDataReader.Read()) { ... } } // Close datareader ordersDataReader.Close(); // Close connection orderConnection.Close();
The HasRows property of the DataReader object verifies if any rows have been returned. If no rows have been returned, you can inform the user or perform any other appropriate action. If the HasRows property is true, the rows are looped through by using the Read method, which advances to the next row, starting with the first row the first time it is called. If the Read method returns false, there are no more rows, and you can no longer access the data in the DataReader object. If you do, an exception is thrown.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
If you need to retrieve just a single value instead of using the ExecuteReader method, you can simply use the ExecuteScalar method. The following method returns a single scalar value, such as the value returned by this SELECT statement. SELECT ID FROM Orders WHERE CreatedBy=’Weber’
If a single customer with the name “Weber” is found, a single entry with the name “Weber,” is returned. However, if more than one customer with the name “Weber” is found, then only the first entry found will be returned. The ID that is returned depends on the manner in which the rows are sorted in the Orders table. If more than a single field is returned by the SELECT statement—for example, an entire row—then the ExecuteScalar method returns the first column of this row. The ExecuteScalar method returns the value of type System.Object. Therefore, you might need to cast the return value before you can use it. The following code examples demonstrate the ExecuteScalar method. [Visual Basic] ' Declare and instantiate command object Dim selectCommand As New SqlCommand("SELECT ID FROM Orders WHERE CreatedBy='Weber'", orderConnection) ' Open connection orderConnection.Open() ' Get scalar value Dim name As String = CType(selectCommand.ExecuteScalar(), String) ' Close connection orderConnection.Close()
[Visual C#] // Declare and instantiate connection SqlConnection orderConnection = new SqlConnection(); // Initialize connection orderConnection.ConnectionString = "..."; // Declare and instantiate command objects SqlCommand selectCommand = new SqlCommand("SELECT ID FROM Orders WHERE CreatedBy='Weber'", orderConnection); // Open connection orderConnection.Open(); // Get scalar value string name = (string) selectCommand.ExecuteScalar(); // Close connection orderConnection.Close();
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-27
Retrieving Non-Simple Data
Key Points If you need to retrieve non-simple data—such as the content of an entire table or a subset of rows from a table—the DataSet or DataTable classes are excellent choices in a disconnected scenario. You can enforce data integrity in a DataSet class by using constraints. You can use the DataSet class to store local data—which you add manually—or you can import XML documents. You can also use the DataSet class for storing a copy or cache of the data—or a subset thereof—in a data source on a different server.
Working with the DataSet Programmatically To create a DataSet object, you can use one of two constructors, where the first constructor does not take any parameters, and the second constructor takes the name of the dataset. The following code examples show how you can declare and instantiate a DataSet. [Visual Basic] Dim ordersDataSet As New DataSet("OrdersDataSet") [Visual C#] DataSet ordersDataSet = new DataSet("OrdersDataSet");
Populating the DataSet After you have created a DataSet object, you can populate the DataSet object by using a DataAdapter object. You can call the Fill method on the DataAdapter object, and then specify the name of the DataTable object that is created for you within the DataSet. The following code examples create and populate the Orders table. The schema of the Orders table in the database is automatically copied to the Orders DataTable object.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
[Visual Basic] ordersDataAdapter.Fill(ordersDataSet, "Orders") [Visual C#] ordersDataAdapter.Fill(ordersDataSet, "Orders");
The Fill method runs the SQL statement that is contained in the Command object, which is accessed by using the SelectCommand property of the DataAdapter object. You should always name the table that is being created and populated, preferably with the name of the table in the database, because you can use this name when accessing the data later. The DataAdapter.Fill method uses the DataReader object implicitly to return the column names and types that are used to create the tables in the DataSet, and the data to populate the rows of the tables in the DataSet. Tables and columns are only created if they do not already exist; otherwise Fill uses the existing DataSet schema.
Accessing a DataTable After you have placed data in a DataSet object, you can programmatically access the data. As the following code examples illustrate, each DataSet object consists of one or more DataTable objects that you can refer to by name or by ordinal position. [Visual Basic] ' Access Orders table by name ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders") ' Access Orders table by ordinal position ordersDataSet.Tables(0) [Visual C#] // Access Orders table by name ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"]; // Access Orders table by ordinal position ordersDataSet.Tables[0];
The DataRow and DataColumn classes are primary components of a DataTable class, where the DataColumn objects make up the structure of the DataTable, and the DataRow objects contain the actual data. You can use a DataRow object and its properties and methods to retrieve and evaluate the values in a DataTable object. The DataRowCollection represents the actual DataRow objects that are in the DataTable object, and the DataColumnCollection contains the DataColumn objects that define the schema of the DataTable object. The Rows property of the DataTable object provides programmatic access to the DataRowCollection. The Columns property of the DataTable object provides programmatic access to the DataColumnCollection. The following code examples retrieve the column names from the DataTable object named Orders, which is contained in the ordersDataSet object. [Visual Basic] For Each col As DataColumn In ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Columns Response.Write(col.ColumnName) Next
[Visual C#] This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-29
foreach (DataColumn col in ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Columns) { Response.Write(col.ColumnName); };
Both the DataRowCollection and DataColumnCollection objects have a Count property that allows you to determine the number of rows or columns in a DataTable object. The following code examples illustrate this. [Visual Basic] ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Rows.Count ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Columns.Count [Visual C#] ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Rows.Count; ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Columns.Count;
Generally, you should not use the index to locate a row in the DataTable object, because you cannot be sure that you are accessing the correct row. While the column can be accessed because it is implied from the data source, the rows can be sorted in different ways, or a row can be marked as deleted, making it difficult to know exactly which row to access. You can loop through the rows, and when you find the correct row, you can retrieve the values from the various columns. Another option is to use the Find method of the DataRowCollection object that is exposed by the Rows property, to locate one or more rows by using the primary key as follows. [Visual Basic] ' Apply the full schema from the data source ordersDataAdapter.FillSchema(ordersDataSet, SchemaType.Source, "Orders") ' Get the data row Dim ordersDataRow As DataRow = ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Rows.Find("a05c7f53-9c4e-de11-aa78-0003ffa70544") [Visual C#] // Apply the full schema from the data source ordersDataAdapter.FillSchema(ordersDataSet, SchemaType.Source, "Orders"); // Get the data row DataRow ordersDataRow = ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Rows.Find("a05c7f53-9c4e-de11-aa78-0003ffa70544");
Notice how a call to the FillSchema method of the DataAdapter object is made prior to calling the Find method of the DataRowCollection object. You need to call the FillSchema method to apply the full schema to the Orders DataTable object, because only the data type and name is applied when using the Fill method of the DataAdapter object. If you want to apply a primary key, you must call the FillSchema method first. Question: How does the Fill method return the column names?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Manipulating Data
Key Points If you need to manipulate the data in your database—either locally or directly on the server—you can use the DataAdapter object. You can also access the database commands and manipulate data by using the Command object.
Manipulating Data by Using a DataAdapter Object The following code examples illustrate how you can insert a new row of data locally. [Visual Basic] ' Create new row locally Dim newOrderDataRow As DataRow = ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").NewRow() newOrderDataRow("ID") = Guid.NewGuid() newOrderDataRow("CustomerID") = currentCustomer.ID newOrderDataRow("InvoiceDate") = DateTime.Now newOrderDataRow("CreatedDate") = DateTime.Now newOrderDataRow("CreatedBy") = currentUser.Name ' Insert new row locally ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Rows.Add(newOrderDataRow) ' Update data source ordersDataAdapter.Update(ordersDataSet, "Orders") [Visual C#] // Create new row locally DataRow newOrderDataRow = ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].NewRow(); newOrderDataRow["ID"] = Guid.NewGuid(); newOrderDataRow["CustomerID"] = currentCustomer.ID; newOrderDataRow["InvoiceDate"] = DateTime.Now; newOrderDataRow["CreatedDate"] = DateTime.Now; newOrderDataRow["CreatedBy"] = currentUser.Name;
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-31
// Insert new row locally ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Rows.Add(newOrderDataRow);
If you want to modify the existing data locally, you can do so, as demonstrated in the follow code examples. [Visual Basic] ' Find row Dim orderDataRow As DataRow = _ ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Rows.Find("a05c7f53-9c4e-de11-aa78-0003ffa70544") ' Update row locally orderDataRow("ModifiedDate") = DateTime.Now orderDataRow("ModifiedBy") = currentUser.Name [Visual C#] // Find row DataRow orderDataRow = ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Rows.Find("a05c7f53-9c4e-de11-aa78-0003ffa70544"); // Update row locally orderDataRow["ModifiedDate"] = DateTime.Now; orderDataRow["ModifiedBy"] = currentUser.Name;
If you want to delete the existing data locally, you can do so, as demonstrated in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] ' Find row Dim orderDataRow As DataRow = _ ordersDataSet.Tables("Orders").Rows.Find("20389eb1-f24f-de11-aa78-0003ffa70544") ' Delete row locally orderDataRow.Delete() [Visual C#] // Find row DataRow orderDataRow = ordersDataSet.Tables["Orders"].Rows.Find("20389eb1-f24f-de11-aa78-0003ffa70544"); // Delete row locally orderDataRow.Delete();
Note: The example code in this topic assumes that you have set up the Command objects for the InsertCommand, UpdateCommand, and DeleteCommand properties of the DataAdapter object. After manipulating the data locally, you may need to send it to the server. The following code examples illustrate this. [Visual Basic] ' Update data source ordersDataAdapter.Update(ordersDataSet, "Orders")
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
[Visual C#] // Update data source ordersDataAdapter.Update(ordersDataSet, "Orders");
Question: What is the main purpose of using the DataAdapter object?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-33
Data to Server Controls by Using the IDE
Key Points To effectively manage data, Visual Studio 2010 allows you to administratively create a database connection, to and create a GridView server control on a Web Form. You can then add a SqlDataSource object to the Web Form, and easily link the GridView control to the database.
Displaying Data on a Web Form After you create a connection to a database, you can use Server Explorer to add data directly to a Web Form. In Server Explorer, if you drag a table to the Text Editor in Design view, Visual Studio 2010 creates a GridView control and a SqlDataSource control by default: •
GridView control. Displays the values of a data source in a table where each column represents a field, and each row represents a record. Optionally, a user can select, sort, and edit the items that are displayed in the control.
•
SqlDataSource control. Enables you to use a server control to access data that is located in a relational database, such as SQL Server databases.
Visual Studio 2010 automatically sets the ConnectionString and Command properties of the SqlDataSource, as shown in the following code. ... This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
The following markup shows the OrderConnectionString1 connection string setting in the web.config file, which is referred to in the previous markup. ... ...
The DataSourceID property of the GridView control is also set to the name of the SqlDataSource control. The following code shows how the DataSourceID property is set to the SqlDataSource control.
At this stage, you can view the Web Form in a browser to display the data from the data source.
Setting Data Source and Control Display Properties You can use the SqlDataSource control in conjunction with a data-bound control to retrieve data from a relational database. You can also display, edit, and sort data on a Web Form by using little or no code. When you select a SqlDataSource control, you can use the Properties window to set its properties. The SqlDataSource control includes the following main properties: •
ConnectionString. The connection string to connect to the database.
•
ProviderName. The name of the .NET Data Provider assembly.
The GridView control includes the following main properties, which can also be set in the Properties window: •
AllowPaging. Enables paging in the control.
•
AllowSorting. Enables sorting in the control.
•
Columns. Displays the set of columns to be shown in the control.
•
DataSourceID. Displays the control ID of a data source.
•
PageSize. The number of rows from the data source to display per page.
You can set the properties in both the Properties window and the Design view. You can use the SqlDataSource control to connect to a database with little or no code. The SqlDataSource control is also the default when dragging a table from Server Explorer onto a Web Form. However, you can use other server controls also, including LinqDataSource. The LinqDataSource control exposes LINQ to Web developers through the ASP.NET data-source control architecture. LINQ provides a unified programming model for querying and updating data from different types of data sources, and extends data capabilities directly into the .NET Framework programming languages, such as Visual Basic and Visual C#. LINQ simplifies the interaction between object-oriented
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-35
programming and relational data by applying the principles of object-oriented programming to relational data. Question: What is the purpose of using the SqlDataSource control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab: Managing Data in an ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab either by using the Visual Basic or Visual C# programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab document. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab document.
Introduction In this lab, you will connect the ASP.NET Web application to a SQL Server database by using the server control, and then bind the user control in the application to a data source. In addition, you will modify the source database, and verify the changes that are made to the database.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Connect to a SQL Server database by using the SqlDataSource control.
•
Bind a user control to the data source.
•
Modify the source database, and verify the changes.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the NYC-CL1 virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: •
User name: Student
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-37
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization uses a Web site to manage its customer information. You are responsible for managing the user information in your organization. To perform this task, you need to add functionality for simple data access tasks to retrieve data in a short time without using a lot of code. To minimize the chances of creating error-prone code when accessing the data in the database, you need to add and configure a data source control to the user control. In addition, you need to add and bind a server control to the user control for displaying specific data from the database.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Connecting to a Data Source The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web project.
2.
Add a SQL Server 2008 Express Database.
3.
Add a data source control to the user control.
4.
Configure a data source control.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web project •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M8\VB folder.
Task 2: Add a SQL Server 2008 Express Database •
Add a new database folder named App_Data, and an existing database to the database folder, D:\LabFiles\Starter\M8\CustomerManagement.mdf.
Task 3: Add a data control source to the user control •
Open the Customer user control in Design view.
•
Add a SqlDataSource control to the user control to connect to an SQL Server database.
•
Rename the SqlDataSource control as CountriesSqlDataSource.
•
Save the Customer user control.
Task 4: Configure a data source control •
In Design view, with the CountriesSqlDataSource control selected, display the Smart Tag.
•
Open the Configure Data Source Wizard, connect to the CustomerManagement.mdf database, and then create a new connection string named CustomerManagementConnectionString.
•
Configure the SELECT statement to include the ID and Name columns from the Countries table.
•
Test the query, and check whether you get the correct data from the Countries table.
Note: Ensure that the returned rows include the values for the ID and Name columns for various countries. •
Save the Customer user control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-39
Exercise 2: Binding a Server Control to a Data Source The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Bind the DropDownList control to a data source.
2.
Pass the values to the Customer object.
Task 1: Bind the DropDownList control to a data source •
Open the Customer user control in Source view.
•
Locate the markup for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control.
•
Remove the static ListItem element from the CustomerCountryDropDownList control. USA
•
Bind the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the CountriesSqlDataSource control by using the DataSourceID attribute. DataSourceID="CountriesSqlDataSource"
•
Set the value field of the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the ID column of the database by using the DataValueField attribute. DataValueField="ID"
•
Set the text field of the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the Name column of the database by using the DataTextField attribute. DataTextField="Name"
•
Build the user control, and fix any errors.
Note: Notice the Build succeeded message in the Build pane of the Output window.
Task 2: Pass the values to the Customer object •
Open the Customer user control in the Code view.
•
Locate the code for the private instantiateCustomerObject method and pass the selected value of the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the Customer class constructor by using the SelectedValue property wrapped in a new Guid object. ' Instantiate new Customer object with user input currentCustomer = New CustomerManagementEntities.Customer( Nothing, CustomerFirstNameTextBox.Text, CustomerLastNameTextBox.Text, CustomerAddressTextBox.Text, CustomerZipCodeTextBox.Text, CustomerCityTextBox.Text, CustomerStateTextBox.Text, New Guid(CustomerCountryDropDownList.SelectedValue), CustomerPhoneTextBox.Text, CustomerEmailAddressTextBox.Text, CustomerWebAddressTextBox.Text, CustomerNewsSubscriberCheckBox.Checked, Integer.Parse(CustomerCreditLimitTextBox.Text), DateTime.Now, "", Nothing, "")
•
Build the user control, and fix any errors.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Modifying a Data Source The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Create the Customers Web Form.
2.
Add the SqlDataSource control to the Web Form.
3.
Configure the SqlDataSource control.
4.
Add the ListView control to the Web Form.
5.
Add code to manually save a customer to a data source.
6.
Update sitemap to enable view all customers.
7.
Create a customer and verify the Data Source.
Task 1: Create the Customers Web Form •
Create the Customers Web Form based on the master page, Site.master.
•
Open the Customers Web Form in the Design view.
Task 2: Add the SqlDataSource control to the Web Form •
Add the SqlDataSource control to the Customers.aspx Web Form.
•
Rename the SqlDataSource control as CustomersSqlDataSource.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
Task 3: Configure the SqlDataSource control •
In Design view, with the CustomersSqlDataSource control selected, display the Smart Tag.
•
Open the Configure Data Source Wizard.
•
Select the CustomerManagementConnectionString connection string for the CustomersSqlDataSource control.
•
Configure the SELECT statement to include all the columns from the Customers table, and ensure that it is possible to manipulate the data in the data source, and use optimistic concurrency.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
Task 4: Add the ListView control to the Web Form •
Add the ListView control to the Customers Web Form.
•
Rename the ListView control as CustomersListView.
•
Bind the CustomersListView control to the CustomersSqlDataSource control by using the Smart Tag.
•
Enable paging in the CustomersListView control.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
•
Build the user control, and fix any errors.
•
View the Customers Web Form in the browser.
•
Close Windows® Internet Explorer®.
Task 5: Add code to manually save a customer to a data source •
Open the Customer user control in the Code view.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
•
Import the namespace used for accessing a SQL Server 2008 database, System.Data.SqlClient.
•
Import the namespace used with the disconnected ADO.NET layer, System.Data.
•
Import the namespace for reading the connection string from the web.config file, System.Configuration.
•
Locate the CustomerInsertButton_Click event handler.
8-41
Protected Sub CustomerInsertButton_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles CustomerInsertButton.Click ' Did page validation succeed? If Not Page.IsValid Then Exit Sub End If ' Add the current user name currentCustomer.CreatedBy = Context.User.Identity.Name ' Add the user credit limit currentCustomer.CreditLimit = 50000 End Sub
•
Remove the assignment of the value 50000 to the CreditLimit property. ' Add the user credit limit currentCustomer.CreditLimit = 50000
•
Append the following code to the CustomerInsertButton_Click event handler, by using a code snippet named ADO.NET Insert Customer. The code snippet has been supplied by the senior developer, and is placed in the My Code Snippets folder. ' Create and instantiate connection Using customerManagementConnection As New SqlConnection() ' Initialize connection string from web.config customerManagementConnection.ConnectionString = ConfigurationManager.ConnectionStrings("CustomerManagementConnectionString").Connectio nString ' Open connection customerManagementConnection.Open() ' Declare and instantiate data adapter Dim customerManagementDataAdapter As New SqlDataAdapter() ' Declare and instantiate command objects Dim selectCommand As New SqlCommand("SELECT * FROM Customers", customerManagementConnection) Dim insertCommand As New SqlCommand( "INSERT INTO Customers (FirstName, LastName, Address, ZipCode, City, State, CountryID, Phone, EmailAddress, " & "Url, CreditLimit, NewsSubscriber, CreatedDate, CreatedBy) VALUES(@FirstName, @LastName, @Address, @ZipCode, @City, @State, " & "@CountryID, @Phone, @EmailAddress, @WebAddress, @CreditLimit, @NewsSubscriber, @CreatedDate, @CreatedBy)", customerManagementConnection) ' Assign command objects customerManagementDataAdapter.SelectCommand = selectCommand customerManagementDataAdapter.InsertCommand = insertCommand ' Declare and instantiate parameter objects Dim insertFirstNameParameter As New SqlParameter("@FirstName", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 50, "FirstName") Dim insertLastNameParameter As New SqlParameter("@LastName", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 30, "LastName") Dim insertAddressParameter As New SqlParameter("@Address", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 50, "Address")
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Dim insertZipCodeParameter As New SqlParameter("@ZipCode", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 10, "ZipCode") Dim insertCityParameter As New SqlParameter("@City", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 30, "City") Dim insertStateParameter As New SqlParameter("@State", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 30, "State") Dim insertCountryIDParameter As New SqlParameter("@CountryID", SqlDbType.UniqueIdentifier, 0, "CountryID") Dim insertPhoneParameter As New SqlParameter("@Phone", SqlDbType.VarChar, 30, "Phone") Dim insertEmailAddressParameter As New SqlParameter("@EmailAddress", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 50, "EmailAddress") Dim insertWebAddressParameter As New SqlParameter("@WebAddress", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 80, "Url") Dim insertCreditLimitParameter As New SqlParameter("@CreditLimit", SqlDbType.Int, 0, "CreditLimit") Dim insertNewsSubscriberParameter As New SqlParameter("@NewsSubscriber", SqlDbType.Bit, 0, "NewsSubscriber") Dim insertCreatedDateParameter As New SqlParameter("@CreatedDate", SqlDbType.SmallDateTime, 0, "CreatedDate") Dim insertCreatedByParameter As New SqlParameter("@CreatedBy", SqlDbType.VarChar, 15, "CreatedBy") ' Assign parameters to command object insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertFirstNameParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertLastNameParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertAddressParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertZipCodeParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCityParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertStateParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCountryIDParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertPhoneParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertEmailAddressParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertWebAddressParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCreditLimitParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertNewsSubscriberParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCreatedDateParameter) insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCreatedByParameter) ' Declare and instantiate dataset Dim customerManagementDataSet As New DataSet("CustomerManagementDataSet") ' Apply the full schema from the data source customerManagementDataAdapter.FillSchema(customerManagementDataSet, SchemaType.Source, "Customers") customerManagementDataAdapter.MissingSchemaAction = MissingSchemaAction.AddWithKey customerManagementDataAdapter.MissingMappingAction = MissingMappingAction.Passthrough ' Populate Customers DataTable customerManagementDataAdapter.Fill(customerManagementDataSet, "Customers") ' Create new row locally Dim newCustomerDataRow As DataRow = customerManagementDataSet.Tables("Customers").NewRow() newCustomerDataRow("ID") = Guid.NewGuid() newCustomerDataRow("FirstName") = currentCustomer.FirstName newCustomerDataRow("LastName") = currentCustomer.LastName newCustomerDataRow("Address") = currentCustomer.Address newCustomerDataRow("ZipCode") = currentCustomer.ZipCode newCustomerDataRow("City") = currentCustomer.City newCustomerDataRow("State") = currentCustomer.State newCustomerDataRow("CountryID") = currentCustomer.CountryID newCustomerDataRow("Phone") = currentCustomer.Phone newCustomerDataRow("EmailAddress") = currentCustomer.EmailAddress newCustomerDataRow("Url") = currentCustomer.EmailAddress
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-43
newCustomerDataRow("CreditLimit") = currentCustomer.CreditLimit newCustomerDataRow("NewsSubscriber") = currentCustomer.NewsSubscriber newCustomerDataRow("CreatedDate") = currentCustomer.CreatedDate newCustomerDataRow("CreatedBy") = currentCustomer.CreatedBy ' Insert new row locally customerManagementDataSet.Tables("Customers").Rows.Add(newCustomerDataRow) ' Update data source If customerManagementDataAdapter.Update(customerManagementDataSet, "Customers") = 1 Then ' Instantiate new Customer object currentCustomer = New CustomerManagementEntities.Customer() ' Reload page to refresh with "blank" input controls Response.Redirect("~/InsertCustomer.aspx") End If End Using
•
Save the Customer code-behind file.
Task 6: Update sitemap to enable view all customers •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Append the new siteMapNode element to the Customers siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
Task 7: Create a customer and verify the Data Source •
Build the CustomerManagement solution.
•
Run the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Open the InsertCustomer Web Form, and click New on the Customers menu.
•
Create a new customer by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Kim
•
Last Name: Abercrombie
•
Address: 9876 Maine Road
•
Zip Code: M24NG
•
City: Manchester
•
Country: Great Britain
•
Phone: 0161-123 555
•
Email Address:
[email protected]
•
Web Address: http://www.litwareinc.com
•
Credit Limit: 50000
•
News Subscriber: Yes
•
Check that the new customer has been added in the data source by using the new Customers Web Form.
•
Close Internet Explorer.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Task 8: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-45
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Connecting to a Data Source The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web project.
2.
Add a SQL Server 2008 Express Database.
3.
Add a data source control to the user control.
4.
Configure a data source control.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web project •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M8\CS folder.
Task 2: Add a SQL Server 2008 Express Database •
Add a new database folder named App_Data, and an existing database to the database folder, D:\LabFiles\Starter\M8\CustomerManagement.mdf.
Task 3: Add a data source control to the user control •
Open the Customer user control in Design view.
•
Add a SqlDataSource control to the user control to connect to a SQL Server database.
•
Rename the SqlDataSource control as CountriesSqlDataSource.
•
Save the Customer user control.
Task 4: Configure a data source control •
In Design view, with the CountriesSqlDataSource control selected, display the Smart Tag.
•
Open the Configure Data Source Wizard, connect to the CustomerManagement.mdf database, and then create a new connection string named CustomerManagementConnectionString.
•
Configure the SELECT statement to include the ID and Name columns from the Countries table.
•
Test the query, and check whether you get the correct data from the Countries table.
Note: Ensure that the returned rows include the values for the ID and Name columns for various countries. •
Save the Customer user control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Binding a Server Control to a Data Source The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Bind the DropDownList control to the data source.
2.
Pass the values to the Customer object.
Task 1: Bind the DropDownList control to a data source •
Open the Customer user control in Source view.
•
Locate the markup for the CustomerCountryDropDownList control.
•
Remove the static ListItem element from the CustomerCountryDropDownList control. USA
•
Bind the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the CountriesSqlDataSource control by using the DataSourceID attribute. DataSourceID="CountriesSqlDataSource"
•
Set the value field of the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the ID column of the database by using the DataValueField attribute. DataValueField="ID"
•
Set the text field of the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the Name column of the database by using the DataTextField attribute. DataTextField="Name"
•
Build the user control, and fix any errors.
Task 2: Pass the values to the Customer object •
Open the Customer user control in the Code view.
•
Locate the code for the private instantiateCustomerObject method, and pass the selected value of the CustomerCountryDropDownList control to the Customer class constructor by using the SelectedValue property wrapped in a new Guid object. // Instantiate new Customer object with user input currentCustomer = new CustomerManagementEntities.Customer( null, CustomerFirstNameTextBox.Text, CustomerLastNameTextBox.Text, CustomerAddressTextBox.Text, CustomerZipCodeTextBox.Text, CustomerCityTextBox.Text, CustomerStateTextBox.Text, new Guid(CustomerCountryDropDownList.SelectedValue), CustomerPhoneTextBox.Text, CustomerEmailAddressTextBox.Text, CustomerWebAddressTextBox.Text, int.Parse(CustomerCreditLimitTextBox.Text), CustomerNewsSubscriberCheckBox.Checked, DateTime.Now, "", null, "");
•
Build the user control, and fix any errors.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-47
Exercise 3: Modifying a Data Source The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Create the Customers Web Form.
2.
Add the SqlDataSource control to the Web Form.
3.
Configure the SqlDataSource control.
4.
Add the ListView control to the Web Form.
5.
Add code to manually save a customer to a data source.
6.
Update sitemap to enable view all customers.
7.
Create a customer and verify the Data Source.
Task 1: Create the Customers Web Form •
Create the Customers Web Form, based on the Site.master master page.
•
Open the Customers Web Form in the Design view.
Task 2: Add the SqlDataSource control to the Web Form •
Add the SqlDataSource control to the Customers.aspx Web Form.
•
Rename the SqlDataSource control as CustomersSqlDataSource.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
Task 3: Configure the SqlDataSource control •
In Design view, with the CustomersSqlDataSource control selected, display the Smart Tag.
•
Open the Configure Data Source Wizard.
•
Select the CustomerManagementConnectionString connection string for the CustomersSqlDataSource control.
•
Configure the SELECT statement to include all the columns from the Customers table, and ensure that it is possible to manipulate the data in the data source, and use optimistic concurrency.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
Task 4: Add the ListView control to the Web Form •
Add the ListView control to the Customers Web Form.
•
Rename the ListView control as CustomersListView.
•
Bind the CustomersListView control to the CustomersSqlDataSource control by using the Smart Tag.
•
Enable paging in the CustomersListView control.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
•
Build the user control, and fix any errors.
•
View the Customers Web Form in the browser.
•
Close Internet Explorer.
Task 5: Add code to manually save a customer to a data source •
Open the Customer user control in the Code view.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Import the namespace used for accessing a SQL Server 2008 database, System.Data.SqlClient.
•
Import the namespace used with the disconnected ADO.NET layer, System.Data.
•
Import the namespace for reading the connection string from the web.config file, System.Configuration.
•
Locate the CustomerInsertButton_Click event handler. protected void CustomerInsertButton_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Did page validation succeed? if (!Page.IsValid) return;
}
•
// Add the current user name currentCustomer.CreatedBy = Context.User.Identity.Name; // Add the user credit limit currentCustomer.CreditLimit = 50000;
Remove the assignment of the value 50000 to the CreditLimit property. // Add the user credit limit currentCustomer.CreditLimit = 50000;
•
Append the following code to the CustomerInsertButton_Click event handler, by using a code snippet named ADO.NET Insert Customer. The code snippet has been supplied by the senior developer, and is placed in the My Code Snippets folder. // Create and instantiate connection using (SqlConnection customerManagementConnection = new SqlConnection()) { // Initialize connection string from web.config customerManagementConnection.ConnectionString = ConfigurationManager.ConnectionStrings["CustomerManagementConnectionString"].Connectio nString; // Open connection customerManagementConnection.Open(); // Declare and instantiate data adapter SqlDataAdapter customerManagementDataAdapter = new SqlDataAdapter(); // Declare and instantiate command objects SqlCommand selectCommand = new SqlCommand("SELECT * FROM Customers", customerManagementConnection); SqlCommand insertCommand = new SqlCommand( "INSERT INTO Customers (FirstName, LastName, Address, ZipCode, City, State, CountryID, Phone, EmailAddress, " + "Url, CreditLimit, NewsSubscriber, CreatedDate, CreatedBy) VALUES(@FirstName, @LastName, @Address, @ZipCode, @City, @State, " + "@CountryID, @Phone, @EmailAddress, @WebAddress, @CreditLimit, @NewsSubscriber, @CreatedDate, @CreatedBy)", customerManagementConnection); // Assign command objects customerManagementDataAdapter.SelectCommand = selectCommand; customerManagementDataAdapter.InsertCommand = insertCommand; // Declare and instantiate parameter objects SqlParameter insertFirstNameParameter = new SqlParameter("@FirstName", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 50, "FirstName"); SqlParameter insertLastNameParameter = new SqlParameter("@LastName", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 30, "LastName");
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-49
SqlParameter insertAddressParameter = new SqlParameter("@Address", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 50, "Address"); SqlParameter insertZipCodeParameter = new SqlParameter("@ZipCode", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 10, "ZipCode"); SqlParameter insertCityParameter = new SqlParameter("@City", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 30, "City"); SqlParameter insertStateParameter = new SqlParameter("@State", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 30, "State"); SqlParameter insertCountryIDParameter = new SqlParameter("@CountryID", SqlDbType.UniqueIdentifier, 0, "CountryID"); SqlParameter insertPhoneParameter = new SqlParameter("@Phone", SqlDbType.VarChar, 30, "Phone"); SqlParameter insertEmailAddressParameter = new SqlParameter("@EmailAddress", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 50, "EmailAddress"); SqlParameter insertWebAddressParameter = new SqlParameter("@WebAddress", SqlDbType.NVarChar, 80, "Url"); SqlParameter insertCreditLimitParameter = new SqlParameter("@CreditLimit", SqlDbType.Int, 0, "CreditLimit"); SqlParameter insertNewsSubscriberParameter = new SqlParameter("@NewsSubscriber", SqlDbType.Bit, 0, "NewsSubscriber"); SqlParameter insertCreatedDateParameter = new SqlParameter("@CreatedDate", SqlDbType.SmallDateTime, 0, "CreatedDate"); SqlParameter insertCreatedByParameter = new SqlParameter("@CreatedBy", SqlDbType.VarChar, 15, "CreatedBy"); // Assign parameters to command object insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertFirstNameParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertLastNameParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertAddressParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertZipCodeParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCityParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertStateParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCountryIDParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertPhoneParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertEmailAddressParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertWebAddressParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCreditLimitParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertNewsSubscriberParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCreatedDateParameter); insertCommand.Parameters.Add(insertCreatedByParameter); // Declare and instantiate dataset DataSet customerManagementDataSet = new DataSet("CustomerManagementDataSet"); // Apply the full schema from the data source customerManagementDataAdapter.FillSchema(customerManagementDataSet, SchemaType.Source, "Customers"); customerManagementDataAdapter.MissingSchemaAction = MissingSchemaAction.AddWithKey; customerManagementDataAdapter.MissingMappingAction = MissingMappingAction.Passthrough; // Populate Customers DataTable customerManagementDataAdapter.Fill(customerManagementDataSet, "Customers"); // Create new row locally DataRow newCustomerDataRow = customerManagementDataSet.Tables["Customers"].NewRow(); newCustomerDataRow["ID"] = Guid.NewGuid(); newCustomerDataRow["FirstName"] = currentCustomer.FirstName; newCustomerDataRow["LastName"] = currentCustomer.LastName; newCustomerDataRow["Address"] = currentCustomer.Address; newCustomerDataRow["ZipCode"] = currentCustomer.ZipCode; newCustomerDataRow["City"] = currentCustomer.City; newCustomerDataRow["State"] = currentCustomer.State;
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
newCustomerDataRow["CountryID"] = currentCustomer.CountryID; newCustomerDataRow["Phone"] = currentCustomer.Phone; newCustomerDataRow["EmailAddress"] = currentCustomer.EmailAddress; newCustomerDataRow["Url"] = currentCustomer.EmailAddress; newCustomerDataRow["CreditLimit"] = currentCustomer.CreditLimit; newCustomerDataRow["NewsSubscriber"] = currentCustomer.NewsSubscriber; newCustomerDataRow["CreatedDate"] = currentCustomer.CreatedDate; newCustomerDataRow["CreatedBy"] = currentCustomer.CreatedBy; // Insert new row locally customerManagementDataSet.Tables["Customers"].Rows.Add(newCustomerDataRow); // Update data source if (customerManagementDataAdapter.Update(customerManagementDataSet, "Customers") == 1) { // Instantiate new Customer object currentCustomer = new CustomerManagementEntities.Customer(); // Reload page to refresh with "blank" input controls Response.Redirect("~/InsertCustomer.aspx"); } }
•
Save the Customer code-behind file.
Task 6: Update sitemap to enable view all customers •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Append the new siteMapNode element to the Customers siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
Task 7: Create a customer and verify the Data Source •
Build the CustomerManagement solution.
•
Run the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Open the InsertCustomer Web Form.
•
Create a new customer by using the following information, and then click the Insert button: •
First Name: Kim
•
Last Name: Abercrombie
•
Address: 9876 Maine Road
•
Zip Code: M24NG
•
City: Manchester
•
Country: Great Britain
•
Phone: 0161-123 555
•
Email Address:
[email protected]
•
Web Address: http://www.litwareinc.com
•
Credit Limit: 50000
•
News Subscriber: Yes
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-51
•
Check that the new customer has been added in the data source by using the new Customers Web Form.
•
Close Internet Explorer.
Task 8: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
Note: The answers to the exercises are on the Course Companion CD.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Shutdown After you complete the lab, you must turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine and revert the changes. 1.
In Microsoft Hyper-V™ Manager, in the Virtual Machines pane, right-click 10267A-GEN-DEV, and then click Turn Off.
2.
In the Turn Off Machine dialog box, click Turn Off.
3.
In Hyper-V Manager, in the Virtual Machines pane, right-click 10267A-GEN-DEV, and then click Revert.
4.
In the Revert Virtual Machine dialog box, click Revert.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data in a Microsoft® ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
8-53
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
How can you enable paging for a GridView control?
2.
How do you connect to a SQL Server database?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
8-54
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
How do you create a connection to a database in Visual Studio 2010?
2.
Which object is used to facilitate transport from the data source to a DataSet object and back again??
3.
What is the main difference between a DataSet and a DataReader object?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You need to connect to an Oracle database. What is the easiest way to connect to the Oracle database? Use the OLE DB .NET Framework Data Provider.
2.
On a production server—where many connections are opened to the database—it appears that after a few days of uptime, the Web server and the database server slow down due to increased amount of memory and connection resources being used. What is the first thing you should check? You should check if you have closed your connection objects correctly.
Best Practices Mention some best practices in the context of your own business situations. •
Connection objects should always be explicitly disposed of.
•
Use a DataTable object whenever you only need to work locally with the content of a single database entity, instead of a DataSet object. It saves resources.
•
Whenever possible, place the connection string in the web.config file, making it accessible to all of the Web application, and making it easy for an administrator to change the file without recompiling code.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-1
Module 9 Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ Contents: Lesson 1: Overview of LINQ
9-3
Lesson 2: Managing XML Data by Using LINQ to XML
9-16
Lesson 3: Managing SQL Data by Using LINQ to SQL and LINQ to Entities
9-29
Lab: Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-41
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Although a large amount of data is stored in Microsoft® SQL Server® databases and is managed by using Microsoft ADO.NET, XML has become a standard for storage, management, and transmission of data. However, both SQL Server and XML data require different methods for managing the data. You can use language-integrated query (LINQ) to query data by using strongly-typed queries and strongly-typed results, which is a common factor across disparate data types such as Microsoft .NET object, relational databases and XML. LINQ improves developer productivity through Microsoft IntelliSense® and compiletime error checking. This module explains what LINQ is, and how you can use LINQ to manage both XML data and SQL Server data in a Microsoft ASP.NET Web application by using Web server controls, and some code.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-3
Lesson 1
Overview of LINQ
You may be an expert at handling one type of data access—such as an SQL Server database or XML data—but not both, because the manner in which you access and manage SQL Server data and XML data differs. Before the introduction of LINQ, there was no single, unified way to access data in different data sources, manage the data, or use a single application programming interface (API) for doing these tasks. Using LINQ, you can write data management code that can be used across various data sources with minor syntax changes. This lesson explains what LINQ is, and how you can use LINQ to SQL to write SQL-type queries for selecting, filtering, and grouping SQL Server data. This lesson also shows how LINQ to XML enables you to write queries on an in-memory XML document to retrieve collections of elements and attributes, and how to use LINQ to entities.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe LINQ.
•
Describe LINQ Query Operators.
•
Describe LINQ to XML.
•
Describe LINQ to SQL.
•
Describe LINQ to Entities.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is LINQ?
Key Points LINQ provides a programming model that you can use to retrieve and manage data from a variety of sources by using any Microsoft .NET Framework–based programming language such as Microsoft Visual Basic®, or Microsoft Visual C#®. LINQ bridges the gap between the objects in object-oriented programming (OOP) and the various data used by OOP applications. Before the introduction of LINQ, data queries were expressed as a simple string, resulting in type-checking at compile time. There was no IntelliSense support, which Microsoft Visual Studio® provides. In addition, each type of data source required a different query language. With LINQ, a query is a first-class language construct in Visual Basic and Visual C#, just like classes, methods, or events. You can write queries in a simplified manner against strongly-typed collections of objects, by using programming language keywords and familiar operators. LINQ also provides a unified syntax that you can use to query any data source that supports LINQ, including SQL Server databases, XML documents, or ADO.NET datasets. You can also write queries against any collection of objects that supports the IEnumerable interface, whether standard or generic.
Visual Studio Features and Tools for LINQ LINQ is an integrated part of the Visual Basic and Visual C# programming languages. Visual Studio 2010 provides various tools and features that support application development by using LINQ, including: •
LINQ-Aware Code Editors. LINQ-aware code editors for Visual Basic and Visual C# provide IntelliSense and LINQ-specific formatting capabilities.
•
Visual Studio Debugger Support. The Visual Studio debugger supports the debugging of LINQ query expressions.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-5
The following illustration shows a partially-completed LINQ query against a SQL Server database in Visual Basic and Visual C#. Notice the full type-checking and IntelliSense support that Visual Studio 2010 provides.
The following code shows how to create a simple LINQ query to enumerate all the files in a subfolder of the Web application root named Public. [Visual Basic] Dim files = From file In My.Computer.FileSystem.GetFiles( Request.PhysicalApplicationPath & "\Public") Select file [Visual C#] var files = from file in System.IO.Directory.GetFiles( Request.PhysicalApplicationPath + "\\Public") select file;
LINQ Implementations Visual Studio 2010 includes LINQ provider assemblies that enable you to use LINQ with several different types of data, including: •
LINQ to DataSet. Enables you to query data cached in a DataSet object.
•
LINQ to Entities. Enables you to query data in relational databases by querying an Entity Data Model (EDM).
•
LINQ to Objects. Enables you to query in-memory data such as arrays and lists.
•
LINQ to SQL. Enables you to query data in relational databases by querying a LINQ to SQL data context.
•
LINQ to XML. Enables you to query data stored in XML documents.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
LINQ Query Operators
Key Points The standard query operators are the methods that form the LINQ pattern. They provide query capabilities, including filtering, aggregation, and sorting. There are two sets of LINQ standard query operators: •
One set of query operators operate on objects of type IEnumerable(T). (VB: IEnumerable(Of T) or C#: IEnumerable)
•
One set of query operators operates on objects of type IQueryable(T). (VB: IQueryable(Of T) or C#: IQueryable
The methods that make up each set are static members of the Enumerable and Queryable classes, respectively. They are defined as extension methods of the type on which they operate, which means they can be called by using either static method syntax or instance method syntax. The standard query operators differ in the timing of their execution, depending on whether they return a single value, or a sequence of values. Those methods that return a single value—for example, Average or Sum—run immediately. Methods that return a sequence defer the query execution and return an enumerable object. Most of methods operate on sequences, where a sequence is an object whose type implements the IEnumerable or IQueryable interface. The following code examples demonstrate how the standard query operators can be used to obtain information about a sequence. [Visual Basic] Dim sentence As String = "the quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog" ' Split into individual words to create a collection Dim words As String() = sentence.Split(" "c) Dim query = From word In words Group word.ToUpper() By word.Length Into gr = Group Order By Length This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-7
Select Length, GroupedWords = gr ' Using method-based query syntax Dim query2 = words _ .GroupBy(Function(w) w.Length, Function(w) w.ToUpper()) _ .Select(Function(g) New With {.Length = g.Key, .GroupedWords = g}) _ .OrderBy(Function(o) o.Length) For Each obj In query2 Response.Write(String.Format("Words of length {0}:", obj.Length)) For Each word As String In obj.GroupedWords Response.Write(word & "") Next Next
[Visual C#] string sentence = "the quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog"; // Split the string into individual words to create a collection. string[] words = sentence.Split(' '); // Using query expression syntax var query = from word in words group word.ToUpper() by word.Length into gr orderby gr.Key select new { Length = gr.Key, Words = gr }; // Using method-based query syntax var query2 = words. GroupBy(w => w.Length, w => w.ToUpper()). Select(g => new { Length = g.Key, Words = g }). OrderBy(o => o.Length); foreach (var obj in query) { Response.Write(string.Format("Words of length {0}:", obj.Length));
}
foreach (string word in obj.Words) Response.Write(word + "");
The code produces the following output: Words of length 3: THE FOX THE DOG Words of length 4: OVER LAZY Words of length 5: QUICK
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
BROWN JUMPS
Common Query Operators The following is a list of common query operators in Visual Basic and Visual C#. Operator(s)
Visual Basic operator
Visual C# operator
Description
Select
Select
select
Selects a sequence from the container.
From ... In
From ... In
from ... in
Extracts a subset (From/from) of data from a container (In/in).
Join
From x In ..., y In ... Where x.a = b.a -orJoin ... [As ...] In ... On ...
join ... in ... on ... equals ...
Performs a join, based on the specified key.
Where
Where
where
Defines a restriction for the items to extract.
Order By
Order By -orOrder By ... Descending
orderby -ororderby ... descending
Sorts a subset in ascending or descending order.
Group By
Group ... By ... Into ... group ... by -orgroup ... by ... into
Groups a subset by specified value.
Question: What are the types of objects, on which the two sets of LINQ standard query operators operate?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-9
What Is LINQ to XML?
Key Points Because XML has been widely adopted as a method of storing, formatting, and transporting data, it is important to understand how to work with data in the XML format. LINQ to XML provides an in-memory XML programming interface that capitalizes on the .NET LINQ Framework. LINQ to XML uses the .NET Framework language capabilities, and is comparable to an updated, redesigned document object model (DOM) XML programming interface. The LINQ to XML query expressions provide functionality that is similar to that of XML Path Language (XPath). Note: XPath is a query language for navigating an XML document and selecting nodes from the document. However, it can also be used to compute values—such as numbers or Boolean values—from the content of the XML document. LINQ to XML is comparable to DOM in that it makes an XML document accessible in memory, but LINQ to XML differs from DOM in that it provides a new object model that is easier to work with. LINQ to XML takes advantage of language improvements in both Visual Basic and Visual C#, and is integrated with LINQ. The latter enables you to run queries on the in-memory XML document to retrieve collections of elements and attributes. LINQ to XML makes XML easier to manage, because the query expression is similar to the SQL programming syntax. In the following LINQ to XML code examples, the query is run to obtain the Internet top-level domain (TLD) value for every Country element in the Countries root element. [Visual Basic] Dim internetTLDs = From country In countries. Select country.Element("InternetTLD")
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
[Visual C#] var internetTLDs = from country in countries.Elements("Country") select (string)country.Element("InternetTLD");
If you need to create in-memory XML—such as an XML tree—you can use the following lines of code. The XML tree can be created more or less as you would write it in an XML file, because of how the Visual Basic Code Editor handles the XML. [Visual Basic] Dim countries = _ 62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Uganda 256 000 UG 602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b1-0003ffa70544 Denmark ## ## ## ## 45 00 DK 63750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Great Britain 44 00 UK
[Visual C#] XElement countries = new XElement("Countries", new XElement("Country", new XElement("ID", "62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), new XElement("Name", "Uganda"), new XElement("PhoneNoFormat", ""), new XElement("DialingCountryCode", "256"), new XElement("InternationalDialingCode", "000"), new XElement("InternetTLD", "UG") ), new XElement("Country", new XElement("ID", "602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b1-0003ffa70544"), new XElement("Name", "Denmark"), new XElement("PhoneNoFormat", "## ## ## ##"), new XElement("DialingCountryCode", "45"), new XElement("InternationalDialingCode", "00"), new XElement("InternetTLD", "DK") ), new XElement("Country", new XElement("ID", "63750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), new XElement("Name", "Great Britain"), new XElement("PhoneNoFormat", ""),
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
);
)
9-11
new XElement("DialingCountryCode", "44"), new XElement("InternationalDialingCode", "00"), new XElement("InternetTLD", "UK")
Question: What are the various uses of LINQ to XML?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is LINQ to SQL?
Key Points Almost all applications today manipulate data, and most often, the data is stored in a relational database such as a SQL Server database. The difference lies in how the data in programming languages and data in relational databases is represented. A programming language accesses information in a database by using objects through one or more APIs. These APIs require that you specify your queries as simple text strings. Because queries are represented as text strings, they cannot be verified for errors such as syntax errors. Also, IntelliSense does not work in the Visual Studio 2010 text editor. This is the gap that LINQ to SQL bridges, because it provides a runtime infrastructure for managing relational data as objects. The data model of a traditional relational database is mapped to an object model that is expressed in the syntax of the programming language used. At runtime, LINQ to SQL translates the LINQ queries in the object model into SQL, and sends them to the database for execution. Upon return, the results are converted back to objects. You can use the Object Relational Designer (O/R Designer) in Visual Studio 2010 to create a data context, which is a mapping of the relational data to objects. You can create the data context by using the user interface of the O/R Designer by dragging tables and other objects from a database in Server Explorer to the O/R Designer. After you have added the tables to the designer surface, you can view and set the properties of the classes. The tables become classes, and you can manipulate the data in the tables. When you build your project or solution, the sqlmetal.exe command-line tool automatically generates the classes that give you access to the data by using strongly-typed objects in your code. In the following code examples that use LINQ to SQL, the query is run to obtain all the customers in the Customers table in a SQL Server database, and is mapped by using a DataContext object. [Visual Basic] ' Declare and instantiate data context Dim cmDataContext As New CustomerManagementDataContext() This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-13
' Create query for selecting all customers from Customers table Dim query = From customers In cmDataContext.Customers ' Output names of selected customers For Each cust In query Response.Write(cust.Name & "") Next [Visual C#] // Declare and instantiate data context CustomerManagementDataContext cmDataContext = new CustomerManagementDataContext(); // Create query for selecting all customers from Customers table var query = from customers in cmDataContext.Customers select customers; // Output names of selected customers foreach (Customer cust in query) Response.Write(cust.Name + "");
The Sqlmetal.exe tool creates the CustomerManagementDataContext class, and you should treat it like an ADO.NET connection. The CustomerManagementDataContext class needs to be properly disposed by using the Dispose method, after you have used it. If you plan to use the data context throughout your application, you can declare it globally—for example, in the global application file, Global.asax. Question: In which scenario will you use LINQ to SQL?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is LINQ to Entities?
Key Points The Entity Framework enables developers to work with data in the form of domain-specific objects and properties—such as customers and customer addresses—without having to think about the underlying database tables and columns where this data is stored. LINQ to Entities enables you to write queries against the Entity Framework conceptual model using Visual Basic or Visual C#. Queries against the Entity Framework are represented by command tree queries, which execute against the object context. LINQ to Entities converts LINQ queries to command tree queries, executes the queries against the Entity Framework, and returns objects that can be used by both the Entity Framework and LINQ. Through the Object Services infrastructure of Entity Framework, ADO.NET exposes a common conceptual view of data—including relational data—as objects in the .NET environment. LINQ to Entities queries use the Object Services infrastructure. The ObjectContext class is the primary class for interacting with an Entity Data Model (EDM). The developer can construct a generic ObjectQuery instance through the ObjectContext class. The ObjectQuery generic class represents a query that returns an instance or collection of typed entities. The returned entity objects are updatable, and are located in the object context. In the following code examples that use LINQ to Entities, the Select method is used to return a sequence of product names from the AdventureWorks database. [Visual Basic] Using AWEntities As New AdventureWorksEntities Dim productNames = AWEntities.Products.Select(Function(p) p.Name()) Response.Write("Product Names:" & "") For Each productName In productNames Response.Write(productName & "") Next End Using
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-15
[Visual C#] using (AdventureWorksEntities AWEntities = new AdventureWorksEntities()) { var productNames = AWEntities.Products.Select(p => p.Name);
}
Response.Write("Product Names:" + ""); foreach (String productName in productNames) { Response.Write(productName + ""); }
Question: In which scenario will you use LINQ to Entities?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 2
Managing XML Data by Using LINQ to XML
XML has traditionally been a type of data storage that is hard to manage, whether using DOM, other object models, XML tools, or utilities. With the advent of LINQ to XML, this has all changed. While the notion of nodes, elements, or attributes still exist in LINQ to XML, it is easier than before to query, manage, and update XML data. XML is a widely-accepted data formatting method that helps you manage and transport data to a database. LINQ to XML is a programming interface that supports LINQ expressions to read, write, and process XML data. With LINQ to XML, you can write queries on an inmemory XML document, and retrieve collections of elements and attributes. You can also manage XML data by querying and modifying the XML content, and then saving the content to a file, or serializing it for further processing. This lesson explains what LINQ to XML is, how you can make XML data available for querying, and how you can query and manage XML data by using LINQ to XML.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Query XML data by using LINQ to XML.
•
Work with XML data by using LINQ to XML.
•
Display LINQ to XML data in Web Forms.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-17
Querying XML Data by Using LINQ to XML
Key Points When you have a string of XML, or a file with XML content, you may want to extract specific information. The .NET Framework includes three models for processing XML data. You can: •
Use the System.Xml.XmlDocument class, which implements the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) DOM Level 1 Core and the DOM Level 2 Core.
•
Use the System.Xml.XPathDocument class, which provides a fast, read-only in-memory representation of an XML document by using the XPath data model.
•
Use LINQ to XML.
The System.Xml.XmlDocument class and the System.Xml.XPathDocument class use the notion of a document as a container for XML. However, this is not the case with LINQ to XML, which works well at the element level by using the XElement class. The System.Xml.XmlReader works well when reading XML in a fast, non-cached, but forward-only manner. However, you cannot use the System.Xml.XmlReader when you need to query for specific elements without looping through the entire content. Although it is possible to query the content of an XPathDocument object by using XPath, you will find that using LINQ is easier. The performance of LINQ to XML is faster than the performance of the DOM classes in the System.XML namespace, but the performance of the XmlReader class is faster than the performance of LINQ to XML.
Making XML Available for Querying When you have to query XML, you need to first determine where the XML is stored—in a text string, in a file, or in any other manner. Examine the following code example.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b1-0003ffa70544 Denmark ## ## ## ## 45 00 DK 62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Uganda 256 000 UG 63750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Great Britain 44 00 UK
The sample XML can be queried, whether already stored in memory (such as in a string), in manually created XML, or externally in a file, provided it is accessible. Typically, prior to LINQ to XML, reading from a file was done by using a class derived from the abstract System.Xml.XmlReader class, and while it is still possible to do so, it is easier to do it as demonstrated in the following code, where the Countries.xml file contains the sample XML. [Visual Basic] Dim countries As XElement = XElement.Load(Server.MapPath("Countries.xml"))
[Visual C#] XElement countries = XElement.Load(Server.MapPath("Countries.xml"));
The Load method of the XElement class is overloaded, and some of the overloads take a parameter of type System.IO.TextReader or System.Xml.XmlReader, so that there is a link to use the classes from the System.Xml namespace. If you want to read the XML stored in a string, you can use the Parse method of the XElement class as follows. [Visual Basic] Dim xmlString As String = "602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b10003ffa70544Denmark..." Dim countries As XElement = XElement.Parse(xmlString) [Visual C#] string xmlString = "602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b10003ffa70544Denmark..."; XElement countries = XElement.Parse(xmlString);
Both the examples result in an outer XElement object that contains the inner XElement objects, as the indentation of the sample XML indicates.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-19
Querying XML You can query the XML in the countries XElement object as indicated in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] ' Extract all elements where PhoneNoFormat has been specified Dim countriesWithPhNoFormat As IEnumerable(Of XElement) = From c In countries Where Not IsNothing(c.Element("PhoneNoFormat")) AndAlso CType(c.Element("PhoneNoFormat").Value, String) "" Select c [Visual C#] // Extract all elements where PhoneNoFormat has been specified var countriesWithPhNoFormat = (from c in countries.Elements() where c.Element("PhoneNoFormat") != null && (string)c.Element("PhoneNoFormat").Value != "" select c);
In the sample code, notice how the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable has been specifically declared; this makes the code more readable. You can also extract the elements by omitting the type in Visual Basic, or by using the var keyword in Visual C#, as demonstrated in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] ' Extract all elements where PhoneNoFormat has been specified Dim countriesWithPhNoFormat = From c In countries.Elements ... Select c [Visual C#] // Extract all elements where PhoneNoFormat has been specified var countriesWithPhNoFormat = (from c in countries.Elements() ... select c);
The LINQ to XML query specifies the following: •
Select the countries XElement object.
•
Select descendant elements of the root node, which is the Countries node or element.
•
Select only the descendant elements of the Country node with the name PhoneNoFormat, and with a non-blank value.
The query uses the Element property of a parent XElement to specify the descendant, but it is also possible to use the Elements or Descendants property, in which case more than a single element can be returned. You can use the Descendants property if you want to query the child elements, and the child elements of these child elements, and so on, as indicated in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] Dim countriesWithPhNoFormat = From c In countries.Elements Where Not IsNothing(c.Descendants("PhoneNoFormat")) AndAlso CType(c.Descendants("PhoneNoFormat").First.Value, String) "" Select c
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
[Visual C#] var countriesWithPhNoFormat = from c in countries.Elements() where c.Descendants("PhoneNoFormat") != null && (string)c.Descendants("PhoneNoFormat").First().Value != "" select c;
Notice how the First extension method returns the first occurrence of the returned elements. In this case, there will always be only one element. In the sample XML, elements have been used throughout, but in many cases attributes are used instead of child elements, or a combination of attributes and child attributes are used. The following code is the same data as in the first XML sample, but with the exclusive use of attributes for the Country element, instead of child elements.
To get the same result by querying the sample XML, you need to query the Attribute element as indicated in the following code examples. [Visual Basic] Dim countriesWithPhNoFormat = _ From c In countries.Elements _ Where Not IsNothing(c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat")) AndAlso _ CType(c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value, String) "" _ Select c [Visual C#] var countriesWithPhNoFormat = from c in countries.Elements() where c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat") != null && (string) c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value != "" select c;
The Attribute property returns an object of type XAttribute. Similar to the Elements property, the Attributes property returns more than one attribute. Question: What is the purpose of using the XElement class?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-21
Working with XML Data by Using LINQ to XML
Key Points When you store XML in a durable state—such as in a file with XML content—it may not suffice to extract information; you may also need to update the XML content. If you read an XML document by using the XmlReader class, you can similarly use the XmlWriter class to write it to an XML document, but it is easier to read and write by using the various methods of the XElement class. The following code examples show how to select the countries that have the phone number format specified. [Visual Basic] ' Extract all elements where PhoneNoFormat has been specified Dim countriesWithPhNoFormat As New XElement("Countries", From c In countries.Elements Where Not IsNothing(c.Element("PhoneNoFormat")) AndAlso CType(c.Element("PhoneNoFormat").Value, String) "" Select New XElement("Country", New XElement(c.Element("ID")), New XElement(c.Element("Name")), New XElement(c.Element("PhoneNoFormat")), New XElement(c.Element("DialingCountryCode")), New XElement(c.Element("InternationalDialingCode")), New XElement(c.Element("InternetTLD")) )) ' Save to file countriesWithPhNoFormat.Save(Server.MapPath("CountriesWithPhNoFormat.xml")) [Visual C#] // Extract all elements where PhoneNoFormat has been specified XElement countriesWithPhNoFormat = new XElement("Countries",
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
from c in countries.Elements() where c.Element("PhoneNoFormat") != null && (string) c.Element("PhoneNoFormat").Value != "" select new XElement("Country", new XElement(c.Element("ID")), new XElement(c.Element("Name")), new XElement(c.Element("PhoneNoFormat")), new XElement(c.Element("DialingCountryCode")), new XElement(c.Element("InternationalDialingCode")), new XElement(c.Element("InternetTLD")) )); // Save to file countriesWithPhNoFormat.Save(Server.MapPath("CountriesWithPhNoFormat.xml"));
Both the XElement and XDocument classes have a Load and a Save method, but the query used in the XElement object returns an IEnumerable(XElement) class, and not an XElement class like the Load method does. Therefore, by specifically stating that the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable is of the type XElement, and assigning a new outer XElement or root to Countries, you can use the same query. However, you also need to create each individual Country element, copying across the values from the matching elements from the query source, countries. Finally, you can save the extracted methods by using the Save method. Instead of extracting elements from one XElement, you can also modify, delete, or insert elements while looping the original XElement. The sample content used for the code example is as follows. 602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b1-0003ffa70544 Denmark ## ## ## ## 45 00 DK 62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Uganda 256 000 UG 63750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Great Britain 44 00 UK 66750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 USA 1 011 US
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-23
The following code examples show how you can add, modify, or delete an element. [Visual Basic] ' Add new element countries.Add(New XElement("Country", _ New XElement("ID", "3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), _ New XElement("Name", "Afghanistan"), _ New XElement("PhoneNoFormat", ""), _ New XElement("DialingCountryCode", "93"), _ New XElement("InternationalDialingCode", "00"), _ New XElement("InternetTLD", "AF"))) ' Modify element ' Loop through all countries For Each country As XElement In countries.Elements ' Is this an element to modify? If country.Element("Name") = "USA" Then ' Set the phone no. format country.SetElementValue("PhoneNoFormat", "(###) ###-####") End If Next ' Delete element ' Loop through all countries For Each country As XElement In countries.Elements ' Is this an element to modify? If country.Element("ID") = "62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632" Then ' Remove element country.Remove() End If Next
[Visual C#] // Add new element countries.Add(new XElement("Country", new XElement("ID", "3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), new XElement("Name", "Afghanistan"), new XElement("PhoneNoFormat", ""), new XElement("DialingCountryCode", "93"), new XElement("InternationalDialingCode", "00"), new XElement("InternetTLD", "AF"))); // Modify element // Loop through all countries foreach (XElement country in countries.Elements()) { // Is this an element to modify? if (country.Element("Name").Value == "USA") { // Set the phone no. format country.SetElementValue("PhoneNoFormat", "(###) ###-####"); } } // Delete element // Loop through all countries foreach (XElement country in countries.Elements()) { // Is this an element to modify? if (country.Element("ID").Value == "62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632") // Remove element country.Remove();
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
}
The Add method is straightforward, and so is the Remove method, because they are really standard .NET Framework collection methods. The looping is also standard .NET code, but the SetElementValue method is slightly different, in that passing a name that does not exist as a child element creates a child element for you. If you call the SetElementValue method passing the name of an existing child element, this method modifies the value of the child element to the value that you specify. If you pass null for value, this method removes the child element. The following is the resulting XML. 602cf8a8-b62f-de11-a6b1-0003ffa70544 Denmark ## ## ## ## 45 00 DK 63750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Great Britain 44 00 UK 66750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 USA (###) ###-#### 1 011 US 3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632 Afghanistan 93 00 AF
The country, Afghanistan, has been added; the country, Uganda, has been removed; and the phone number format for the United States has been modified. Question: How will you use LINQ queries to process an XML tree?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-25
Displaying LINQ to XML Data
Key Points When you need to display LINQ to XML data in your Web Forms, you have some options to choose from: •
You can do it manually by including the creation of the XML tree or loading it from a file, or load the XML into one or more Web server controls.
•
You can directly bind the XML data to an XmlDataSource Web server control, and then bind the XmlDataSource control to one or more Web server controls.
A simple but very effective approach is to use the XmlDataSource that is bound to a GridView control. If you have some Country-related data stored in a file, you can use the XElement.Load method to load the XML data into memory, as follows. [Visual Basic] Dim countries As XElement = XElement.Load(Server.MapPath("Countries.xml")) [Visual C#] XElement countries = XElement.Load(Server.MapPath("Countries.xml"));
Alternatively, if the XML data exists in a string, the representation might look like the following code. [Visual Basic] Dim xmlString As String = "" & "" & "" &
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
"" [Visual C#] string xmlString = "" + "" + "" + "";
You then need to add the XML to the XmlDataSource Web server control, and it can be done whether you have the XML data in a file or in a string, as indicated in the following code. [Visual Basic] ' Set xml string data source CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = xmlString ' Set xml file data source CountriesXmlDataSource.DataFile = Server.MapPath("Countries.xml") [Visual C#] // Set xml string data source CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = xmlString; // Set xml file data source CountriesXmlDataSource.DataFile = Server.MapPath("Countries.xml");
The DataFile property can also be set declaratively, as indicated in the following code.
After setting either of the XML data properties of the XmlDataSource control, you should load and validate the XML, which can be done as indicated in the following code. [Visual Basic] ' Trigger Xml validation CountriesXmlDataSource.GetXmlDocument() [Visual C#] // Trigger Xml validation CountriesXmlDataSource.GetXmlDocument();
At this stage, the XML is validated, and a problem could arise if the XML data has more than one root node. If you want to filter the elements and retrieve all of the countries with the phone number format specified, you can use the following code examples.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-27
[Visual Basic] ' Make XML data queryable Dim countries As XElement = XElement.Parse(xmlString) ' Extract all countries with phone no. format specified Dim countriesWithPhNoFormat As IEnumerable(Of XElement) = _ From c In countries.Elements("Country") _ Where Not IsNothing(c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat")) AndAlso _ CType(c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value, String) "" _ Select c [Visual C#] // Make XML data queryable XElement countries = XElement.Parse(xmlString); // Extract all countries with phone no. format specified IEnumerable countriesWithPhNoFormat = (from c in countries.Elements("Country") where c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat") != null && (string)c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value != "" select c);
Notice that to perform the query, you can parse the XML into an XElement object by using the Parse method. An object of the type XElement can be used directly by the Data property of the XmlDataSource, if you use the ToString method as in the following code. [Visual Basic] ' Set xml string data source CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = countries.ToString() [Visual C#] // Set xml string data source CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = countries.ToString();
However, if you want to show the filtered countries, you have the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable, which is of type IEnumerable(XElement). This must be converted so that it appears as a string to the Data property of the XmlDataSource control, as in the following code. [Visual Basic] ' Set xml string data source CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = "" & String.Join("", countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(Function(x) x.ToString()).ToArray()) & "" [Visual C#] // Set xml string data source LoadCountriesXmlDataSource.Data = "" + string.Join("", countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(x => x.ToString()).ToArray()) + "";
You can use the String.Join method to extract each object in the IEnumerable variable and join them into an array of strings by using a Lambda function. However, it is important to notice the addition of the root element , which was stripped away when the query was performed. The XmlDataSource control will throw an exception when you call the GetXmlDocument method, if you do not add the root element. The name of the root element is irrelevant for this purpose.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Now, because the XmlDataSource has been prepared for use by a databound control, you can set the DataSourceID property of the GridView control to the name of the XmlDataSource control, and subsequently perform the data binding, as in the following code. [Visual Basic] ' Bind to XmldataSource XmlFileGridView.DataSourceID = "CountriesXmlDataSource" ' Perform databinding XmlFileGridView.DataBind() [Visual C#] // Bind to XmldataSource XmlFileGridView.DataSourceID = "CountriesXmlDataSource"; // Perform databinding XmlFileGridView.DataBind();
Question: What are the advantages of using LINQ to XML?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-29
Lesson 3
Managing SQL Data by Using LINQ to SQL and LINQ to Entities
Data in a relational database is usually referred to as SQL data, because of the syntax that is used for accessing and querying the data. SQL data is the preferred method for storing most data. The SQL language comes in a number of dialects, including Transact-SQL (T-SQL), which is provided by Microsoft. All the languages differ with how you implement the database server. Although there are many languages, after you learn one of the SQL languages, you can easily learn another SQL-based language or dialect. With LINQ to SQL and LINQ to Entities, you can use a standardized, single SQL dialect, even if the databases you access are from different organizations, such as Microsoft, IBM, or Oracle. In this lesson, you will get to know what LINQ to SQL and LINQ to Entities are, how to make the SQL data available for querying, and how you can query and manage the SQL data.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Query SQL data by using LINQ.
•
Work with SQL data by using LINQ.
•
Display SQL data in Web Forms by using LINQ.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Querying SQL Data by Using LINQ
Key Points When you have data in a relational database, the data is most often extracted in smaller pieces for displaying or managing specific information. You need to know how to query the data, and how to make the data accessible for querying.
DataContext and ObjectContext Object By using ADO.NET, you can connect to a relational database, and retrieve or update data. Using LINQ to SQL, you can transport data by using the System.Data.Linq.DataContext class between the client and the server. By using LINQ to Entities, you can query and work with entity data as objects by using the System.Data.Objects.ObjectContext class.
Making SQL Data Available For Querying When you want to query the SQL data, you need to first create a connection to the database, possibly by using Server Explorer. Once you have a connection to access the tables, views, stored procedures, or functions in a database, you can map these database objects to objects by using the O/R Designer in LINQ to SQL, or the ADO.NET Entity Data Model Designer, also known as the Entity Designer, (LINQ to Entities). You need to add a LINQ to SQL Classes or ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item to your Web project by using the Add New Item dialog box. Tip: When naming your LINQ to SQL Classes project item, the corresponding DataContext class that is created is named by using the name that you give the LINQ to SQL Classes project item, and is suffixed with the word DataContext. This means that if you name the LINQ to SQL Classes project item Orders, the DataContext class will be named OrdersDataContext. You need to remember that the naming should be based on the naming conventions that you use. After you have added the LINQ to SQL Classes item (.dbml file) or ADO.NET Entity Data Model (.edmx file) to your project, the O/R Designer or Entity Designer displays.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-31
The Object Relational Designer design surface has two panes: •
Entities pane. The entities pane is the main design surface on the left that displays the entity classes, associations, and inheritance hierarchies.
•
Methods pane. The methods pane is the design surface on the right that displays the DataContext methods that are mapped to stored procedures and functions.
Note: The Object Relational Designer maps the relational data contained in a database to objects. This process is known as Object Relational Mapping. Object Relational Mapping is about making relational data entities—such as tables—available as objects in memory. Note: You can manually create classes, associations, or inheritance in the entities pane, or you can drag tables or views from Server Explorer. Associations are automatically added to the entities pane between two entities, if they are associated or related in the database. Note: Currently, the Object Relational Designer supports only SQL Server 2000, SQL Server 2005, SQL Server 2008, and SQL Server Express databases. LINQ to SQL supports other databases, but then the DataContext class must be created manually. The Entity Designer consists of the following components: •
A visual design surface for editing the conceptual model. You can create, modify, or delete entities and associations.
•
A Mapping Details window for viewing and editing mappings. You can map entity types or associations to database tables, columns, and stored procedures.
•
A Model Browser window that provides tree views of the conceptual model and the storage model.
•
Toolbox controls for creating entities, associations, and inheritance relationships.
Note: To work with entities in the Entity Designer and the associated .edmx file, you can use the Entity Data Model Wizard, Update Model Wizard, and Create Database Wizard. This means that you can generate a data model from an existing database, create a data model from scratch or update an existing data model, and generate a database from the data model. When you save the .dbml or .edmx file, the Code Generation Tool also known as SqlMetal.exe (LINQ to SQL) or EntityModelCodeGenerator (LINQ to Entities) is automatically run to create or re-create the DataContext or ObjectContext class. The actual entity classes—which are referenced from the DataContext or ObjectContext class—are exposed through public read-only properties. It is the generated code that makes it possible to query the database objects in your LINQ to SQL or LINQ to Entities queries. Note: The connection string used for connecting to the database is automatically saved to the web.config file in the connectionStrings element. For a LINQ to SQL Classes project item, the name of the add element is by default the name of the database, suffixed with ConnectionString. For an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item, the name of the add element is by default the name of the ObjectContext created.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
The following code examples show how to query the entities in the Customers database table by using LINQ to SQL. [Visual Basic] ' Initialize data context from web.config Dim cmDataContext As New CustomerManagementDataContext( ConfigurationManager.ConnectionStrings("customerManagementConnectionString").ConnectionS tring) ' Return all customers with a credit limit smaller than 1,000 Dim query = From c In cmDataContext.Customers Where c.CreditLimit < 1000 Select c ' Iterate through the customers ... ' Dispose of data context cmDataContext.Dispose() [Visual C#] // Initialize data context from web.config CustomerManagementDataContext cmDataContext = new CustomerManagementDataContext( ConfigurationManager.ConnectionStrings["customerManagementConnectionString"].ConnectionS tring); // Return all customers with a credit limit smaller than 1,000 var query = from c in cmDataContext.Customers where c.CreditLimit < 1000 select c; // Iterate through the customers ... // Dispose of data context cmDataContext.Dispose();
Ensure that the DataContext or ObjectContext object is appropriately disposed of, as it is usually done with unmanaged resources. LINQ to SQL and LINQ to Entities both use deferred execution by default, which means that a LINQ to SQL or LINQ to Entities statement is not run against the database until you start iterating through the results. This means that you should not dispose of DataContext or ObjectContext object until the results have been accessed. The following code examples show how to query the entities in the Customers database table, by using LINQ to Entities. [Visual Basic] ' Initialize object context from web.config Dim cmObjectContext As New CustomerManagementObjectContext( ConfigurationManager.ConnectionStrings("customerManagementConnectionString").ConnectionS tring) ' Return all customers with a credit limit smaller than 1,000 Dim query = From c In cmObjectContext.Customers Where c.CreditLimit < 1000 Select c ' Iterate through the customers
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-33
... ' Dispose of object context cmObjectContext.Dispose() [Visual C#] // Initialize object context from web.config CustomerManagementObjectContext cmObjectContext = new CustomerManagementObjectContext( ConfigurationManager.ConnectionStrings["customerManagementConnectionString"].ConnectionS tring); // Return all customers with a credit limit smaller than 1,000 var query = from c in cmObjectContext.Customers where c.CreditLimit < 1000 select c; // Iterate through the customers ... // Dispose of data context cmObjectContext.Dispose();
Question: What is the purpose of using LINQ to SQL?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Working with SQL Data by Using LINQ
Key Points When you use SQL data, you might not only want to extract information, you might want to also perform updates to the database. Similar to the retrieval of entities, you can perform updates by using the DataContext or ObjectContext object. For example, you can perform updates such as adding a new country to the countries collection, modifying the name of a country, or deleting a country by using the DataContext object. The following code examples show how you can add, modify, or delete a country entity by using LINQ to SQL. [Visual Basic] ' Create a new Country object Dim countryObject As New Country With { .ID = New Guid("3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), .Name = "Afghanistan", .DialingCountryCode = "93", .InternationalDialingCode = "00", .InternetTLD = "AF" } ' Add new country to the Countries collection cmDataContext.Countries.InsertOnSubmit(countryObject) ' Return country to modify Dim modifyQuery = From c In cmDataContext.Countries Where c.Name = "USA" Select c ' Modify country For Each c As Country In modifyQuery c.PhoneNoFormat = "(###) ###-####" Next ' Return country to delete This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-35
Dim deleteQuery = From c In cmDataContext.Countries Where c.ID = New Guid("62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632") Select c ' Delete country cmObjectContext.Countries.DeleteOnSubmit(deleteQuery.First) ' Submit changes to database Try cmDataContext.SubmitChanges() Catch ex As Exception ' Handle exception ... End Try
[Visual C#] // Create a new Country object Country countryObject = new Country { ID = new Guid("3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), Name = "Afghanistan", DialingCountryCode = "93", InternationalDialingCode = "00", InternetTLD = "AF" }; // Add new country to the Countries collection cmDataContext.Countries.InsertOnSubmit(countryObject); // Return country to modify var modifyQuery = from c in cmDataContext.Countries where c.Name == "USA" select c; // Modify country foreach (Country c in modifyQuery) c.PhoneNoFormat = "(###) ###-####"; // Return country to delete var deleteQuery = from c in cmDataContext.Countries where c.ID == new Guid("62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632") select c; // Delete country cmObjectContext.Countries.DeleteOnSubmit(deleteQuery.First); // Submit changes to database try { cmDataContext.SubmitChanges(); } catch (Exception) { // Handle exception ... }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
In the example, a new country object is created locally, and then added to the Countries collection of the DataContext class by using the InsertOnSubmit method. For both the modify and delete operations, new LINQ queries are run to return exactly the row that you want to modify or delete. When modifying, it is only necessary to update the specific entity with the correct column values, because the entity will be marked as modified in the DataContext class. The DeleteOnSubmit method is used to mark the country for deletion. All the changes to the entities are only performed locally; the changes are submitted to the database only when the SubmitChanges method is called. The country, Afghanistan, has been added; the country, Uganda, has been removed; and the phone number format for the United States has been modified. The following code examples show how you can add, modify, or delete a country entity by using LINQ to Entities. [Visual Basic] ' Create a new Country object Dim countryObject As New Country With { .ID = New Guid("3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), .Name = "Afghanistan", .DialingCountryCode = "93", .InternationalDialingCode = "00", .InternetTLD = "AF" } ' Add new country to the Countries collection cmObjectContext.Countries.AddObject(countryObject) ' Return country to modify Dim modifyQuery = From c In cmObjectContext.Countries Where c.Name = "USA" Select c ' Modify country For Each c As Country In modifyQuery c.PhoneNoFormat = "(###) ###-####" Next ' Return country to delete Dim deleteQuery = From c In cmObjectContext.Countries Where c.ID = New Guid("62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632") Select c ' Delete country cmObjectContext.Countries.DeleteObject(deleteQuery.First) ' Submit changes to database Try cmObjectContext.SaveChanges() Catch ex As Exception ' Handle exception ... End Try
[Visual C#] // Create a new Country object Country countryObject = new Country { ID = new Guid("3032b345-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632"), Name = "Afghanistan",
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
};
9-37
DialingCountryCode = "93", InternationalDialingCode = "00", InternetTLD = "AF"
// Add new country to the Countries collection cmObjectContext.Countries.AddObject(countryObject); // Return country to modify var modifyQuery = from c in cmObjectContext.Countries where c.Name == "USA" select c; // Modify country foreach (Country c in modifyQuery) c.PhoneNoFormat = "(###) ###-####"; // Return country to delete var deleteQuery = from c in cmObjectContext.Countries where c.ID == new Guid("62750c5e-092c-de11-8c6e-0003ff4ed632") select c; // Delete country cmObjectContext.Countries.DeleteObject(deleteQuery.First); // Submit changes to database try { cmObjectContext.SaveChanges(); } catch (Exception) { // Handle exception ... }
In the example, a new country object is created locally and then added to the Countries collection of the ObjectContext class by using the AddObject method. For both the modify and delete operations, new LINQ queries are run to return exactly the row that you want to modify or delete. When modifying, it is only necessary to update the specific entity with the correct column values, because the entity will be marked as modified in the ObjectContext class. The DeleteObject method is used to mark the country for deletion. All the changes to the entities are only performed locally; the changes are submitted to the database only when the SaveChanges method is called. Question: Which methods will submit and save changes made to the local LINQ to SQL or LINQ to Entities context, to the database?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Displaying SQL Data by Using LINQ
Key Points When you need to display your SQL data in your Web Forms by using LINQ, you can: •
Do it all manually.
•
Directly bind the SQL data to a LinqDataSource or EntityDataSource Web server control, and then bind the LinqDataSource or EntityDataSource control to one or more Web server controls used for displaying the data.
The LinqDataSource and EntityDataSource control are very similar to the SqlDataSource control, but there are differences: •
LinqDataSource uses a DataContext object for accessing the database.
•
EntityDataSource uses an ObjectContext object for accessing the database.
•
LinqDataSource and EntityDataSource SQL statements can use LINQ queries.
Therefore, if you want to use the LinqDataSource control, you need to add a LINQ to SQL classes project item, populate it with entities, and then generate the DataContext class. If you want to use the EntityDataSource control, you need to add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item, populate it with entities, and then generate the ObjectContext class. The code-generated DataContext or ObjectContext class, is automatically instantiated when it is bound to a LinqDataSource or EntityDataSource control, and if the data source control is bound to a dataaware Web server control such as the GridView or ListView controls. If using LINQ to SQL, you need to link the generated DataContext to the LinqDataSource Web server control, as follows. [Visual Basic] ' Set data context CountriesLinqDataSource.ContextTypeName = "CustomerManagementDataContext" ' Set table This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-39
CountriesLinqDataSource.TableName = "Countries" [Visual C#] // Set data context CountriesLinqDataSource.ContextTypeName = "CustomerManagementDataContext"; // Set table CountriesLinqDataSource.TableName = "Countries";
Notice that at a minimum, you need to set the ContextTypeName and TableName properties, but these can also be set declaratively, as follows.
If using LINQ to Entities, you need to link the generated ObjectContext to the EntityDataSource Web server control, as follows. [Visual Basic] ' Set object context CountriesEntityDataSource.ContextTypeName = "CustomerManagementObjectContext" ' Set entity set CountriesEntityDataSource.EntitySetName = "Countries" [Visual C#] // Set object context CountriesEntityDataSource.ContextTypeName = "CustomerManagementObjectContext"; // Set entity set CountriesEntityDataSource.EntitySetName = "Countries";
Notice that at a minimum, you need to set the ContextTypeName and EntitySetName properties, but these can also be set declaratively, as follows.
At this stage, you can display all the rows from the specified table by using an instance of the specified DataContext or ObjectContext class. However, that would not make them different from the SqlDataSource control. It is the Where property and the associated parameters that really make the LinqDataSource and EntityDataSource controls helpful, because they can be set to values retrieved from any of the following—a control parameter, a cookie parameter, a form parameter, a profile parameter, a query string parameter, a session parameter, or a literal value. This means that you can filter data automatically, based on the value that you set in any of the following—a control property, a cookie property, a form parameter such as the value of a TextBox control, an ASP.NET Profile parameter, a query string value, a session value, or a literal value. You can configure the Where property manually, but setting the parameters can be done more easily by using the Configure Where Expression dialog box. This dialog box is accessible from the Properties window by clicking the ellipsis (...) button in the Where field. However, it is easier to use the Configure Data Source dialog box, which is accessible from Design view of the Web Form on which the LinqDataSource or EntityDataSource control has been placed. This following code shows how the generated markup for a LinqDataSource control can look.
Notice that the comparison operator is the one used when programming in Visual C#, and that goes for all the operators, even if you are programming in Visual Basic.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-41
Lab: Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab by using either the Visual Basic or Visual C# programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab document. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab document.
Introduction In this lab, you will load data from an XML file, and save the data to a database by using LINQ to Entities. In addition, you will filter and display the data by using LINQ to XML.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Load data from an XML file.
•
Display data by using LINQ to XML.
•
Save data to a database by using LINQ to Entities.
Lab Setup Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: •
User name: Student
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization has a Web site to manage its customer information. You are responsible for managing the customer database. Updates to the country data in the database are being delivered in XML files on a monthly basis, and you need to create a Web Form for importing the XML file into the CustomerManagement SQL Server database. You also need to filter the XML data for the countries with a specified phone number from the database. Use LINQ to XML for importing and filtering the XML data, and LINQ to Entities for inserting the new data into the database.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-43
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Loading Data by Using the XmlDataSource Control The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Create the ImportCountries Web Form.
3.
Add an XmlDataSource control to the Web Form.
4.
Configure the XmlDataSource control.
5.
Add a GridView control to the Web Form.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M9\VB folder.
Task 2: Create the ImportCountries Web Form •
Add a new Web Form named ImportCountries, that is based on the Site.master master page.
•
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Design view.
Task 3: Add an XmlDataSource control to the Web Form •
Add an existing XML file, D:\Labfiles\Starter\M9\Countries.xml, to the Web site.
•
Add an XmlDataSource control to the Content control of the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Rename the XmlDataSource control you just added to CountriesXmlDataSource.
•
Save the ImportCountries Web Form.
Task 4: Configure the XmlDataSource control •
Open the Configure Data Source control by using the Show Smart Tag option.
•
Use the Countries.xml data file in the XmlDataSource control.
•
Save the ImportCountries Web Form.
Task 5: Add a GridView control to the Web Form •
Add a GridView control to the Content control of the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Rename the GridView control as CountriesGridView.
•
Set the width of the GridView control to 100%.
•
Bind the CountriesGridView control to the CountriesXmlDataSource control by using the Smart Tag.
•
Save the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Build the Web Form and fix any errors.
•
View the ImportCountries Web Form in the browser.
•
Close the Windows® Internet Explorer® browser.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have created a Web Form, added a GridView and an XmlDataSource control to the Web Form, configured the XmlDataSource control for managing data, and bound the GridView control to the XmlDataSource control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-45
Exercise 2: Displaying Data by Using LINQ to XML The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a Button control to the Web Form.
2.
Update sitemap to enable country import.
3.
Load the XML data file manually.
4.
Show the filtered countries by using the GridView control.
Task 1: Add a Button control to the Web Form •
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Source view.
•
Add a div element with a class attribute value of importCountriesHeader to the Content control, above the GridView control.
•
Add a Button control to the div element.
•
Change the value for the ID attribute from Button1 to FilterButton.
•
Change the Text property of the Button control from Button to Filter Countries. Text="Filter Countries"
•
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in Design view, and select the FilterButton control.
•
Add the default code for the Click event of the FilterButton control.
•
Save the ImportCountries code file.
•
View the ImportCountries.aspx in Source view.
•
Add a div element with a class attribute value of importResult to the Content control, between the GridView control and the div element with a class attribute value of importCountriesHeader.
•
Add a Label control to the div element.
•
Change the value for the ID attribute from Label1 to ImportResultLabel. ID="ImportResultLabel"
•
Remove the Text attribute and value. Text="Label"
•
Disable view state for the Label control. EnableViewState="false"
•
Format and save the ImportCountries Web Form.
Task 2: Update sitemap to enable country import •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Append new siteMapNode element to the Countries siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Task 3: Load the XML data file manually •
Create a private method named loadCountries, to load the XML data to the ImportCountries class.
Note: The loadCountries method returns an XElement, and takes a string parameter named fileName. Private Function loadCountries(ByVal fileName As String) As XElement End Function
•
Import the System.Xml.Linq namespace. Imports System.Xml.Linq
•
Add the code to the loadCountries method to load the content of the file by using the XElement.Load method, and then return to the caller of the method. return XElement.Load(Server.MapPath(fileName))
•
In the Click event handler for the FilterButton control, call the loadCountries method, passing Countries.xml for the filename, and saving the returned value in an XElement variable named countries. Dim countries As XElement = loadCountries("Countries.xml")
•
Create a shared private member variable of type IEnumerable(XElement) named countriesWithPhNoFormat, for holding the filtered countries. Initialize to Nothing, in the ImportCountries class. Private Shared countriesWithPhNoFormat As IEnumerable(Of XElement) = Nothing
•
Create a new private method named filterCountries, for filtering the XML data in the ImportCountries class.
Note: The filterCountries method returns an IEnumerable(XElement), and takes an XElement parameter named countries. Private Function filterCountries(ByVal countries As XElement) As IEnumerable(Of XElement) End Function
•
Add a LINQ query to the filterCountries method that searches the child elements of the root node in the passed countries variable, and returns the result to the caller of the method. Return _ From c In countries.Elements() Select c
•
Add filtering to the LINQ query, selecting the Country elements for which a value for the PhoneNoFormat attribute has been specified. Where Not String.IsNullOrEmpty(c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat"))
•
Call the filterCountries method, pass the local countries variable, and then save the returned value in the private member variable named countriesWithPhNoFormat, in the Click event handler of the FilterButton control. countriesWithPhNoFormat = filterCountries(countries)
•
Save the ImportCountries code file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-47
Task 4: Show the filtered countries by using the GridView control •
Create a private method named buildXmlString for building an XML string from the filtered XML data in the ImportCountries class.
Note: The buildXmlString method returns a string and takes an IEnumerable(XElement) parameter named countriesWithPhNoFormat. Private Function buildXmlString(ByVal countriesWithPhNoFormat As IEnumerable(Of XElement)) As String End Function
•
Return the value of the passed countriesWithPhNoFormat, wrapped in a root node named Countries, to the buildXmlString method. Return "" & countriesWithPhNoFormat & ""
•
Call the IEnumerable(XElement).Select method on the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable to convert each country into a string. countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select()
•
Convert all the values in the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable to strings by using the ToString method in an anonymous Lambda function, placed in the call to the Select method. countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(Function(x) x.ToString())
•
Convert the current output from the Select method to an array by using the ToArray method. countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(Function(x) x.ToString()).ToArray()
•
Join the current output from the ToArray method by using the String.Join method, specifying an empty string separator. String.Join("", countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(Function(x) x.ToString()).ToArray())
•
Assign the return value of the buildXmlString method to the Data property of the CountriesXmlDataSource control, passing the countriesWithPhNoFormat private member variable to the buildXmlString method. CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = buildXmlString(countriesWithPhNoFormat)
•
Reset the DataFile property of the CountriesXmlDataSource control, ensuring that the Data property is used when rendering. CountriesXmlDataSource.DataFile = ""
•
Build the ImportCountries Web Form, and fix any errors.
•
View the ImportCountries Web Form in the browser.
•
Filter the countries from the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Close the Internet Explorer browser. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have loaded the content of the XML file manually, added a Button control to the Web Form, added code to the Click event for filtering the loaded countries, and displayed the filtered XML data in a GridView control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Saving Data by Using LINQ to Entities The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a Button control to the Web Form.
2.
Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item to the Web site project.
3.
Create an ObjectContext object.
4.
Insert the filtered XML data in the local ObjectContext data.
5.
Submit the local ObjectContext data to the database.
Task 1: Add a Button control to the Web Form •
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in Source view.
•
Add a Button control next to the FilterButton control.
•
Change the value for the ID attribute from Button1 to SaveButton. ID="SaveButton"
•
Change the value for the Text property from Button to Save Countries. Text="Save Countries"
•
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in Design view, and double-click the SaveButton control.
•
Save the ImportCountries code file.
Task 2: Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item to the Web site project •
Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item named CustomerManagement.edmx.
•
In the Entity Data Model Wizard, on the Choose Model Contents page, click Generate from database, and then click Next.
•
On the Choose Your Data Connection page, on the Which data connection should your application use to connect to the database? list, click CustomerManagementConnectionString (Settings), in the box below the Save entity connection settings in Web.config as check box, type Entities, and then click Next.
•
On the Choose Your Database Objects page, on the Which database objects do you want to include in your model? list, expand Tables, click Countries (dbo), click Customers (dbo), click Pluralize or singularize generated object names , and then click Finish.
•
Save the ADO.NET Entity Data Model item.
•
Close the ADO.NET Entity Data Model item.
Task 3: Create an ObjectContext object •
Create a private method named saveCountries in the ImportCountries class, for saving the filtered XML data.
Note: The saveCountries method does not return a value, but it takes an IEnumerable(XElement) parameter named countriesWithPhNoFormat. Private Sub saveCountries(ByVal countriesWithPhNoFormat As IEnumerable(Of XElement)) End Sub
•
Add code to create and instantiate an ObjectContext of type CustomerManagementModel.Entities, named cmObjectContext, retrieving the
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-49
CustomerManagementEntities connection string from the web.config file by using the System.Web.Configuration.WebConfigurationManager class. Dim cmObjectContext As New CustomerManagementModel.Entities( System.Web.Configuration.WebConfigurationManager. ConnectionStrings("Entities").ConnectionString)
Task 4: Insert the filtered XML data in the local ObjectContext data •
Add code to loop through the Country elements in the passed countriesWithPhNoFormat variable, by using a For Each construct. ' Loop through the filtered countries For Each country As XElement In countriesWithPhNoFormat Next
•
Add code to insert each country in the Countries collection of the cmObjectContext object by using the AddObject method, and by passing the values from the filtered XML. ' Loop through the filtered countries For Each country As XElement In countriesWithPhNoFormat ' Add the new country to the Countries collection cmObjectContext.Countries.AddObject(New CustomerManagementModel.Country With { .ID = New Guid(country.Attribute("ID").Value), .Name = country.Attribute("Name").Value, .PhoneNoFormat = country.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value, .DialingCountryCode = country.Attribute("DialingCountryCode").Value, .InternationalDialingCode = country.Attribute("InternationalDialingCode").Value, .InternetTLD = country.Attribute("InternetTLD").Value }) Next
Task 5: Submit the local ObjectContext data to the database •
Add a Try Catch Finally construct for saving the local modifications to database. The Catch code must catch all exceptions. ' Save to database Try Catch ex As Exception Finally End Try
•
Add a call to submit the local modifications to the database by using the SaveChanges method of the ObjectContext object in the Try part. ' Save to database Try cmObjectContext.SaveChanges() Catch ex As Exception Finally End Try
•
Display successful import result message by setting the Text property of the ImportResultLabel control to Rows successfully exported to SQL Server table in the Try part. ' Display success message ImportResultLabel.Text = "Rows successfully exported to SQL Server table."
•
Add code to display a custom error message by setting the Text property of the ImportResultLabel control to An error occurred exporting to SQL Server. in the Catch part. Append the value of the Message property of the caught Exception, and two additional line breaks . The
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
text color must be set to red, by setting the ForeColor property of the Label control to the value System.Drawing.Color.Red. Catch ex as Exception ' Display error ImportResultLabel.Text = "An error occurred exporting to SQL Server." & ex.Message & "" ImportResultLabel.ForeColor = System.Drawing.Color.Red
•
Add a more specific Catch statement to the Try Catch Finally construct for catching exceptions that are thrown when errors occur during the actual update, by catching exceptions of type System.Data.UpdateException. The Catch code must be added before the existing catch. ' Save to database Try cmObjectContext.SaveChanges() ' Display success message ImportResultLabel.Text = "Rows successfully exported to SQL Server table." Catch ex As System.Data.UpdateException Catch ex As Exception ' Display error ImportResultLabel.Text = "An error occurred exporting to SQL Server." & ex.Message & "" ImportResultLabel.ForeColor = System.Drawing.Color.Red Finally End Try
•
Add code to display a custom error message by setting the Text property of the ImportResultLabel control to An error occurred exporting to SQL Server.One or more of the rows already exist in the table. in the new Catch. The text color must be set to red by setting the ForeColor property of the Label control to System.Drawing.Color.Red. Catch ex As System.Data.UpdateException ' Display error ImportResultLabel.Text = "An error occurred exporting to SQL Server.One or more of the rows already exist in the table." ImportResultLabel.ForeColor = System.Drawing.Color.Red
•
Add code to dispose the ObjectContext object in the Finally part. Finally cmObjectContext.Dispose()
•
Call the saveCountries method by passing the static countriesWithPhNoFormat private member variable from the Click event handler of the SaveButton control. saveCountries(countriesWithPhNoFormat)
•
Build the ImportCountries Web Form, and fix any errors.
•
View the ImportCountries Web Form in the Solution Explorer browser.
Note: Notice that the CountriesGridView control displays the content of the XML data file. •
Filter the countries from the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Save the imported countries in the database.
Note: If you try to save the countries that already exist in the SQL database, you will receive an error message.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-51
Task 6: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a Button control to the Web Form, added an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item, created an ObjectContext object, and saved the imported countries to the database.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Loading Data by Using the XmlDataSource Control The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Create the ImportCountries Web Form.
3.
Add an XmlDataSource control to the Web Form.
4.
Configure the XmlDataSource control.
5.
Add a GridView control to the Web Form.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M9\CS folder.
Task 2: Create the ImportCountries Web Form •
Add a new Web Form named ImportCountries, that is based on the Site.master master page.
•
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Design view.
Task 3: Add an XmlDataSource control to the Web Form •
Add an existing XML file, D:\Labfiles\Starter\M9\Countries.xml, to the Web Site.
•
Add an XmlDataSource control to the Content control of the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Rename the XmlDataSource control that you just added to CountriesXmlDataSource.
•
Save the ImportCountries Web Form.
Task 4: Configure the XmlDataSource control •
Open the Configure Data Source control by using the Show Smart Tag option.
•
Use the Countries.xml data file in the XmlDataSource control.
•
Save the ImportCountries Web Form.
Task 5: Add a GridView control to the Web Form •
Add a GridView control to the Content control of the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Rename the GridView control as CountriesGridView.
•
Set the width of the GridView control to 100%.
•
Bind the CountriesGridView control to the CountriesXmlDataSource control by using the Smart Tag.
•
Save the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Build the Web Form and fix any errors.
•
View the ImportCountries Web Form in the browser.
•
Close Internet Explorer.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-53
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have created a Web Form, added a GridView and an XmlDataSource control to the Web Form, configured the XmlDataSource control for managing data, and bound the GridView control to the XmlDataSource control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-54
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Displaying Data by Using LINQ to XML The main tasks in this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a Button control to the Web Form.
2.
Update sitemap to enable country import.
3.
Load the XML data file manually.
4.
Show the filtered countries by using the GridView control.
Task 1: Add a Button control to the Web Form •
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Source view.
•
Add a div element with a class attribute value of importCountriesHeader to the Content control, above the GridView control.
•
Add a Button control to the div element.
•
Change the value for the ID attribute from Button1 to FilterButton.
•
Change the Text property of the Button control from Button to Filter Countries. Text="Filter Countries"
•
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in Design view, and then select the FilterButton control.
•
Add the default code for the Click event of the FilterButton control.
•
Save the ImportCountries code file.
•
View the ImportCountries.aspx in Source view.
•
Add a div element with a class attribute value of importResult to the Content control, between the GridView control and the div element with a class attribute value of importCountriesHeader.
•
Add a Label control to the div element.
•
Change the value for the ID attribute from Label1 to ImportResultLabel. ID="ImportResultLabel"
•
Remove the Text attribute and value. Text="Label"
•
Disable view state for the Label control. EnableViewState="false"
•
Format and save the ImportCountries Web Form.
Task 2: Update sitemap to enable country import •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Append new siteMapNode element to the Countries siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-55
Task 3: Load the XML data file manually •
Create a private method named loadCountries, to load the XML data to the ImportCountries class.
Note: The loadCountries method returns an XElement, and takes a string parameter named fileName. private XElement loadCountries(string fileName) { }
•
Import the System.Xml.Linq namespace. using System.Xml.Linq;
•
Add the code to the loadCountries method to load the content of the file by using the XElement.Load method, and then return to the caller of the method. return XElement.Load(Server.MapPath(fileName));
•
In the Click event handler for the FilterButton control, call the loadCountries method, passing Countries.xml for the filename, and saving the returned value in an XElement variable named countries. XElement countries = loadCountries("Countries.xml");
•
Create a static private member variable of type IEnumerable(XElement) named countriesWithPhNoFormat, for holding the filtered countries. Initialize to null, in the ImportCountries class. static private IEnumerable countriesWithPhNoFormat = null;
•
Create a new private method named filterCountries, for filtering the XML data in the ImportCountries class.
Note: The filterCountries method returns an IEnumerable(XElement), and takes an XElement parameter named countries. private IEnumerable filterCountries(XElement countries) { }
•
Add a LINQ query to the filterCountries method that searches the child elements of the root node in the passed countries variable, and returns the result to the caller of the method. return from c in countries.Elements() select c;
•
Add filtering to the LINQ query, selecting the Country elements for which a value for the PhoneNoFormat attribute has been specified. where c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat") != null && (string) c.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value != ""
•
Call the filterCountries method, pass the local countries variable, and then save the returned value in the private member variable named countriesWithPhNoFormat, in the Click event handler of the FilterButton control. countriesWithPhNoFormat = filterCountries(countries);
•
Save the ImportCountries code file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-56
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Task 4: Show the filtered countries by using the GridView control •
Create a private method named buildXmlString for building an XML string from the filtered XML data in the ImportCountries class.
Note: The buildXmlString method returns a string and takes an IEnumerable(XElement) parameter named countriesWithPhNoFormat. private string buildXmlString(IEnumerable countriesWithPhNoFormat) { }
•
Return the value of the passed countriesWithPhNoFormat, wrapped in a root node named Countries, to the buildXmlString method. return "" + countriesWithPhNoFormat + "";
•
Call the IEnumerable(XElement).Select method on the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable to convert each country into a string. countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select()
•
Convert all the values in the countriesWithPhNoFormat variable to strings by using the ToString method in an anonymous Lambda function, placed in the call to the Select method. countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(x => x.ToString())
•
Convert the current output from the Select method to an array by using the ToArray method. countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(x => x.ToString()).ToArray()
•
Join the current output from the ToArray method by using the String.Join method, specifying an empty string separator. string.Join("", countriesWithPhNoFormat.Select(x => x.ToString()).ToArray())
•
Assign the return value of the buildXmlString method to the Data property of the CountriesXmlDataSource control, passing the countriesWithPhNoFormat private member variable to the buildXmlString method. CountriesXmlDataSource.Data = buildXmlString(countriesWithPhNoFormat);
•
Reset the DataFile property of the CountriesXmlDataSource control, ensuring that the Data property is used when rendering. CountriesXmlDataSource.DataFile = "";
•
Build the ImportCountries Web Form, and fix any errors.
•
View the ImportCountries Web Form in the browser.
•
Filter the countries from the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Close Internet Explorer. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have loaded the content of the XML file manually, added a Button control to the Web Form, added code to the Click event for filtering the loaded countries, and displayed the filtered XML data in a GridView control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-57
Exercise 3: Saving Data by Using LINQ to Entities The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a Button control to the Web Form.
2.
Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item to the Web site project.
3.
Create an ObjectContext object.
4.
Insert the filtered XML data in the local ObjectContext data.
5.
Submit the local ObjectContext data to the database.
Task 1: Add a Button control to the Web Form •
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Source view.
•
Add a Button control next to the FilterButton control.
•
Change the value for the ID attribute from Button1 to SaveButton. ID="SaveButton"
•
Change the value for the Text property from Button to Save Countries. Text="Save Countries"
•
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in Design view, and double-click the SaveButton control.
•
Save the ImportCountries code file.
Task 2: Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item to the Web site project •
Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item named CustomerManagement.edmx.
•
In the Entity Data Model Wizard, on the Choose Model Contents page, click Generate from database, and then click Next.
•
On the Choose Your Data Connection page, on the Which data connection should your application use to connect to the database? list, click CustomerManagementConnectionString (Settings), in the box below the Save entity connection settings in Web.config as check box, type Entities, and then click Next.
•
On the Choose Your Database Objects page, on the Which database objects do you want to include in your model? list, expand Tables, click Countries (dbo), click Customers (dbo), click Pluralize or singularize generated object names, and then click Finish.
•
Save the ADO.NET Entity Data Model item.
•
Close the ADO.NET Entity Data Model item.
Task 3: Create an ObjectContext object •
Create a private method named saveCountries in the ImportCountries class, for saving the filtered XML data.
Note: The saveCountries method does not return a value, but it takes an IEnumerable(XElement) parameter named countriesWithPhNoFormat. private void saveCountries(IEnumerable countriesWithPhNoFormat) { }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-58
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Add code to create and instantiate an ObjectContext of type CustomerManagementModel.Entities named cmObjectContext, retrieving the CustomerManagementEntities connection string from the web.config file by using the System.Web.Configuration.WebConfigurationManager class. CustomerManagementModel.Entities cmObjectContext = new CustomerManagementModel.Entities( System.Web.Configuration.WebConfigurationManager. ConnectionStrings["Entities"].ConnectionString);
Task 4: Insert the filtered XML data in the local ObjectContext data •
Add code to loop through the Country elements in the passed countriesWithPhNoFormat variable, by using a For Each construct. // Loop through the filtered countries foreach (XElement country in countriesWithPhNoFormat) { }
•
Add code to insert each country in the Countries collection of the cmObjectContext object by using the AddObject method, and by passing the values from the filtered XML. // Add the new country to the Countries collection cmObjectContext.Countries.AddObject(new CustomerManagementModel.Country { ID = new Guid(country.Attribute("ID").Value), Name = country.Attribute("Name").Value, PhoneNoFormat = country.Attribute("PhoneNoFormat").Value, DialingCountryCode = country.Attribute("DialingCountryCode").Value, InternationalDialingCode = country.Attribute("InternationalDialingCode").Value, InternetTLD = country.Attribute("InternetTLD").Value });
Task 5: Submit the local ObjectContext data to the database •
Add a try catch finally construct for saving the local modifications to database. The catch code must catch all exceptions. // Save to database try { } catch (Exception ex) { } finally { }
•
Add a call to submit the local modifications to the database by using the SaveChanges method of the ObjectContext object in the try part. // Save to database try { cmObjectContext.SaveChanges(); } catch (Exception ex) { } finally { }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
•
9-59
Display successful import result message, by setting the Text property of the ImportResultLabel control to Rows successfully exported to SQL Server table in the try part. // Display success message ImportResultLabel.Text = "Rows successfully exported to SQL Server table.";
•
Add code to display a custom error message by setting the Text property of the ImportResultLabel control to An error occurred exporting to SQL Server. in the Catch part. Append the value of the Message property of the caught Exception, and two additional line breaks . The text color must be set to red, by setting the ForeColor property of the Label control to the value System.Drawing.Color.Red. catch (Exception ex) { // Display error ImportResultLabel.Text = "An error occurred exporting to SQL Server." + ex.Message + ""; ImportResultLabel.ForeColor = System.Drawing.Color.Red; }
•
Add a more specific catch to the try catch finally construct for catching exceptions that are thrown when errors occur during the actual update, by catching exceptions of type System.Data.UpdateException. The catch code must be added before the existing catch. // Save to database try { cmObjectContext.SaveChanges(); // Display success message ImportResultLabel.Text = "Rows successfully exported to SQL Server table.";
} catch (System.Data.UpdateException) { } catch (Exception ex) { // Display error ImportResultLabel.Text = "An error occurred exporting to SQL Server." + ex.Message + ""; ImportResultLabel.ForeColor = System.Drawing.Color.Red; } finally { }
•
Add code to display a custom error message by setting the Text property of the ImportResultLabel control to An error occurred exporting to SQL Server.One or more of the rows already exist in the table. in the new catch. The text color must be set to red, by setting the ForeColor property of the Label control to the value System.Drawing.Color.Red. catch (System.Data.UpdateException) { // Display error ImportResultLabel.Text = "An error occurred exporting to SQL Server.One or more of the rows already exist in the table."; ImportResultLabel.ForeColor = System.Drawing.Color.Red; }
•
Add code to dispose the ObjectContext object in the finally part. finally { cmObjectContext.Dispose(); }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-60
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Call the saveCountries method by passing the static countriesWithPhNoFormat private member variable from the Click event handler of the SaveButton control. saveCountries(countriesWithPhNoFormat);
•
Build the ImportCountries Web Form, and fix any errors.
•
View the ImportCountries Web Form in the Solution Explorer browser.
Note: Notice that the CountriesGridView control displays the content of the XML data file. •
Filter the countries from the ImportCountries Web Form.
•
Save the imported countries in the database.
Note: If you try to save the countries that already exist in the SQL database, you will receive an error message. Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a Button control to the Web Form, added an ADO.NET Entity Data Model project item, created an ObjectContext object, and saved the imported countries to the database.
Task 6: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
Note: The answers to the exercises are on the Course Companion CD.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
9-61
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What types of data can you query by using LINQ?
2.
Why do you use stored procedures instead of accessing the database directly?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
9-62
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What are the tools and features provided by Visual Studio 2010 to support application development using LINQ?
2.
What are the three models provided by the .NET Framework for processing XML data?
3.
What are the panes available in Object Relational Designer design surface?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You need to display data from an XML file that is queried by using LINQ to XML. What is the easiest way to display the data returned from the query? You can use the XmlDataSource control.
2.
Your Web application has been deployed to a production server, but one of the tables in the SQL Server database has a new column added. You need to update the DataContext so that that new column can be returned in the LINQ to SQL queries when all the columns are returned. How will you implement this without using Visual Studio 2010? You should use the SqlMetal.exe command-line tool.
Best Practices Mention some best practices in the context of your own business situations. •
DataContext and ObjectContext objects should always be disposed of.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-1
Module 10 Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data Contents: Lesson 1: Overview of ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-3
Lesson 2: Applying ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-24
Lesson 3: Customizing ASP.NET Dynamic Data Applications
10-34
Lab: Managing Data by Using ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-46
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Using Rapid Application Development (RAD), you can create prototypes of your application. You can drag controls to the design surface, and then build and run the application. By creating and sharing prototypes of an application with a customer—whether internal or external—you can get immediate feedback from the customer. However, there may be a few issues with using RAD. The quality of the generated code may not be consistent, and the code may not be easy to maintain. There may also be security issues because of manual coding, such as ensuring correct input validation. The security risk is particularly applicable to data-driven Web development, when the Web application not only displays the data in the database, but also manages it. Microsoft ASP.NET Dynamic Data resolves these issues in RAD development. ASP.NET Dynamic Data is a framework that enables you to quickly build a functional data-driven application based on a languageintegrated query (LINQ) to SQL, or Entity Framework, data model. ASP.NET Dynamic Data is used to create data-driven applications. Data-driven applications use, manipulate, and analyze data to perform tasks. Currently, data-driven applications use routing for displaying data from a data source. ASP.NET Dynamic Data can also be used for creating Web sites that display and manage data that is automatically read and written to the data source, with little or no coding. This module explains ASP.NET Dynamic Data, and how you can use it with LINQ to SQL to manage your data from a Web user interface (UI), with very little coding.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-3
Lesson 1
Overview of ASP.NET Dynamic Data
ASP.NET Dynamic Data provides a framework that enables you to quickly build a functional data-driven application, based on either a LINQ to SQL data model, or the Entity Framework data model. ASP.NET Dynamic Data improves usability and data-driven RAD by using existing ASP.NET data controls. RAD is made easy because of the rich ASP.NET Dynamic Data scaffolding framework. A scaffolding framework provides a functional Web application for viewing and editing data. If you add a LINQ to SQL or Entity Framework data model to a project, you can register it with Dynamic Data, and have a fully functional Web site for managing your data. If supported by a data source, you can perform Create, Read, Update, and Delete (CRUD) operations. The Web site includes the filtering of data by both foreign keys and Boolean fields. Also, you can add smart validation based on database constraints for nullable fields, data types, and field lengths, by using Web server validation controls. In this lesson, you will learn about the ASP.NET Dynamic Data framework, including the project infrastructure, the scaffolding, the field and page templates, and the routing.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe ASP.NET Dynamic Data.
•
Describe the Dynamic Data project infrastructure.
•
Explain how to implement ASP.NET Dynamic Data scaffolding.
•
Describe ASP.NET Dynamic Data templates.
•
Describe ASP.NET Dynamic Data routing.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is ASP.NET Dynamic Data?
Key Points The ASP.NET Dynamic Data framework helps you create data-driven ASP.NET Web applications. The Dynamic Data framework automatically discovers the data-model metadata at run time, and uses the metadata to derive the UI behavior. The scaffolding framework provides a functional Web site to manage data. You can customize the scaffolding framework to override the default behavior. You can also integrate the scaffolding elements with your existing ASP.NET Web Forms and applications.
Data Model The data model represents information in a database, and depicts how the database objects are related. Dynamic Data supports both the LINQ to SQL data model, and the Microsoft ADO.NET Entity Framework data model. If you register the data models with Dynamic Data, the data model can perform automatic validation of data fields. You can also control the appearance and behavior of data at the data layer level by annotating or applying attributes to the data model. For example, you can annotate that a table should be part of the Web application, and a field should be shown when the data in the containing table is shown. You can also add a display name attribute for a field that it is different from the actual field name, and add a field description attribute that is used by Dynamic Data to add a tool tip when you mouse over the control that is used to display the field and value. You can include multiple instances of data models in a Web application, but the models that are used in Dynamic Data must be of the same type. ASP.NET Dynamic Data is model-oriented, because the Dynamic Data infrastructure is based on the data model. You can use the Dynamic Data infrastructure to control the request routing, control the look and feel of the user interface, and manage the data source.
Scaffolding Scaffolding enhances the existing ASP.NET page framework by dynamically displaying pages that are based on the data model. Scaffolding provides the following capabilities:
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-5
•
Allows you to create a data-driven Web application with little or no code.
•
Provides built-in data validation based on the database schema, which is part of the data model.
•
Creates automatic filters for each foreign key or Boolean field, which are derived from the database schema.
Templates ASP.NET Dynamic Data is based on a number of generic templates that you can use to display various data. These include page templates, and field templates. The templates are disk-based files—such as Web Form and User Control templates—that are used at run time by Dynamic Data for generating the rendered pages, and controlling the pages that contain data from the data source. •
Page Templates. You can use page templates to provide a default view of data entities. These templates are ASP.NET Web Forms that are configured to display data from any entity in the data model. They are generic, because the Web Forms are not specific to a single database entity—such as a table. Dynamic Data provides page templates for different views of data, including: •
List view, which lists the table rows and is the default view.
•
Details view, which displays the details for a single row.
•
Edit view, which allows you to edit rows.
•
List Details view, which displays parent and child entities as a master and details view.
•
Insert view, which allows you to insert a row.
You can modify the routing for your Web application to use any page template as the default template, or to use different page templates for different purposes. You can modify the existing page templates, and create custom page templates. •
Field Templates. Dynamic data uses field templates to render the UI for managing the data in the individual data fields. Dynamic Data determines the appropriate field template from the data field types in the data model schema. Dynamic Data includes separate field templates for displaying and editing data fields. You can customize the built-in field templates, or create new ones to specify how individual data fields are rendered. You can override the use of the default field templates by creating your own custom field templates, and then annotate the data model to use those field templates. This is performed by applying the UIHint attribute to the field that uses the field template in the data model.
Data Controls Dynamic Data enhances existing data controls to include dynamic behavior. ASP.NET 4.0 provides several complex, template-based data-bound controls, including the GridView, DetailsView, ListView, and FormView Web server controls. Dynamic Data enhances these existing data controls to include dynamic behavior. •
The GridView and DetailsView controls display data dynamically by using predefined Dynamic Data templates. You can customize these templates and use specific controls for rendering the UI for managing the data fields. This enables you to make changes in one location t affect the appearance and behavior of the data controls across the Web application. The DynamicField class is used by the GridView and DetailsView controls to display a field value.
•
The ListView and FormView controls are similar to the GridView and DetailsView controls, but implement the behavior by using a DynamicControl control in their templates. Unlike the GridView and DetailsView controls, you must manually specify the data entity field that the ListView and FormView controls need to manage. Dynamic Data automatically builds the UI for these controls
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
based on the specified templates. DynamicControl controls do not automatically render the UI for any field; you must bind the controls to a specific data field. At run time, Dynamic Data examines the data model metadata and provides automatic validation based on the metadata. For example, if a column in the database is marked as not nullable, a RequiredFieldValidator control is automatically rendered for that column. You can also apply custom metadata to further customize how data fields are rendered and validated. Question: What are the some of the capabilities provided by ASP.NET Dynamic Data?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-7
Dynamic Data Project Infrastructure
Key Points The infrastructure of an ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site project or ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web application project is slightly different from a standard ASP.NET Web site project or ASP.NET Web application project. In that the ASP.NET Dynamic Data projects, there are a number of extra folders and files that are created by default. You can create an ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site or ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web application in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010 by using either the ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web Site template, or the ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web Application template. These templates generate the user controls, page templates, and ASP.NET Web files that Dynamic Data uses to create the UI for working with the data.
DataContext or ObjectContext Class An ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web application—whether created by using the ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web Site template or the ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web Application template—requires a System.Web.DynamicData.MetaModel object and a registered DataContext or ObjectContext class. The context can either be a LINQ to SQL class or an ADO.NET Entity Framework class. The DataContext or ObjectContext class should be in the App_Code folder at the root of the application.
Folders and Files The following table lists the folders and files that are created at the root level, in a Dynamic Data Web site or Dynamic Data Web application. Folder or file
Description
DynamicData
This subfolder contains folders for the user controls and Web Forms that display data. The user controls are the field templates, and the Web Forms are the page templates.
Global.asax
The Global Application file (Global.asax) can also be part of a standard
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Folder or file
Description ASP.NET Web site. In a Dynamic Web site, the file registers an instance of the MetaModel class, to add routes to the System.Web.Routing.RouteCollection object, and to register the DataContext or ObjectContext class with the MetaModel class.
Scripts
This subfolder contains the JavaScript files that are required for the use of Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax) or jQuery.
Site.master
Site.master is the master page for the Dynamic Data Web site, and it is used by all Dynamic Data page templates. The Site.master master page is similar to a standard master page, but it does contain a System.Web.UI.ScriptManager control, with an EnablePartialRendering property that is set to false. The ScriptManager class manages the ASP.NET Ajax script libraries and script files, partial-page rendering, and client proxy class generation for Web application services.
web.config
This is the Web site configuration file, which is common for all ASP.NET Web sites and Web applications.
Global Application File In a Dynamic Data Web site, the Global.asax file contains a handler for the Application_Start event that is raised when the Web application starts. In the handler, the RegisterRoutes method is called. By default, the RegisterRoutes method contains a MetaModel instance, and a commented-out call to the RegisterContext method. To enable Dynamic Data operations, you must enable the RegisterContext method, and pass to it a valid data context, such as a DataContext instance or an ADO.NET Entity Framework context. By default, the Global.asax file in a Dynamic Data Web site calls the Add(Type) method to add routing for each action, and for the List.aspx, Details.aspx, Edit.aspx, and Insert.aspx pages.
DynamicData Subfolder Structure The following table describes the subfolders in the DynamicData subfolder. File or folder
Description
Content
This folder contains the Images folder, which contains the graphics files used as icons for the GridViewPager user control. The Content subfolder also contains the GridViewPager.ascx user control, which is used to enhance paging when there is more than one page of data for an entity.
CustomPages
This folder is a container folder for your custom page templates, which are used to override the built-in or modified page templates in the PageTemplates subfolder. For example, if the data context contains a table named Products, you can create a DynamicData\CustomPages\Products folder, and then add .aspx pages to the new folder, which is used to display the Products data. You can copy the pages from the DynamicData\PageTemplates folder into the new DynamicData\CustomPages\Products folder, and then modify the templates.
EntityTemplates
This folder contains the default entity templates, which are used to build the UI for displaying tables.
FieldTemplates
This folder contains the Dynamic Data user controls that map to data types from the data model, including the Boolean.ascx, Boolean_Edit.ascx, Children.ascx, DateTime.ascx, DateTime_Edit.ascx, Decimal_Edit.ascx,
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
File or folder
10-9
Description ForeignKey.ascx, ForeignKey_Edit.ascx, Integer_Edit.ascx, MultilineText_Edit.ascx, Text.ascx, and Text_Edit.ascx user controls.
Filters
This folder contains the user control filter templates that are used to create the UI for table row filtering, including the Boolean.ascx, Enumeration.ascx, and ForeignKey.ascx user controls.
PageTemplates
This folder is a container folder for the built-in page templates—the Details.aspx, Edit.aspx, Insert.aspx, List.aspx, and ListDetails.aspx Web Forms—which produce the UI that is used for managing the data.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
ASP.NET Dynamic Data Scaffolding
Key Points Scaffolding makes it possible to dynamically create pages at run time that are based on the data model without needing a physical page, by extending the existing ASP.NET page framework. To enable the managing of the data in an entity in the data model, scaffolding must be enabled for all entities, or for a particular entity. Note that if you enable scaffolding for all entities, any user—malicious or not—may be able to work out the schema of the database. However, if you are creating a simple data management application, this might be the best choice because it will save you development time. You can also enable scaffolding on the registration of the data or object context in the global application file. This registration is made by using the RegisterContext method, which takes a System.Web.DynamicData.ContextConfiguration object parameter. You are required to register the data context that will use Dynamic Data features, even if you are not going to use the scaffolding mechanism. This registration is made in the Global.asax file by using the RegisterContext method. The RegisterContext method accepts a ContextConfiguration object as a parameter. To enable the scaffolding mechanism while registering the data or object context, set the ScaffoldAllTables property of the ContextConfiguration object to true. This will enable the scaffolding mechanism for the whole data model. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(MyObjectContext), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(MyObjectContext), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
The risk in doing this is that while you know the tables that are exposed at this point in time, you might add more entities to the DataContext or ObjectContext class at a later stage, and these entities will also This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-11
be exposed by the scaffolding. However, even if you choose to use this approach, you can specifically hide entities from the scaffolding mechanism by using the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute. You can use the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute to set the ScaffoldAllTables property to False/false when registering with the data model. You can also use the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute to enable or disable the scaffolding mechanism for a given entity, by applying the attribute to a partial class with the same name as the entity in the data model. In the following code examples, the partial class is manually created, with the scaffolding enabled for the Orders entity. [Visual Basic] Imports Microsoft.VisualBasic Imports System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations Partial Public Class Order ... End Class
[Visual C#] using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Linq; using System.Web; using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations; [ScaffoldTable(true)] public partial class Order { ... }
Notice that the class is named Order, in singular, and not Orders in plural when you use LINQ to SQL or the ADO.NET Entity Data Model to name the classes. Because the Order class is a partial class, you must use the same name that the data model uses.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: How to Implement ASP.NET Dynamic Data Scaffolding
Key Points In this demonstration, you will learn how to implement ASP.NET Dynamic Data scaffolding.
Demonstration Steps To implement ASP.NET Dynamic Data scaffolding, you need to: 1.
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
2.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
3.
4.
5.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Open an existing Web site from either D:\Demofiles\M10\VB\Scaffolding or D:\Demofiles\M10\CS\Scaffolding. •
On the File menu of the Start Page - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Open Web Site.
•
In the Open Web Site dialog box, in the Folder box, type either D:\Demofiles\M10\VB\Scaffolding or D:\Demofiles\M10\CS\Scaffolding, and then click Open.
Build and run the Web site. •
On the Build menu of the Scaffolding - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Build Web Site.
•
In the Save File As dialog box, click Cancel.
•
On the Debug menu of the Scaffolding - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Start Without Debugging.
Close the Windows® Internet Explorer® browser. •
In the “There are no accessible tables. Make sure that at least one data model is registered in Global. - Windows Internet Explorer” window, click the Close button.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
6.
Open Global.asax. •
7.
10-13
In Solution Explorer, right-click Global.asax, and then click Open.
Uncomment the following lines of code at the top of the Shared or static RegisterRoutes method, and modify the uncommented line of code to register the AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT2008_ DataEntities ObjectContext with the model. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT20 08_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT200 8_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
•
In the Global.asax code window, change the following code, [Visual Basic] ' DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(YourDataContextType), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False}) [Visual C#] //DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(YourDataContextType), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
to: [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorks LT2008_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksL T2008_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
8.
Build and run the Web site. •
On the Build menu of the Scaffolding - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Rebuild Web Site.
•
In the Save File As dialog box, click Cancel.
•
On the Debug menu, click Start Without Debugging.
Note: Explain that the reason the exception is thrown, is that the tables that scaffolding should use have not been specified, even if you have registered the data context. 9.
Close Internet Explorer. •
In the “There are no accessible tables. Make sure that at least one data model is registered in Global. - Windows Internet Explorer” window, click the Close button.
10. Modify the uncommented line of code to scaffold all tables. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT20 08_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True}) This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
[Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT200 8_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
•
In the Global.asax code window, change the following code, [Visual Basic] ' DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(YourDataContextType), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False}) [Visual C#] //DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(YourDataContextType), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
to: [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorks LT2008_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksL T2008_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
11. Build and run the Web site. •
On the Build menu of the Scaffolding - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Rebuild Web Site.
•
In the Save File As dialog box, click Cancel.
•
On the Debug menu, click Start Without Debugging.
12. View the Customers table, and then return to the home page. •
In the Dynamic Data Site - Windows Internet Explorer window, under My tables, click Customers.
•
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, under DYNAMIC DATA SITE, click Back to home page.
13. View the Products table, and then return to the home page. •
In the Dynamic Data Site - Windows Internet Explorer window, under My tables, click Products.
•
In the Products - Windows Internet Explorer window, under DYNAMIC DATA SITE, click Back to home page.
Note: Notice that now all the tables in the data context are now shown on the Web Site home page. 14. Close Internet Explorer. •
In the Dynamic Data Site - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
15. Modify the uncommented line of code to not scaffold all tables. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT20 08_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False})
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-15
[Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT200 8_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
•
In the Global.asax code window, change the following code, [Visual Basic] ' DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(YourDataContextType), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True}) [Visual C#] //DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(YourDataContextType), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
to: [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorks LT2008_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksL T2008_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
16. Close the Global.asax file. •
In the Global.asax code window, click the Close button.
•
In the Microsoft Visual Studio message box, click Yes.
17. Add a new class file named Customer to the App_Code folder. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click App_Code, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the middle pane of the Add New Item - D:\Demofiles\M10\VB \Scaffolding\ or Add New Item - D:\Demofiles\M10\CS\Scaffolding\ dialog box, click Class, in the Name box, type Customer, and then click Add.
18. Import the System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations namespace in the Customer class file. [Visual Basic] Imports System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations [Visual C#] using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations;
•
In either the App_Code/Customer.vb or App_Code/Customer.cs code window, type the following code. [Visual Basic] Imports System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations [Visual C#] using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations;
19. Wrap the Customer class in the AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel namespace. [Visual Basic]
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Namespace AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel Public Class Customer ... End Class End Namespace [Visual C#] namespace AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel { /// /// Summary description for Customer /// public class Customer { ... } }
•
In the App_Code/Customer.vb or App_Code/Customer.cs code window, add a namespace directive at the beginning and end of the Customer class. [Visual Basic] Namespace AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel Public Class Customer ... End Class End Namespace [Visual C#] namespace AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel { /// /// Summary description for Customer /// public class Customer { ... } }
20. Apply the Partial or partial keyword to the Customer class. [Visual Basic] Partial Public Class Customer [Visual C#] public partial class Customer
•
In the App_Code/Customer.vb or App_Code/Customer.cs code window, apply the Partial or partial keyword to the Customer class. [Visual Basic] Partial Public Class Customer [Visual C#] public partial class Customer
21. Remove the default constructor from the Customer class. •
In the App_Code/Customer.cs code window, remove the following code. [Visual C#] public Customer() ( // // TODO: Add Constructor logic here
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
}
10-17
//
Note: You only need to remove the default constructor from the Customer class if you are working in Visual C#. 22. Apply the ScaffoldTable attribute to the Customer class with a value of True/true. •
In the App_Code/Customer.vb or App_Code/Customer.cs code window, type the following code before the Customer class declaration. [Visual Basic] [Visual C#] [ScaffoldTable(true)]
23. Build and run the Web site. •
On the Build menu of the Scaffolding - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Rebuild Web Site.
•
In the Save File As dialog box, click Cancel.
•
On the Debug menu, click Start Without Debugging.
Note: Explain that now only the Customers table is exposed, because of the scaffolding attribute in the Customer class. 24. View the Customers table, and then return to the home page. •
In the Dynamic Data Site - Windows Internet Explorer window, under My tables, click Customers.
Note: Notice that all table columns are shown by default. •
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, under DYNAMIC DATA SITE, click Back to home page.
25. Close all open windows. •
In the Dynamic Data Site - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
•
In the Scaffolding - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
Note: If the Microsoft Visual Studio message box displays, click No. Question: What is the use of ScaffoldTable attribute?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
ASP.NET Dynamic Data Templates
Key Points ASP.NET Dynamic Data uses generic templates for generating the UI for managing the data at runtime. The templates consist of page templates and field templates. The templates are used by the Dynamic Data runtime for creating the pages and user controls that display and manage the data in the data source. These templates contain data-bound controls, and have various default property settings that are used to automatically bind the templates to the data source.
Page Templates You can use the built-in page templates to serve fully functional pages. Page templates include all database operations—such as view, insert, edit, and delete—and sorting and paging functions for list views. In addition, the pages provide built-in data validation that is based on the database schema, and sorting filters for each foreign key or Boolean field. These templates are generic, because the Web Forms are not specific to a single database entity, such as a table. Dynamic Data uses a different page template for each operation, except for the delete operation, which displays as a link in both List and Details pages. This is because there is no need for a separate page template for the delete operation, as it only requires a confirmation dialog box. The following are the built-in page templates. Template
Description
List view or List.aspx
This page template—which is the default template for the view operation—displays a list of rows from a database entity in a GridView control. The DropDownList controls filter the data for each foreign key or Boolean column, and for sorting and paging capabilities.
Details view or Details.aspx
This page template—which is the default template for the select operation—displays a detailed view of a single item in the entity, in
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
Template
10-19
Description a FormView control.
Edit view or Edit.aspx
This page template, which is the default template for the edit operation, displays an interface for editing a single item in the entity in a FormView control.
List Details view or ListDetails.aspx
This page template is a combination of the Insert, List, and Details templates. It displays a list of rows from a database entity in a GridView control. It also provides DropDownList controls for filtering the data for each foreign key or Boolean column, and for sorting and paging capabilities. A FormView control views a selected item, and inserts a new item in the entity.
Insert view or Insert.aspx
This page template—which is the default template for the insert operation—displays an interface for inserting a single item into a database entity in a FormView control.
Field Templates You can use a field template for rendering the UI that manages the data in the individual data fields. Dynamic Data determines the appropriate field template from the data field types in the data model schema. There are several field templates for managing different data fields. The field templates are implemented as Web user controls with an .ascx extension. Dynamic Data reads the database schema to get information about the data types and foreign keys, and the ASP.NET data controls supplied by Dynamic Data are aware of the database schema. This makes it easy for you to access and manipulate data. To replace the default rendering of the GridView and FormView controls, you should manually provide the code for the rendering on each page. Field templates provide a simpler way to globally change the default rendering of the GridView and FormView controls. Dynamic Data uses default field templates to create default rendering for displaying and editing data. The following are the default field templates that are added to a Dynamic Data Web site. Template
Description
Boolean.ascx
This field template displays a field of a Boolean data type. It is rendered as a CheckBox control.
Boolean_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit a field of a Boolean data type. It is rendered as a CheckBox control.
Children.ascx
Use this field template to display a field that has a one-to-many relationship, and redirect the user to the relationship page. It is rendered as a HyperLink control.
Children_Insert.ascx
This field template prevents navigation to a page that displays child items while a parent item is being created.
DateTime.ascx
Use this field template to display DateTime data type as literal text.
DateTime_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit DateTime data in a TextBox control. However, if the field in the entity disallows null values, or if the field is required, this template also renders a RequiredFieldValidator control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Template
Description
Decimal_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit decimal values in a TextBox control. The template also renders a CompareValidator control that verifies conversion to the Decimal data type. If the field in the entity disallows null values, or if the field is required, this template also renders a RequiredFieldValidator control. If the field has a range attribute, the template also renders a RangeValidator control.
EmailAddress.ascx
Use this field template to display an email address that is rendered as a hyperlink.
Enumeration.ascx
Use this field template to display enumeration values using a Literal control.
Enumeration_Edit.ascx
This field template allows users to select from a list of enumeration values by using a DropDownList control.
ForeignKey.ascx
Use this field template to display a field that has a many-to-one relationship, and to redirect the user to the relationship page. The field template renders as a HyperLink control.
ForeignKey_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit a field that has a many-to-one relationship, and to render a DropDownList control that enables users to select foreign keys that are exposed by the data model.
Integer_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit integer values in a TextBox control. The template also renders a CompareValidator control that verifies conversion to an integer. If the field in the entity disallows null values, or if the field is required, this template also renders a RequiredFieldValidator control. If the field has a range attribute, the template also renders a RangeValidator control.
ManyToMany.ascx
Use this field template to display and edit many-to-many data fields (ADO Entity Data Models only).
ManyToMany_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit database fields that have a many-to-many relation with another table.
MultilineText_Edit.ascx
Use this template to edit database fields that are marked as text blocks—such as TEXT, NTEXT, VARCHAR(MAX), NVARCHAR(MAX) data types in Microsoft SQL Server®—in a TextBox control, if the TextMode property is set to MultiLine. If the field in the entity disallows null values, or if the field is required, this template also renders a RequiredFieldValidator control. If a RegularExpression attribute is added to the data model, the template also renders a RegularExpressionValidator control.
Text.ascx
Use this field template to display fields of type String, Decimal, Double, and integer types as literal text.
Text_Edit.ascx
Use this field template to edit text values in a TextBox control, if the TextMode property is set to SingleLine. If the field in the entity disallows null values, or if the field is required, this template also renders a RequiredFieldValidator control. If the field in the database has a length associated with it, the MaxLength property of the TextBox control is set accordingly.
Url.ascx
Use this field template to display a URL that is rendered as a hyperlink.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-21
ASP.NET Dynamic Data Routing
Key Points Dynamic Data uses ASP.NET routing to match and handle URL requests. The routes are defined in the global application file. Scaffolding infers the view and the entity that a user wants to view, from the URL requested. The benefit of using the routing mechanism is that the URL requested does not have to match the physical path in the application, but it can allow both physical files and dynamically-generated pages. You can modify the URL routing to use any page template as the default page for a specific operation, or to use different page templates for different purposes. You can customize the routes to specify different page templates. You can also customize them to display different URLs, remove the file extension (aspx), or pass parameters by using routes, instead of query string values. The following code—which is part of the default Global.asax file—specifies the default route to use, where a template is specified for each action on any table in the data model. [Visual Basic] routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") With { .Constraints = New RouteValueDictionary(New With {.Action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert"}), .Model = DefaultModel}) [Visual C#] routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") { Constraints = new RouteValueDictionary(new { action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert" }), Model = DefaultModel });
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
The following code examples—which are part of the default Global.asax file that is commented out by default—specifies the routes to use only one page template for all operations. [Visual Basic] routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("{table}/ListDetails.aspx") With { .Action = PageAction.List, .ViewName = "ListDetails", .Model = DefaultModel}) routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("{table}/ListDetails.aspx") With { .Action = PageAction.Details, .ViewName = "ListDetails", .Model = DefaultModel}) [Visual C#] routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("{table}/ListDetails.aspx") { Action = PageAction.List, ViewName = "ListDetails", Model = DefaultModel }); routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("{table}/ListDetails.aspx") { Action = PageAction.Details, ViewName = "ListDetails", Model = DefaultModel });
The first route enables all actions in the page for a given table by using the ListDetails page template. The second route enables a page to navigate to the details of a record—such as navigating to a relationship table when you have a foreign key field. The routes are analyzed in the order they appear in the code. You need to first define the specific routes, and then define the generic ones, just as you declare the exception type order when you wrap code in a Try/try statement. You can specify specific routes for specific tables, by specifying a page template that is different from the one used by the rest of the tables. The following examples show how to specify a different page template for the Customers table of the CustomerManagement database, and then define a generic page template for the other tables of the database. [Visual Basic] routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("Customers/{action}.aspx") With { .ViewName = "ListDetails", .Table = "Customers", .Model = model}) routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") With { .Constraints = New RouteValueDictionary( New With {.Action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert"}), .Model = model}) [Visual C#] routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("Customers/{action}.aspx") { ViewName = "ListDetails", Table = "Customers", Model = model });
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-23
routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") { Constraints = new RouteValueDictionary( new { action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert" }), Model = model });
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 2
Applying ASP.NET Dynamic Data
You can use the ASP.NET Dynamic Data framework in a Web site in various ways. You can create a new Web site based on the ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web Site template in Visual Studio, or you can add Dynamic Data features to an existing Web site. However, the possibilities do not stop there, because you can customize or create new page templates and field templates to suit your needs. In this lesson, you will learn about applying the ASP.NET Dynamic Data Framework to a new Web site and to an existing Web site. You will also learn how to customize a field template, and how to add dynamic behavior to a data-bound control.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Explain how to create an ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site.
•
Add ASP.NET Dynamic Data to an existing Web site.
•
Add dynamic behavior to ASP.NET data-bound controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-25
Demonstration: How to Create an ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web Site
Key Points Dynamic Data enables you to create a data-driven Web site with minimal or no code. An important feature of Dynamic Data is the scaffolding mechanism. When you enable the scaffolding mechanism in a Dynamic Data Web site, ASP.NET analyzes your data model and dynamically generates Web pages for each table. These auto-generated Web pages provide display, insert, delete, and edit capabilities for each table. Because Dynamic Data allows you to create a data-driven Web site with minimal or no code, it can be used whenever you need to manage data from a database, by using a Web-based UI. 1.
2.
3.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
In the User Account Control dialog box, in the text box, type Pa$$w0rd, and then click Yes.
Create a Web site by using the New Web Site dialog box. •
On the File menu, click New Web Site.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, click ASP.NET Dynamic Data Entities Web Site.
•
In the Web location list, click File System, and in the text box, type either D:\Demofiles\M10\VB\DDWebSite or D:\Demofiles\M10\CS\DDWebSite, and then click OK.
Add an existing SQL Server 2008 Express Edition database to the Web site. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click App_Data, and then click Add Existing Item.
•
In the middle pane of the Add Existing Item – D:\Demofiles\M10 \VB\DDWebSite\ or Add Existing Item – D:\Demofiles\M10\CS \DDWebSite\ dialog box, in the File name box, type D:\Demofiles\M10\AdventureWorksLT2008_Data.mdf, and then click Add.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
4.
Add an ADO.NET Entity Data Model named AdventureWorks.edmx to the Web site. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click D:\...\DDWebSite\, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the middle pane of the Add New Item – D:\Demofiles\M10 \VB\DDWebSite\ or Add New Item – D:\Demofiles\M10\CS \DDWebSite\dialog box, in the middle pane, click ADO.NET Entity Data Model.
•
In the Name box, type AdventureWorks.edmx, and then click Add.
•
In the Microsoft Visual Studio message box, click Yes.
Note: Point out that in a Web site, code files that are not directly related to a Web Form or user control must be placed in the App_Code folder. •
In the Entity data Model Wizard, click Generate from database, and then click Next.
•
In the Entity data Model Wizard, on the Choose Your Data Connection page, in the Which data connection should your application use to connect to the database? list, click AdventureWorksLT2008_Data.mdf, and then click Next.
•
In the Entity data Model Wizard, on the Choose Your Database Objects page, in the Which database objects do you want to include in your model? pane, expand Tables, select Tables, remove the selection from BuildVersion, click Pluralize or singularize generated object names, and then click Finish.
Note: Point out that each table is represented as an entity that is named as the corresponding database table, but in singular. 5.
6.
Save and close AdventureWorks.edmx. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Save App_Code /AdventureWorks.edmx.
•
In the App_Code/AdventureWorks.edmx window, click the Close button.
Open the Global.asax file, and add context registration to the RegisterRoutes procedure. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT20 08_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksLT200 8_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
•
In Solution Explorer, right-click Global.asax, and then click Open.
•
In the Global.asax window, add the following code at the top of to the RegisterRoutes procedure. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorks LT2008_DataEntities), New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True})
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-27
[Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(AdventureWorksLT2008_DataModel.AdventureWorksL T2008_DataEntities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
Note: Point out that this will register the Entity Data model object context for use by the Dynamic Data field, and enable the automatic scaffolding of the data model. 7.
8.
Save and close the Global.asax file. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Save Global.asax.
•
In the Global.asax window, click the Close button.
Build and run the Web site. •
On the Debug menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Start Without Debugging.
Note: The page that displays in the browser displays a list of the tables that you added to the data model. 9.
Test the Web site for the Dynamic Data functionality, and view some of the pages by using the pager control. •
In the Dynamic Data Site – Windows Internet Explorer window, click Customers.
Note: The page displays the List view that contains the data from the Customers table. •
In the Page box, type 20, and then press ENTER.
•
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, click Delete for a specific customer.
•
In the Message from webpage message box, click Cancel.
•
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, to the left of a customer, click Details.
Note: The page displays the Details view, which contains the data for the row selected from the Customers table. •
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, click Show all items.
•
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, click FirstName.
•
In the Customers - Windows Internet Explorer window, in the second row from the top, under CustomerAddresses, click View CustomerAddresses.
Note: The page displays the List view, which contains the customer address data. •
In the Customer list, click All.
•
In the CustomerAddresses - Windows Internet Explorer window, at the end of the page, click Insert new item to create a new customer.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
In the CustomerAddresses - Windows Internet Explorer window, at the end of the page, click Insert, view the smart validation that has been added to the required fields, and then click Cancel.
Note: The page displays the List view, which contains the data from the CustomerAddresses table. This is the default view, and the one you are returned to, after cancelling. •
In the CustomerAddresses - Windows Internet Explorer window, at the end of the page, click Edit to modify a customer address.
Note: The page displays the Edit view, which contains the data for the CustomerAddresses table’s selected row. •
In the CustomerAddresses - Windows Internet Explorer window, at the end of the page, click Cancel to cancel the edit operation.
•
In the CustomerAddresses - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
•
In the DDWebSite - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
Question: What is the use of the AdventureWorks.edmx file?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-29
Adding ASP.NET Dynamic Data to an Existing Web Site
Key Points When you create new Web sites and Web applications based on the corresponding Visual Studio 2010 templates, you might also want to add Dynamic Data to an existing Web site. To do this, create a sample Dynamic Data Web site, then, copy the markup and code from the sample Web site to your existing Web site.
Add Dynamic Data Default Files and Folders You can use the default Dynamic Data templates and images, and then copy these to an existing Dynamic Data Web site. To add Dynamic Data default files and folders, you need to perform the following steps: 1.
Add the DynamicData folder and default Dynamic Data content to the Web site by copying the DynamicData folder from the root folder of the sample Web site, to the root folder of the new Web site.
2.
In Solution Explorer, refresh the Web site content to ensure the addition of the DynamicData folder.
Add a Master Page Because the Dynamic Data page templates are content pages, you need to add a master page or modify an existing master page. To add a master page, you need to perform the following steps: 1.
Add a new master page, if necessary.
2.
The Dynamic Data page templates refer to the Site.master master template. You must rename your master page by using this name, or you must modify each page template in the DynamicData\PageTemplates folder, so that they refer to the correct master page.
Add a ScriptManager Control to the Master Page The Dynamic Data page templates uses Ajax controls, including the UpdatePanel control. Therefore, you must add a ScriptManager control to the master page, or modify the existing master page, if necessary. Complete the following steps to add a ScriptManager control to the master page:
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
1.
Open the master page.
2.
If necessary, add a ScriptManager control by dragging it from the Toolbox, or by inserting the following markup.
The name of the ScriptManager control should be set to ScriptManager1, because there is a ScriptManagerProxy control in each of the page templates that refers to this control. Alternatively, you can modify each of the templates to refer to the name that you provide for the ScriptManagerProxy control. 3.
Save and close the master page.
Add a Data Model The Dynamic Data feature is based on data, and currently Visual Studio 2010 supports both the LINQ to SQL data model, and the Entity Framework data model. To use the LINQ to SQL data model, you must add a new LINQ to SQL Classes project item. 1.
Add a new LINQ to SQL Classes project item.
2.
Drag tables from a data connection in Server Explorer, to the Entities pane of the Object Relational Designer.
3.
Save and close the .dbml file.
Add a Global Application Class File Dynamic Data must register the default routes for the various views, and register the data model with the MetaModel at application startup. You need to add a new Global Application class or modify an existing Global Application Class. Complete the following steps to add or modify a Global Application Class. 1.
Add a Global Application Class project item, if necessary.
2.
Import the System.Web.DynamicData namespace in the Global.asax file.
3.
In the Global.asax file, create a public Shared/static procedure named Register, which takes a single parameter named routes, of type RouteCollection, by adding the following code to the Global.asax file. [Visual Basic] Public Shared Sub Register(ByVal routes As RouteCollection) End Sub [Visual C#] public static void Register(RouteCollection routes) { }
4.
In the Global.asax file, in the Application_Start method, call the new Register procedure by passing RouteTable.Routes as the only parameter. [Visual Basic] Register(RouteTable.Routes) [Visual C#] Register(RouteTable.Routes);
5.
In the Global.asax file, at the top of the script block, create and initialize a private, shared/static instance of the System.Web.DynamicData.MetaModel class. [Visual Basic] Private Shared s_defaultModel As New MetaModel
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-31
[Visual C#] private static MetaModel s_defaultModel = new MetaModel();
6.
In the Global.asax file, add a property named DefaultModel, for accessing the private shared/static instance of the System.Web.DynamicData.MetaModel class. [Visual Basic] Public Shared ReadOnly Property DefaultModel() As MetaModel Get Return s_defaultModel End Get End Property [Visual C#] public static MetaModel DefaultModel { get { return s_defaultModel; } }
7.
In the Register procedure, register the DataContext or ObjectContext class with scaffolding disabled for all tables, by using the RegisterContext method of the MetaModel class. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(MyContext), new ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = False}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(MyContext), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = false });
8.
Add an Import directive to the Global Application Class. Add the Import directive after the Application directive, with the Namespace attribute set to System.Web.Routing.
9.
In the Register procedure, add a generic route of type DynamicDataRoute for the List, Details, Edit, and Insert actions in that order. Have the route redirect to the page template of the same name, prefixed in the URL with the table name. Add the route by using the Add method of the passed routes parameter, by appending the following code to the Register procedure. [Visual Basic] routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") With { _ .Constraints = New RouteValueDictionary( _ New With {.Action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert"}), _ .Model = DefaultModel}) [Visual C#] routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") { Constraints = new RouteValueDictionary( new { action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert" }), Model = DefaultModel }); }
10. Save and close the Global Application Class.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Adding Dynamic Behavior to ASP.NET Data-Bound Controls
Key Points ASP.NET Dynamic Data contains some classes that you can use to add dynamic behavior to the ASP.NET 4.0 data-bound controls. These classes, which include DynamicDataManager, DynamicControl, and DynamicField, are grouped in the System.Web.DynamicData namespace. You can add ASP.NET Dynamic Data functionality to a FormView or a GridView control by using the DynamicField field in the designer. A DynamicDataManager control must be present on the Web Form or user control to add DynamicField objects to the data-bound control by using the designer.
To add DynamicField objects to a data-bound control To add DynamicField objects to a data-bound control—such as the FormView or GridView control—by using the Web Form designer, you need to perform the following steps. 1.
Open the Web Form in the Design view.
2.
In the Toolbox, expand the Dynamic Data group, and drag a DynamicDataManager control to the top of the Web Form.
3.
Right-click the data-bound control, and then click Show Smart Tag.
4.
In the Smart Tag panel, click Edit Columns.
5.
In the Fields dialog box, clear the Auto-generate fields check box.
6.
In the Available fields list, click DynamicField, and then click Add.
7.
In the Field properties list, set the DataField property to the name of the data column to which you want to bind the dynamic field.
Note: You need to repeat steps 6 and 7 for each data field that you want to display.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-33
You can also use the DynamicControl control in a TemplateField field of a FormView or a GridView control by following the same procedure that you use to create ASP.NET Dynamic Data in template-based data-bound controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson 3
Customizing ASP.NET Dynamic Data Applications
While the ASP.NET Dynamic Data framework provides several built-in page templates and field templates, you might want to customize the views, the field controls, or the scaffolding. For example, you may want to create field templates that render a UI for displaying and editing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses into a certain format. In this lesson, you will learn how to customize or create new page templates, customize or create new field templates, and customize the scaffolding and routing of an ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Create a Dynamic Data page template.
•
Explain how to create a Dynamic Data field template.
•
Customize Dynamic Data scaffolding.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-35
Creating a Dynamic Data Page Template
Key Points Dynamic Data enables you to customize the templates by customizing the built-in page templates, and by customizing the layout for a particular table. The Dynamic Data page templates in the DynamicData\PageTemplates folder are generic, and are used for all entities in your data model, unless you create a custom page template, or customize the scaffolding. If you want to customize one or more of the page templates for all entities in your data model, you can modify the page templates in the DynamicData \PageTemplates folder. The page templates are content pages, and designers or developers may need to customize them. The changes that you make in this location affect the appearance and behavior of the generated pages that are using the scaffolding mechanism across the Web application. You can also choose to add new page templates in this folder, and then modify the scaffolding to use the new template for one or more actions. However, if you want to create a specific view for a single entity in your data model, you can use a custom page template. To customize the layout for an individual entity by using a custom page template, you need to perform the following steps: 1.
Open your ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site in Visual Studio 2010.
2.
In Solution Explorer, expand the DynamicData folder, and create a subfolder in the CustomPages folder.
3.
Name the new folder the same as the entity in your data context, but use a plural ending as the folder name for the Order entity—for example, Orders.
4.
Create a new content page from scratch, or simply copy an existing page template from the DynamicData\PageTemplates folder to the new subfolder.
5.
Customize the page template as you see fit, and save your changes.
6.
Test your application and the new page template by performing the action registered with the view or page template.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Note: If the subfolder name for a custom page template does not match an entity name plus the plural ending, Dynamic Data cannot locate the page templates, and will use the generic one in the DynamicData\PageTemplates folder instead.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-37
Demonstration: How to Create a Dynamic Data Field Template
Key Points In this demonstration, you will learn how to create a Dynamic Data field template.
Demonstration Steps To create field templates to render the UI for displaying and editing DateTime data fields, you need to perform the following steps: 1.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
2.
3.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Open the Scaffolding folder from either D:\Demofiles\M10\VB or D:\Demofiles\M10\CS. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Open Web Site.
•
In the Open Web Site dialog box, in the Folder name, type either D:\Demofiles\M10\VB\Scaffolding or D:\Demofiles\M10\CS\Scaffolding, and then click Open.
Add a new Dynamic Data field named DateCalendar.ascx to the DynamicData\FieldTemplates folder. •
In Solution Explorer, expand DynamicData, right-click FieldTemplates, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the left pane of the Add New Item – D:\Demofiles\M10 \VB\Scaffolding\ or Add New Item – D:\Demofiles\M10\CS \Scaffolding\ dialog box, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, click Dynamic Data Field, in the Name box, type DateCalendar.ascx, and then click Add.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Note: The code must be placed in a code-behind file. Note: Notice that the two dynamic data field templates named DateCalendar.ascx and DateCalendar_Edit.ascx are created. The DateCalendar.ascx user control renders the UI for displaying the DateTime data fields, while the DateCalendar_Edit.ascx user control renders the UI for editing the DateTime data fields. 4.
In the DateCalendar.ascx user control, remove the Text attribute of the Literal control with the value FieldValueString. •
5.
6.
In the DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx window, delete the Text attribute value FieldValueString.
Save and close the DateCalendar.ascx user control file. •
In the Scaffolding – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click Save DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx.
•
In the DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx window, click the Close button.
Open either the DateCalendar.ascx.vb or DateCalendar.ascx.cs code-behind file. •
7.
In Solution Explorer, expand DateCalendar.ascx, right-click either DateCalendar.ascx.vb or DateCalendar.ascx.cs, and then click Open.
Use the following code to override the user control OnDataBinding method to format the display of the DateTime value by excluding the time.
Note: The value of the field is available in the FieldValue property. [Visual Basic] Protected Overloads Overrides Sub OnDataBinding(ByVal e As EventArgs) MyBase.OnDataBinding(e) Dim shortDate As String = String.Empty If FieldValue IsNot Nothing Then Dim dt As DateTime = Format(CType(FieldValue, DateTime), "d") shortDate = dt.ToShortDateString() End If Literal1.Text = shortDate End Sub [Visual C#] protected override void OnDataBinding(EventArgs e) { base.OnDataBinding(e); string shortDate = string.Empty; if (FieldValue != null) { DateTime dt = (DateTime) FieldValue; shortDate = dt.ToShortDateString(); } }
Literal1.Text = shortDate;
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
•
10-39
In either the DateCalendar.ascx.vb or DateCalendar.ascx.cs window, add the following code in the DynamicData_FieldTemplates_DateCalendar class. [Visual Basic] Protected Overloads Overrides Sub OnDataBinding(ByVal e As EventArgs) MyBase.OnDataBinding(e) Dim shortDate As String = String.Empty If FieldValue IsNot Nothing Then Dim dt As DateTime = Format(CType(FieldValue, DateTime), "d") shortDate = dt.ToShortDateString() End If Literal1.Text = shortDate End Sub [Visual C#] protected override void OnDataBinding(EventArgs e) { base.OnDataBinding(e); string shortDate = string.Empty; if (FieldValue != null) { DateTime dt = (DateTime) FieldValue; shortDate = dt.ToShortDateString(); } }
8.
9.
Literal1.Text = shortDate;
Save and close the DateCalendar.ascx.vb or DateCalendar.ascx.cs code-behind file. •
In the Scaffolding – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click either Save DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx.vb or Save DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx.cs.
•
In the DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx.vb or DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar.ascx.cs window, click the Close button.
Open the DateCalendar_Edit.ascx user control, and ensure that the AutoEventWireup is set to true. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click DateCalendar_Edit.ascx, and then click Open.
•
In the DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx window, in the Control directive, ensure that the AutoEventWireup attribute is set to true, by placing the cursor inside the Control directive, and viewing the Properties Window in Visual Studio 2010.
10. Replace the FieldValueEditString expression of the Text attribute with the custom GetDateString method. •
In the DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx window, change the FieldValueEditString value of the Text attribute in the Textbox control, with the value GetDateString.
11. Append the following markup to the DateCalendar_Edit.ascx user control, to define the Calendar control that renders the UI to enable another way of editing dates. [Visual Basic] [Visual C#]
•
In the DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx window, append the following markup. [Visual Basic] [Visual C#]
12. Save and close DateCalendar_Edit.ascx user control. •
In the Scaffolding – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click Save DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.
•
In the DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar_Edit.ascx window, click the Close button.
13. Open either the DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.vb or DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.cs code-behind file. Add a GetDateString method. In the method, process the user's input as it is entered, by using the TextBox control. The method formats the date by using a short date format that excludes the time by using the following code. [Visual Basic] Protected Function GetDateString() As String If FieldValue Nothing Then Dim dt As DateTime = Format(CType(FieldValue, DateTime), "d") Else
Return dt.ToShortDateString()
Return String.Empty End If End Function [Visual C#] protected string GetDateString() { if (FieldValue != null) { DateTime dt = (DateTime)FieldValue; } else }
•
return dt.ToShortDateString(); return string.Empty;
In either the DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx.vb or DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx.cs window, append the following code in the DynamicData_FieldTemplates_DateCalendar class.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-41
[Visual Basic] Protected Function GetDateString() As String If FieldValue Nothing Then Dim dt As DateTime = Format(CType(FieldValue, DateTime), "d") Else
Return dt.ToShortDateString()
Return String.Empty End If End Function [Visual C#] protected string GetDateString() { if (FieldValue != null) { DateTime dt = (DateTime)FieldValue; } else }
return dt.ToShortDateString(); return string.Empty;
14. Add a handler for the SelectionChanged event of the Calendar control. In the handler, set the Text property of the TextBox control to a formatted version of the selected date from the calendar. Note: This displays the current selection of the user in the text box by using the following code: [Visual Basic] Protected Sub Calendar1_SelectionChanged(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As EventArgs) ' Display value using the short date format. TextBox1.Text = Calendar1.SelectedDate.ToString("d") End Sub [Visual C#] protected void Calendar1_SelectionChanged(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Display value using the short date format. TextBox1.Text = Calendar1.SelectedDate.ToString("d"); }
•
In either the DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx.vb or DynamicData/Field...Calendar_Edit.ascx.cs window, append the following code in the DynamicData_FieldTemplates_DateCalendar class. [Visual Basic] Protected Sub Calendar1_SelectionChanged(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As EventArgs) ' Display value using the short date format. TextBox1.Text = Calendar1.SelectedDate.ToString("d") End Sub [Visual C#] protected void Calendar1_SelectionChanged(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Display value using the short date format. TextBox1.Text = Calendar1.SelectedDate.ToString("d"); }
15. Save and close the DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.vb or DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.cs code-behind file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
In the Scaffolding – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click either Save DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.vb or Save DynamicData/FieldTemplates/DateCalendar_Edit.ascx.cs.
•
In the Scaffolding – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click the Close button.
You have now created the field templates that render the UI for displaying and editing DateTime data field types. The field templates instruct Dynamic Data to apply the appropriate formatting and validation. If validation fails, the field templates generate appropriate error messages.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-43
Customizing Dynamic Data Scaffolding
Key Points Dynamic Data scaffolding increases the power and functionality of the existing ASP.NET page framework by dynamically displaying pages that are based on the data model, but without the need for a physical page. This is because Dynamic Data uses URL routing to match and handle requests. The scaffolding mechanism infers the view and the table that a user wants to view from the URL requested. The benefit of using the routing mechanism is that the URL requested does not have to match the physical path in the application. By default, the scaffolding mechanism is turned off, but you can use the following methods to enable the scaffolding: •
Enabling as part of the data context registration
•
By using the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute
•
By using the ScaffoldColumnAttribute attribute
You must register the data context that will use the Dynamic Data features, even if you do not plan to use the scaffolding mechanism. This registration is made in the Global.asax file by using the RegisterContext method, which accepts a ContextConfiguration object as a parameter. To enable the scaffolding mechanism while registering the data context, you need to set the ScaffoldAllTables property of the ContextConfiguration object to true. This will enable the scaffolding mechanism for the whole data model. In other words, it will expose all the tables in the data model for display, edit, insert, and delete capabilities. If you want to hide some tables from the scaffolding mechanism, you can use the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute. The following code examples show how you can enable the scaffolding mechanism for all the tables in the data model, while registering the MyContext data context. [Visual Basic] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(GetType(MyContext), _
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
New ContextConfiguration() With {.ScaffoldAllTables = True}) [Visual C#] DefaultModel.RegisterContext(typeof(MyContext), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
If you want more control on the tables that are exposed, you can use the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute to enable or disable the scaffolding mechanism for a given table. Instead of exposing the entire data model and hiding the tables that do not have to be exposed, you can expose only the tables that are required by the application. To apply the ScaffoldTableAttribute attribute, you must create a partial class that has the same name of the entity class in the data model, and then apply the attribute to the partial class. The following code examples show how you can enable the scaffolding mechanism for an individual table. [Visual Basic] Imports System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations Partial Public Class Order End Class [Visual C#] using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations; [ScaffoldTable(true)] public partial class Order { }
If you want more control on the data fields that are exposed, you can use the ScaffoldColumnAttribute attribute to enable or disable the scaffolding mechanism for a given data field. The following are some of the rules that apply to the column or field scaffolding: •
By default, not all data fields are displayed by Dynamic Data.
•
If a UIHintAttribute attribute is applied to a data field, the data field displays. This rule overrides any other rules that follow.
•
If a data field is a foreign-key field, the data field does not display. This occurs because Dynamic Data handles foreign key fields in a different manner, and will not display the foreign key field value.
•
If the data field is automatically generated in the database, the data field does not display, because this type of field may not contain relevant information. Ensure that you apply the UIHintAttribute attribute to the data field, if the data field must be displayed.
•
If the value of the IsCustomProperty property is set to true, the data field does not display.
To apply the ScaffoldColumnAttribute attribute, you must create an associated metadata class where you can apply the ScaffoldColumnAttribute attribute to the data field. You must also create a partial class that has the same name of the entity class in the data model. Then, you must associate these two classes by applying the MetadataTypeAttribute attribute to the partial class. The following code examples show how to hide specific data fields, ID and Addresses, from the scaffolding mechanism.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-45
[Visual Basic] Imports System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations Partial Public Class Customer End Class Public Class CustomerMetadata Public ID As Object Public Address As Object End Class [Visual C#] using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations; [MetadataType(typeof(CustomerMetadata))] public partial class Customer { } public class CustomerMetadata { [ScaffoldColumn(false)] public object ID;
}
[ScaffoldColumn(false)] public object Address;
Customizing the Routes Dynamic Data uses ASP.NET routing to match and handle URL requests. The routes are defined in the Global.asax file. By default, Dynamic Data uses a different page template for each operation, such as display, select, edit, or insert. You can customize the routes to display different URLs, but you can also use them to specify different page templates, remove the file extension from the URL, or even pass parameters by using routes, instead of query string values.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab: Managing Data by Using ASP.NET Dynamic Data
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab by using either Visual Basic or Visual C# programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab document. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab document.
Introduction In this lab, you will add Dynamic Data to an existing Web site, and then register LINQ to Entities by using Dynamic Data. In addition, you will add metadata to the data model, and test the Dynamic Data functionality in the Web site.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Add dynamic data to an existing Web site.
•
Register Entity Framework with Dynamic Data.
•
Test the Dynamic Data functionality.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: •
User name: Student
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-47
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization uses Microsoft .NET applications to create, customize, and manage its customer information. The sales team of the organization wants to use the ASP.NET application to display and modify data contained in the CustomerManagement database. In addition, the sales team wants to add new records in the database by using Web Forms. To facilitate this, you need to add dynamic data to the Web site, and register the existing LINQ to Entities ObjectContext by using dynamic data.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Adding Dynamic Data to an Existing Web Site The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Create a sample dynamic data Web site.
3.
Add the dynamic data default files and folders.
4.
Add the ScriptManager control to the master page.
5.
Update dynamic data page templates to use an existing master page.
6.
Copy dynamic data styles.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\VB folder.
Task 2: Create a sample dynamic data Web site •
Open a second instance of Visual Studio 2010.
•
Create a new ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site in the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\VB\SampleDDWebSite folder.
•
Close the second instance of Visual Studio 2010.
Task 3: Add the dynamic data default files and folders •
Add the DynamicData folder and default dynamic data content from the SampleDDWebSite Web site to the CustomerManagement Web site by copying the DynamicData folder from the path, D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10 \VB\SampleDDWebSite\DynamicData.
•
In Solution Explorer, refresh the Web site content to ensure the addition of the DynamicData folder.
Task 4: Add the ScriptManager control to the master page •
Open the Site.master master page in Source view.
•
Add a ScriptManager control before the div element with a value of content for the class attribute by adding an asp:ScriptManager element with an ID attribute value of MainScriptManager.
•
Save the Site.master master page.
•
Close the Site.master master page.
Task 5: Update dynamic data page templates to use an existing master page •
Open the Find and Replace dialog box.
•
Replace the ContentPlaceHolder1 name that is referenced in the Dynamic Data Page Templates, with the name of the ContentPlaceHolder control that is used in the existing master page, MainContentPlaceHolder.
•
In all of the opened and modified Dynamic Data page templates—Details.aspx, Edit.aspx, Insert.aspx, List.aspx, and ListDetails.aspx—remove the Content control with an ID attribute value of headContent.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
•
10-49
Save and close all modified files.
Task 6: Copy dynamic data styles •
Copy the content of the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\VB \SampleDDWebSite\Site.css stylesheet.
•
Add the copied content to the existing Styles\Site.css stylesheet.
•
Save and close the Site.css file.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added dynamic data to an existing Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Registering Entity Framework with Dynamic Data The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a Global Application Class file.
2.
Import the required namespaces.
3.
Get Entity Model namespace.
4.
Register the ObjectContext with the metadata model.
5.
Add a generic route to the routing table.
Task 1: Add a Global Application Class file •
Add Global Application Class project item to the CustomerManagement Web site.
Task 2: Import the required namespaces •
Add an Import directive to the Global Application Class with the Namespace attribute set to System.Web.Routing.
Task 3: Get Entity Model namespace •
Open the CustomerManagement Entity Model CustomerManagement.edmx that is located in the App_Code folder, in the ADO.NET Entity Data Model Designer (Entity Designer).
•
Notice the namespace that is used for the code that is generated for the entity model.
•
Close the CustomerManagement Entity Model.
Task 4: Register the ObjectContext with the metadata model •
Create a public Shared procedure named Register, which takes a single parameter named routes, of type RouteCollection.
Note: The Register procedure does not return a value. Public Shared Sub Register(ByVal routes As RouteCollection) End Sub
•
In the Global.asax file, in the Application_Start method, call the Register procedure by passing RouteTable.Routes as the only parameter. Register(RouteTable.Routes)
•
Add and initialize a new private shared variable of type MetaModel, named defaultModel. Initialize by using the default and parameterless constructor. Private Shared defaultModel As New MetaModel()
•
Add a new public shared property of type MetaModel, named DefaultMetaModel. Make the property read-only and have it return the private and shared variable, defaultModel. Public Shared ReadOnly Property DefaultMetaModel As MetaModel Get Return defaultModel End Get End Property
•
Register the CustomerManagementModel.Entities ObjectContext in the Register procedure with scaffolding enabled for all tables by using the RegisterContext method of the MetaModel class.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-51
DefaultMetaModel.RegisterContext(GetType(CustomerManagementModel.Entities), New ContextConfiguration() With })
.ScaffoldAllTables = True
Task 5: Add a generic route to the routing table •
In the Register procedure, add a generic route of type DynamicDataRoute for the List, Details, Edit, and Insert actions, in that order. Use the DefaultMetaModel as the meta model to redirect to the page template of the same name, which is prefixed in the URL with the table name. Add the route by using the Add method of the passed routes parameter. routes.Add(New DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") With { .Constraints = New RouteValueDictionary(New With {.Action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert"}), .Model = DefaultMetaModel })
•
Save the Global Application Class project item.
•
Close the Global Application Class project item.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have registered Entity Framework with Dynamic Data.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Map, Clean, and Test the Solution The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Map navigation to Dynamic Data page templates.
2.
Remove superfluous solution and project items.
3.
Test the Dynamic Data functionality.
Task 1: Map navigation to Dynamic Data page templates •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Map the New menu command in the Customers menu to the Insert page template, by modifying the url attribute for the New siteMapNode within the Customers siteMapNode, to a value of ~/Customers/Insert.aspx.
•
Map the All menu command in the Customers menu to the List page template, by modifying the url attribute for the All siteMapNode within the Customers siteMapNode, to a value of ~/Customers/List.aspx.
•
Add a New menu command to the Countries menu to make it use the Insert page template, by adding a new siteMapNode within the Countries siteMapNode.
•
Add an All menu command to the Countries menu to make it use the List page template, by adding a new siteMapNode within the Countries siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
Task 2: Remove superfluous solution and project items •
Remove the CustomerManagementEntities project from the CustomerManagement solution.
•
Delete the Customers Web Form in the CustomerManagement Web site.
•
Delete the InsertCustomer Web Form in the CustomerManagement Web site.
•
Delete the Customer user control in the CustomerManagement Web site.
Task 3: Test the Dynamic Data functionality •
Run the CustomerManagement application.
•
Show all customers, by clicking All, on the Customers menu.
•
Close all open windows.
Task 4: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-53
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Adding Dynamic Data to an Existing Web Site The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Create a sample Dynamic Data Web site.
3.
Add the dynamic data default files and folders.
4.
Add the ScriptManager control to the master page.
5.
Update Dynamic Data page templates to use an existing master page.
6.
Copy dynamic data styles.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\CS folder.
Task 2: Create a sample Dynamic Data Web site •
Open a second instance of Visual Studio 2010.
•
Create a new ASP.NET Dynamic Data Web site in the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\CS\SampleDDWebSite folder.
•
Close the second instance of Visual Studio 2010.
Task 3: Add the dynamic data default files and folders •
Add the DynamicData folder and default dynamic data content from the SampleDDWebSite Web site to the CustomerManagement Web site by copying the DynamicData folder from the path, D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\CS\SampleDDWebSite\DynamicData.
•
In Solution Explorer, refresh the Web site content to ensure the addition of the DynamicData folder.
Task 4: Add the ScriptManager control to the master page •
Open the Site.master master page in Source view.
•
Add a ScriptManager control before the div element with a value of content for the class attribute by adding an asp:ScriptManager element with an ID attribute value of MainScriptManager.
•
Save the Site.master master page.
•
Close the Site.master master page.
Task 5: Update the Dynamic Data page templates to use an existing master page •
Open the Find and Replace dialog box.
•
Replace the ContentPlaceHolder1 name that is referenced in the Dynamic Data Page Templates, with the name of the ContentPlaceHolder control used in the existing master page, MainContentPlaceHolder.
•
In all of the opened and modified Dynamic Data page templates—Details.aspx, Edit.aspx, Insert.aspx, List.aspx, and ListDetails.aspx—remove the Content control with an ID attribute value of headContent.
•
Save and close all modified files.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-54
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Task 6: Copy dynamic data styles •
Copy the content of the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M10\CS \SampleDDWebSite\Site.css stylesheet.
•
Add the copied content to the existing Styles\Site.css stylesheet.
•
Save and close the Site.css file.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added dynamic data to an existing Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-55
Exercise 2: Registering Entity Framework with Dynamic Data The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a Global Application Class file.
2.
Import the required namespaces.
3.
Get Entity Model namespace.
4.
Register the ObjectContext with the metadata model.
5.
Add a generic route to the routing table.
Task 1: Add a Global Application Class file •
Add Global Application Class project item to the CustomerManagement Web site.
Task 2: Import the required namespaces •
Add an Import directive to the Global Application Class with the Namespace attribute set to System.Web.Routing.
Task 3: Get Entity Model namespace •
Open the CustomerManagement Entity Model CustomerManagement.edmx that is located in the App_Code folder, in the ADO.NET Entity Data Model Designer (Entity Designer).
•
Notice the namespace that is used for the code that is generated for the entity model.
•
Close the CustomerManagement Entity Model.
Task 4: Register the ObjectContext with the metadata model •
Create a public static procedure named Register, which takes a single parameter named routes, of type RouteCollection.
Note: The Register procedure does not return a value. public static void Register(RouteCollection routes) { }
•
In the Global.asax file, in the Application_Start method, call the Register procedure by passing RouteTable.Routes as the only parameter. Register(RouteTable.Routes);
•
Add and initialize a new private static variable of type MetaModel, named defaultModel. Initialize by using the default and parameterless constructor. private static MetaModel defaultModel = new MetaModel();
•
Add a new public static property of type MetaModel, named DefaultMetaModel. Make the property read-only, and have it return the private and static variable, defaultModel. public static MetaModel DefaultMetaModel { get { return defaultModel; } }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-56
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Register the CustomerManagementModel.Entities ObjectContext in the Register procedure with scaffolding enabled for all tables by using the RegisterContext method of the MetaModel class. DefaultMetaModel.RegisterContext(typeof(CustomerManagementModel.Entities), new ContextConfiguration() { ScaffoldAllTables = true });
Task 5: Add a generic route to the routing table •
In the Register procedure, add a generic route of type DynamicDataRoute, for the List, Details, Edit, and Insert actions, in that order. Use the DefaultMetaModel as the meta model to redirect to the page template of the same name, which is prefixed in the URL with the table name. Add the route by using the Add method of the passed routes parameter. routes.Add(new DynamicDataRoute("{table}/{action}.aspx") { Constraints = new RouteValueDictionary(new { action = "List|Details|Edit|Insert" }), Model = DefaultMetaModel });
•
Save the Global Application Class project item.
•
Close the Global Application Class project item.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have registered Entity Framework with Dynamic Data.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-57
Exercise 3: Map, Clean, and Test the Solution The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Map navigation to Dynamic Data page templates.
2.
Remove superfluous solution and project items.
3.
Test the Dynamic Data functionality.
Task 1: Map navigation to Dynamic Data page templates •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Map the New menu command in the Customers menu to the Insert page template, by modifying the url attribute for the New siteMapNode within the Customers siteMapNode, to a value of ~/Customers/Insert.aspx.
•
Map the All menu command in the Customers menu to the List page template, by modifying the url attribute for the All siteMapNode within the Customers siteMapNode, to a value of ~/Customers/List.aspx.
•
Add a New menu command to the Countries menu to make it use the Insert page template, by adding a new siteMapNode within the Countries siteMapNode.
•
Add an All menu command to the Countries menu to make it use the List page template, by adding a new siteMapNode within the Countries siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
Task 2: Remove superfluous solution and project items •
Remove the CustomerManagementEntities project from the CustomerManagement solution.
•
Delete the Customers Web Form in the CustomerManagement Web site.
•
Delete the InsertCustomer Web Form in the CustomerManagement Web site.
•
Delete the Customer user control in the CustomerManagement Web site.
Task 3: Test the Dynamic Data functionality •
Run the CustomerManagement application.
•
In the Contoso Customer Management – Windows Internet Explorer window, on the Customers menu, click All.
•
Close all open windows.
Task 4: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-58
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
In which file should you add the registration of the context?
2.
What is the use of the ScaffoldColumnAttribute attribute?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Managing Data by Using Microsoft® ASP.NET Dynamic Data
10-59
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What are the capabilities provided by Scaffolding?
2.
What are the features of Dynamic Data?
3.
List the built-in page templates.
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You need to modify the page template for displaying all rows in any registered database entity. What is the easiest way to do this? You should modify the List.aspx page template.
2.
You need to create a specific view for a single entity in your data model. How do you do this? Create a subfolder in the DynamicData\CustomPages folder, and name the subfolder the same as the entity in your data context, but use a plural ending. Create a new content page, and then add it to the subfolder.
Best Practices •
Do not modify the generated DataContext or ObjectContext classes. Instead, create partial classes and place the custom code in partial classes. When the DataContext or ObjectContext classes are regenerated, any changes are overridden.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
10-60
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-1
Module 11 Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application Contents: Lesson 1: Introduction to Ajax
11-3
Lesson 2: Creating an ASP.NET Ajax Application by Using the Ajax Features for ASP.NET
11-9
Lesson 3: Extending an ASP.NET Web Forms Application by Using the Ajax Control Toolkit
11-29
Lab: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-38
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax) is a set of technologies that you can use to make your Web pages more responsive. Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax integrates Ajax features—such as partial-page updates, asynchronous calls made to the Web server, and the use of user interface elements—into ASP.NET Web application development. You can use Ajax to create rich and responsive Web applications that provide a good user experience. This module provides an overview of Ajax, and explains how to create an ASP.NET Web application with Ajax capabilities, by using Microsoft and ASP.NET Ajax. The module also introduces the Ajax Control Toolkit, explains how to install the toolkit, and how to add controls from the toolkit to an ASP.NET Web Forms application.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-3
Lesson 1
Introduction to Ajax
Using Ajax, Web applications can retrieve data from the server asynchronously in the background without affecting the display and behavior of the existing page. You use Microsoft Ajax to either create entirely client-based Ajax applications, or you can use the Ajax features of ASP.NET for implementing Ajax-related functionality. Microsoft Ajax helps you create Web pages that allow partial-page updates to refresh only the areas of a Web page that are updated. Partial page updates and asynchronous calls made to the Web server not only provide a rich user experience that emulates a responsive user interface (UI), but also reduces bandwidth usage and page load times. In this lesson, you will get an overview of both Ajax and Microsoft Ajax, and ASP.NET Ajax technologies. You will also examine the architecture of Microsoft Ajax.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe AJAX.
•
Describe ASP.NET Ajax.
•
Describe the architecture of ASP.NET Ajax.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is Asynchronous JavaScript and XML?
Key Points Ajax is a group of technologies that are designed to increase the responsiveness of Web pages. Using Ajax, you can refresh parts of a page instead of the whole Web page during data exchange with the Web server. This increases the speed and interactivity of the page. Ajax works across multiple platforms and browsers, and uses open standards, such as JavaScript. The asynchronous nature of Ajax helps your application retrieve data from the server as a background task that does not affect the current Web page display. The types of information that can be updated by using Ajax in Web sites include sports score results, counters, timers, clocks, share prices, and news. The information is typically updated at regular intervals, which can be implemented by using a timer.
Ajax Technologies Ajax is not a technology in itself, but a term that refers to the use of a group of technologies. Ajax uses a combination of: •
An XMLHttpRequest object, which you can use for data exchange between the browser and the Web server asynchronously. This object enables browsers to request data without a page reload, and it is one of the key features of Ajax.
•
HTML, XHTML, and cascading style sheets (CSS), which provide the markup and style information for a Web page.
•
XML and other data transfer formats, such as JavaScript Object Notation (JSON), which you can use to transfer data between a Web server and a client.
•
Document Object Model (DOM), which you use with a scripting language such as JavaScript to provide client-side interaction with the data on a Web page.
Question: What are some of the benefits that Ajax provides?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-5
What Is ASP.NET Ajax?
Key Points ASP.NET Ajax enables you to develop Web pages that integrate ASP.NET and Ajax technologies. You can use ASP.NET Ajax to make your Web applications more efficient and responsive. ASP.NET Ajax is a framework for building interactive and responsive Web applications that work across all popular browsers. The ASP.NET Ajax framework includes: •
Server-side ASP.NET Ajax. This is included in ASP.NET 4.0 for building Ajax-enabled ASP.NET Web Forms and server controls. It includes the Ajax Server controls, which enables you to add Ajax functionality to an ASP.NET Web Form.
•
Client-side ASP.NET Ajax. The Microsoft Ajax Library is a JavaScript library that provides the clientside features of the ASP.NET Ajax framework. The Microsoft Ajax Library is released separately from the ASP.NET framework and Microsoft Visual Studio®, but it integrates with Visual Studio 2010 and ASP.NET 4.0.
•
Ajax Control Toolkit. The Ajax Control Toolkit provides a powerful software development kit (SDK) that makes it easy to create and reuse custom controls and extenders. The Control Toolkit includes samples and components that show you some of the experiences that you can create with ASP.NET Ajax controls and extenders. The Ajax Control Toolkit is community-supported.
•
jQuery library. This is a JavaScript function library that focuses on DOM querying and manipulation.
•
Microsoft Ajax Content Delivery Network. The Microsoft Ajax Content Delivery Network (CDN) enables you to easily add Microsoft Ajax Library and jQuery scripts to your Web applications. Using Microsoft Ajax CDN, you can significantly improve the performance of your Ajax applications. The contents of the Microsoft Ajax CDN are cached on servers located around the world.
ASP.NET Ajax helps developers choose the method of Ajax development. The development methods include client-side programming, server-side programming, or a combination of both. ASP.NET Ajax is integrated with Microsoft .NET Framework 4, and enables you to build Web applications that implement Ajax features by using the design tools provided by Visual Studio 2010.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Key Features of ASP.NET Ajax Ajax features in ASP.NET enable you to build rich Web applications that have many advantages over server-based Web applications. Ajax-enabled applications offer: •
Improved efficiency, because significant parts of Web page processing are performed in the browser.
•
Familiar UI elements such as progress indicators, tooltips, calendars, and pop-up windows.
•
Partial-page updates that refresh only the parts of the Web page that have changed.
•
Client integration with ASP.NET application services for security features such as forms authentication, roles, and user profiles.
•
Auto-generated proxy classes that simplify the call to Web service methods from client script.
•
A framework that lets you customize server controls to include client capabilities.
•
Support for the most popular and generally used browsers, including Windows® Internet Explorer®, Mozilla Firefox, and Apple Safari.
•
Data integration by using Web services.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-7
Architecture of ASP.NET Ajax
Key Points ASP.NET Ajax consists of client-script libraries and server components.
Client Architecture The client architecture of ASP.NET Ajax consists of the Microsoft Ajax Library. The client-script libraries contain JavaScript files that provide features that enable you to develop consistent and modular applications. The ASP.NET Ajax client architecture includes the following layers: •
Components. Components enable rich behaviors in the browser, by providing support for features such as behaviors, controls, and non-visual components, without postbacks.
•
Browser compatibility. The browser compatibility layer provides support for multiple browsers—for example, Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, and Apple Safari.
•
Networking. The networking layer handles asynchronous requests, and provides communication with Web and application services, and XML and JSON serialization.
•
Core services. The core services layer provides a JavaScript base class library, and object-oriented extensions that enable you to make use of features such as classes, inheritance, serialization, and event handling.
•
Debugging and Error Handling. Core services include the Sys.Debug class, which provides methods for displaying objects in a readable form at the end of a Web page. The class also shows trace messages, enables you to use assertions, and lets you break into the debugger.
•
Globalization. The Ajax server and client architecture in ASP.NET provides a model for localizing and globalizing client script. This enables you to design applications that use a single code base to provide UI for many languages and cultures.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Server Architecture The server architecture of ASP.NET Ajax consists of ASP.NET server controls and components that you can use to create the UI, and implement the functionality and flow of an application. ASP.NET Ajax includes the following server components: •
Script support. Ajax features in ASP.NET are implemented by using supporting scripts that are sent from the server to the client. Depending on the Ajax features that you enable, different scripts are sent to the browser. You can also create custom client script for your ASP.NET applications. ASP.NET Ajax includes support for debug and release modes; this enables you to test for errors in your code, and then create a release version of the code before you deploy your application. Script support for Ajax in ASP.NET provides partial-page rendering, which updates regions of the page by using an asynchronous postback.
•
Localization. The ASP.NET Ajax architecture builds on the foundation of the ASP.NET localization model, and it provides additional support for localized .js files. ASP.NET can serve localized client scripts and resources automatically, for specific languages and regions.
•
Web services. ASP.NET Ajax enables you to use client script to call ASP.NET Web services and Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) Services.
•
Application services. ASP.NET Ajax enables you to use application services—such as Forms authentication and profiles—without a page postback. Application services in ASP.NET are built-in Web services.
•
Server controls. The Ajax Server controls consist of server and client code that integrate to produce rich client behavior. The most commonly used of these controls are the ScriptManager, UpdatePanel, UpdateProgress, and Timer controls.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-9
Lesson 2
Creating an ASP.NET Ajax Application by Using the Ajax Features for ASP.NET
As a developer, you might spend most of your time on the server-side aspects of ASP.NET Ajax, because ASP.NET Ajax focuses on the client-side technologies interacting with server-side technologies. The Ajax Features for ASP.NET provide server-side controls and functionality that you can use to implement Ajax features in your ASP.NET Web applications. The server-side framework not only manages client requests, but also manages the interaction and exchange of JavaScript objects and the Microsoft .NET objects between the client-side and server-side code. The Ajax Features for ASP.NET work over the core layer of the ASP.NET 4.0 Framework, WCF, and ASP.NET-based Web services. This lesson describes the Ajax Features for ASP.NET, and explains how to use several of the available ASP.NET Ajax server controls.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe the Ajax Features for ASP.NET.
•
Describe the ASP.NET Ajax server controls and their uses.
•
Describe the uses of the ScriptManager control.
•
Explain how to add the ScriptManager control.
•
Describe the uses of the UpdatePanel control.
•
Explain how to add the UpdatePanel control.
•
Describe the UpdateProgress control.
•
Describe partial-page updates.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Are the Ajax Features for ASP.NET?
Key Points Ajax features for ASP.NET contain the core server-side components of ASP.NET Ajax. The Ajax Features extend the server-side control framework of ASP.NET, and provide new controls that you can use to implement Ajax features in your ASP.NET Web applications. These controls appear in a separate tab in the Visual Studio Toolbox.
ASP.NET Ajax Server-Side Programming Developers familiar with the ASP.NET server-side programming model can use the ASP.NET Ajax serverside controls UpdatePanel, UpdateProgress, and ScriptManager to implement Ajax functionality in an ASP.NET Web Forms application without writing any JavaScript. For example, the UpdatePanel control helps you update a portion of an ASP.NET Web Form without requiring you to reload the entire page. The ScriptManager control helps you manage browser history in an Ajax application. You can do this by updating the browser back button after an Ajax request. The ASP.NET Ajax server-side controls are included as a standard part of the ASP.NET 4.0 framework. These controls are available in Visual Studio 2010, or the Visual Web Developer toolbox. In addition, the Ajax Control Toolkit provides many more controls that you can add to your toolbox and include in your pages. You can enhance the server-based features of ASP.NET by including client-script functionality in ASP.NET Web Forms. You can use a client script to provide a rich and responsive user interface to users. You can also use client script to make asynchronous calls to the Web server while a page is running in the browser. Question: What are the ASP.NET Ajax server-side controls that help you add Ajax functionality to an ASP.NET Web Forms application, without the need for any scripting?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-11
ASP.NET Ajax Server Controls
Key Points Ajax features for ASP.NET provides server controls. The following list describes the most frequently used ASP.NET Ajax server controls: •
ScriptManager. The ScriptManager control is used to manage client script for Ajax-enabled ASP.NET Web Forms. By default, the ScriptManager control registers the script for the Ajax Library with the page. This enables a client script to use the type system extensions, and to support features such as partial-page rendering and Web-service calls. You must add a ScriptManager control to a Web page before you can use the UpdatePanel, UpdateProgress, and Timer controls. If you have a ScriptManager control on a master page, you need a ScriptManagerProxy control on a content page if you are using Ajax controls on the content page. In addition, the ScriptManager control enables the Microsoft Ajax Library to be loaded from the Microsoft CDN.
•
UpdatePanel. The UpdatePanel controls help you build client-centric Web applications. With UpdatePanel controls, you can refresh specific parts of the page instead of refreshing the entire page with a postback. This is referred to as performing a partial-page update. An ASP.NET Web Form that contains a ScriptManager control and one or more UpdatePanel controls can automatically participate in partial-page updates, without custom client script. To use an UpdatePanel, you add an instance of the control on a page, and then place other server controls inside the panel.
•
UpdateProgress. The UpdateProgress control provides status information about partial-page updates in UpdatePanel controls. You can customize the default content and the layout of the UpdateProgress control. The UpdateProgress control enables you to provide progress information about partial-page updates. The UpdateProgress control can work with an entire page, or with just a specific UpdatePanel control. When a partial-page update is fast, you can prevent flashing. To do this, you can specify a delay before the UpdateProgress control displays. This way, you can control how long after the update the content of the UpdateProgress control displays.
•
Timer. The ASP.NET Ajax Timer control performs postbacks at defined intervals. You can use the Timer control in conjunction with an UpdatePanel to perform a partial-page update at a defined interval. You can also use the Timer control to post the whole page.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Question: What are some of the scenarios in which you can use the ScriptManager control, the Timer control, the UpdateProgress control, and the UpdatePanel control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-13
Uses of the ScriptManager Control
Key Points When a page contains one or more UpdatePanel controls, the ScriptManager control is used to manage partial-page rendering in the browser. The control interacts with the page life cycle to update the parts of the page that are inside the UpdatePanel controls. The EnablePartialRendering property of the ScriptManager control determines whether a page participates in partial-page updates. By default, the EnablePartialRendering property is true. Therefore, by default, partial-page rendering is enabled when you add a ScriptManager control to the page.
Using Type-System Extensions The Microsoft Ajax Library adds type-system extensions to JavaScript that provide namespaces, inheritance, interfaces, enumerations, reflection, and helper functions for strings and arrays. These extensions provide functionality in client script that is like that of the .NET Framework. They enable you to write Ajax-enabled ASP.NET applications in a structured way that improves maintainability, makes it easier to add features, and makes it easier to layer the functionality. Adding a ScriptManager control to an ASP.NET Web Form automatically includes the type-system extensions, so that you can use the library in client script.
Registering the Custom Script Use the ScriptManager control to manage resources that you have created for controls that participate in partial-page updates. Resources include scripts, styles, hidden fields, and arrays. The Scripts collection of the ScriptManager control contains a ScriptReference object for each script that is available to the browser. You can specify the scripts declaratively or programmatically. The ScriptManager control also exposes registration methods that you can programmatically use to manage client script and hidden fields. When you are registering a script or hidden fields that support partial-page updates, you must call the registration methods of the ScriptManager control. To register scripts that are not needed for partial-page updates, you can use the methods of the ClientScriptManager class. This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Registering the Web Services To register a Web service that you want to call from an Ajax-enabled ASP.NET Web Form, you register the Web service by adding it to the Services collection of the ScriptManager control. The ASP.NET Ajax framework generates a client proxy object for each ServiceReference object in the Services collection. The proxy classes and their strongly-typed members simplify using Web services from client script. You can programmatically add ServiceReference objects to the Services collection to register Web services at run time.
Using Authentication, Profile, and Role Services from Client Script The Microsoft Ajax Library includes proxy classes for calling the ASP.NET 4.0 forms authentication, profile, and role application services directly from JavaScript. If you want to use a custom authentication service, you can register it by using the ScriptManager control.
The ScriptManagerProxy Class Only one instance of the ScriptManager control can be added to a Web page. The Web page can include the control directly or indirectly inside a nested component, such as a user control, content page of a master page, or a nested master page. If the page already contains a ScriptManager control, but a nested or parent component needs additional features of the ScriptManager control, the component can include a ScriptManagerProxy control. Then, the ScriptManagerProxy control enables you to add scripts and services that are specific to nested components. Question: How many ScriptManager controls can you add to a Web page?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-15
Demonstration: How to Add the ScriptManager Control
Key Points In the following demonstration, you will see how to add a ScriptManager control to an ASP.NET Ajaxenabled Web site.
Demonstration Steps 1.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
2.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Create a new ASP.NET Web site. •
In the Start Page – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click New Web Site.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, ensure that ASP.NET Web Site is selected.
•
In the Web location box of the New Web Site dialog box, ensure File System is selected, and then click OK.
Note: You can add the ScriptManager control after you create an ASP.NET Web site. 3.
Add a Web Form named Employees.aspx, to the Web site. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click C:\...\WebSite1\, and then click Add New Item.
Note: In this demonstration, the name of the Web site is WebSite1.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
4.
•
In the Add New Item – C:\Users\student\Documents \Visual Studio 2010\WebSites\WebSite1\ dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, click Web Form.
•
In the Name box, type Employees.aspx, clear the Place code in separate file check box, and then click Add.
Open the Web Form in the Design view. •
5.
Add a ScriptManager control to the Web Form. •
6.
In the AJAX Extensions tab of the toolbox, double-click the ScriptManager control to add it to the page.
Set the ID attribute of the ScriptManager control to a value of EmployeesScriptManager. •
7.
In the Employees.aspx window, click Design.
In the Properties window, in the ID attribute, change the ScriptManager1 to EmployeesScriptManager.
Add an UpdatePanel control under the ScriptManager control. •
In the AJAX Extensions tab of the toolbox, drag the UpdatePanel control under the ScriptManager control.
•
In the Properties window, set the ID property of the UpdatePanel control to a value of EmployeesUpdatePanel.
•
In the WebSite1 – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Close button.
Note: After adding the ScriptManager control, you can add controls that you want asynchronously refreshed to EmployeesUpdatePanel, and set their properties by using the Properties window. You can also add any code to the events of the page and the controls to the code-behind file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-17
Uses of the UpdatePanel Control
Key Points The UpdatePanel controls work by specifying regions of a page that can be updated without refreshing the whole page. The partial-page update process is coordinated by both the ScriptManager server control and the client PageRequestManager class. When you enable partial-page updates, controls can asynchronously post back to the server. Because asynchronous postback is similar to a regular postback, the resulting server page runs the complete page and control life cycle. However, with an asynchronous postback, page updates are limited to regions of the page that are enclosed in UpdatePanel controls, and are marked to be updated. The server sends the HTML markup for only the updated elements to the browser. In the browser, the client PageRequestManager class performs DOM manipulation to replace existing HTML with the updated markup. The UpdatePanel control performs partial-page updates and identifies content that is updated independently of the rest of the page.
Enabling Partial-Page Updates The UpdatePanel control requires a ScriptManager control on the Web page. By default, partial-page updates are enabled because the default value of the EnablePartialRendering property of the ScriptManager control is true. The following example shows markup that defines a ScriptManager control and an UpdatePanel control on a page. The UpdatePanel control contains a Button control that refreshes the content inside the panel when you click it. By default, the ChildrenAsTriggers property is true. Therefore, the Button control acts as an asynchronous postback control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-18
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
UpdatePanel content
Notice that the UpdateMode property is set to Conditional to ensure that the content of the UpdatePanel is only updated when a control inside the UpdatePanel causes a postback. Note: If the UpdateMode property is set to Always, the UpdatePanel control’s content is updated on every postback that originates from anywhere on the page. In general, an UpdatePanel control should not be used to update an entire Web Form, only parts of it.
Specifying UpdatePanel Control Content You can add content to an UpdatePanel control declaratively, or in the designer by using the ContentTemplate property. In the markup, this property is exposed as a ContentTemplate element. To add content programmatically, you can use the ContentTemplateContainer property. In the example, the HTML fieldset and legend elements are used to show how plain HTML elements can be used with server controls in an UpdatePanel control. When a page that contains one or more UpdatePanel controls is first rendered, all the contents of the UpdatePanel controls are rendered and sent to the browser. On subsequent asynchronous postbacks, the content of individual UpdatePanel controls might be updated. Updates depend on the panel settings, on the element that caused the postback, and on code that is specific to each panel.
Specifying UpdatePanel Triggers By default, any postback control inside an UpdatePanel control causes an asynchronous postback and refreshes the content of the panel. However, you can also configure other controls on the page to refresh an UpdatePanel control. You do this by defining a trigger for the UpdatePanel control. A trigger is a binding that specifies the postback control and the event that causes a panel to update. When the specified event of the trigger control is raised—for example, a button's Click event—the update panel is refreshed. The following example shows how to specify a trigger for an UpdatePanel control. [Visual Basic] UpdatePanel content
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-19
[Visual C#] UpdatePanel content
You can define the trigger by using the asp:AsyncPostBackTrigger element inside the Triggers element of the UpdatePanel control. If you are editing the page in Visual Studio, you can create triggers by using the UpdatePanelTrigger Collection Editor dialog box. A trigger's control event is optional. If you do not specify an event, the trigger event is the default event of the control. For example, for the Button control, the default event is the Click event.
How UpdatePanel Controls Are Refreshed The following list describes the property settings of the UpdatePanel control, which determine when a panel's content is updated during partial-page rendering. •
If the UpdateMode property is set to Always, the UpdatePanel control’s content is updated on every postback that originates from anywhere on the page. This includes asynchronous postback from controls that are inside other UpdatePanel controls, and postback from controls that are not inside UpdatePanel controls.
•
If the UpdateMode property is set to Conditional, the UpdatePanel control’s content is updated when one of the following is true: •
When the postback is caused by a trigger for that UpdatePanel control.
•
When you explicitly call the UpdatePanel control's Update method.
•
When the UpdatePanel control is nested inside another UpdatePanel control, and the parent panel is updated.
•
When the ChildrenAsTriggers property is set to true, and any child control of the UpdatePanel control causes a postback. Child controls of nested UpdatePanel controls do not cause an update to the outer UpdatePanel control unless they are explicitly defined as triggers for the parent panel. If the ChildrenAsTriggers property is set to false, and the UpdateMode property is set to Always, an exception is thrown. You should use the ChildrenAsTriggers property only when the UpdateMode property is set to Conditional.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: How to Add the UpdatePanel Control
Key Points In this demonstration, you will see how to add the UpdatePanel control to an ASP.NET Ajax Web page.
Demonstration Steps To run the demonstration, you need to perform the following steps: 1.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
2.
3.
4.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Create a new ASP.NET Web site. •
In the Start Page – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click New Web Site.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, ensure that ASP.NET Web Site is selected.
•
In the Web location box of the New Web Site dialog box, ensure File System is selected, and then click OK.
Add a Web Form named UpdatePanel.aspx, to the Web site. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click C:\Users\student\Documents\Visual Studio 2010\WebSites\WebSite1, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the Add New Item – C:\Users\student\Documents\Visual Studio 2010\WebSites\WebSite1\ dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, click Web Form.
•
In the Name box, type UpdatePanel.aspx, and then click Add.
Open the Web Form in the Design view.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
• 5.
6.
11-21
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, click Design.
Add ScriptManager and UpdatePanel controls in the Design view of the UpdatePanel.aspx Web Form. •
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, point to Toolbox.
•
In Toolbox, under AJAX Extensions, double-click ScriptManager.
•
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, point to Toolbox.
•
In Toolbox, under AJAX Extensions, double-click UpdatePanel.
Add a ContentTemplate element to the UpdatePanel. •
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, click Source.
•
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, place the cursor after the opening tag of the UpdatePanel control, and then type the following code.
7.
8.
On the form, inside the UpdatePanel control, add a Button control to the ContentTemplate. •
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, click Design.
•
In Toolbox, expand Standard, and then drag the Button control inside the UpdatePanel control.
Set the Text property of the Button control to InsidePanel. •
9.
In the Properties window, change the value of the Text property from Button to InsidePanel.
On the form, outside the UpdatePanel control, add another Button control. •
In Toolbox, double-click Button.
10. Set the Text property of the Button control to the value OutsidePanel. •
In the Properties window, change the value of the Text property from Button to OutsidePanel.
11. Save the UpdatePanel.aspx Web Form, and then view the page in the browser. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Save UpdatePanel.aspx.
•
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, right-click anywhere, and then click View in Browser.
•
Test both InsidePanel and OutsidePanel buttons and verify that the button inside the UpdatePanel control does not cause a page postback and the button outside UpdatePanel control causes a postback.
•
In the http://localhost:49158/WebSite1/UpdatePanel.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click InsidePanel, and then click OutsidePanel.
Note: Notice that the button inside the UpdatePanel control does not cause a page postback and the button outside UpdatePanel control causes a page postback. 12. Close Internet Explorer. •
In the http://localhost:49158/WebSite1/UpdatePanel.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
13. Delete the InsidePanel button. •
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, delete the InsidePanel button.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
14. Add a Label control inside the UpdatePanel control. •
In Toolbox, under Standard, double-click Label.
15. Add code to the Click event handler to set the Text of the Label to the string Current Time:, followed by the current date and time. •
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, double-click the OutsidePanel control.
•
In the UpdatePanel.aspx.vb or UpdatePanel.aspx.cs window, type the following code in the Click event handler. [Visual Basic] Label1.Text = "Current Time: " & DateTime.Now.ToString() [Visual C#] Label1.Text = "Current Time: " + DateTime.Now.ToString();
16. Switch to the Design view of the UpdatePanel.aspx Web Form. •
In Visual Studio 2010, click UpdatePanel.aspx.
17. View the properties of the UpdatePanel control. •
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, click the UpdatePanel control.
•
In the Properties window, click the ellipsis of the Triggers property.
18. Add a ControlID property of the new trigger to Button2. •
In the UpdatePanelTrigger Collection Editor dialog box, click Add.
•
In the ControlID property, type Button2, and then click OK.
19. Save the Web site, and then view the UpdatePanel.aspx Web Form in the browser. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Save All.
•
In the UpdatePanel.aspx window, right-click anywhere, and then click View in Browser.
20. Test the OutsidePanel button. •
In the http://localhost:49158/WebSite1/UpdatePanel.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click OutsidePanel two times, and verify that the content in the label changes, but a page refresh does not occur.
21. Close Internet Explorer. •
In the http://localhost:49158/WebSite1/UpdatePanel.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
•
In the WebSite1 – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click Close button.
Question: What should you define in a trigger in the UpdatePanel control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-23
UpdateProgress Control
Key Points The UpdateProgress control renders a div element that is displayed or hidden, depending on whether an associated UpdatePanel control has caused an asynchronous postback. For initial page rendering and for synchronous postback, the UpdateProgress control is not displayed.
Associating with an UpdatePanel Control You can associate an UpdateProgress control with an UpdatePanel control by setting the AssociatedUpdatePanelID property of the UpdateProgress control. When a postback event originates from an UpdatePanel control, any associated UpdateProgress controls are displayed. If you do not associate the UpdateProgress control with a specific UpdatePanel control, the UpdateProgress control displays progress for any asynchronous postback. If the ChildrenAsTriggers property of an UpdatePanel control is set to false, and an asynchronous postback originates from inside that UpdatePanel control, any associated UpdateProgress controls will be displayed. The following examples show an UpdateProgress control that shows update status for two UpdatePanel controls. [Visual Basic] Protected Sub Button_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(3000) End Sub UpdateProgress Example This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
#FirstUpdatePanel, #SecondUpdatePanel, #UpdatePanelUpdateProgress { border-right: gray 1px solid; border-top: gray 1px solid; border-left: gray 1px solid; border-bottom: gray 1px solid; } #FirstUpdatePanel, #SecondUpdatePanel { width:200px; height:200px; position: relative; float: left; margin-left: 10px; margin-top: 10px; } #UpdateProgress1 { width: 400px; background-color: #FFC080; bottom: 0%; left: 0px; position: absolute; } Update in progress... [Visual C#] protected void Button_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) { System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(3000); } UpdateProgress Example #FirstUpdatePanel, #SecondUpdatePanel, #UpdatePanelUpdateProgress { border-right: gray 1px solid; border-top: gray 1px solid; border-left: gray 1px solid; border-bottom: gray 1px solid; }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-25
#FirstUpdatePanel, #SecondUpdatePanel { width:200px; height:200px; position: relative; float: left; margin-left: 10px; margin-top: 10px; } #UpdatePanelUpdateProgress { width: 400px; background-color: #FFC080; bottom: 0%; left: 0px; position: absolute; } Update in progress...
Specifying Content Layout When the DynamicLayout property is set to true, the UpdateProgress control initially occupies no space in the page display. Instead, the page dynamically changes to display the UpdateProgress control contents when needed. To support dynamic display, the control is rendered as a div element that has its display style property initially set to none. When the DynamicLayout property is false, the UpdateProgress control occupies space in the page display, even if the control is not visible. In that case, the div element for the control has its display style property set to block, and its visibility is initially set to hidden.
Putting UpdateProgress Controls on the Page You can put UpdateProgress controls inside or outside UpdatePanel controls. An UpdateProgress control is displayed whenever the UpdatePanel control it is associated with is updated as a result of an asynchronous postback. This is true even if the UpdateProgress control is inside another UpdatePanel control. If an UpdatePanel control is inside another update panel, a postback that originates inside the child panel causes any UpdateProgress controls associated with the child panel to be displayed. It also displays any UpdateProgress controls that are associated with the parent panel. If a postback originates from an This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
immediate child control of the parent panel, only the UpdateProgress controls that are associated with the parent panel are displayed. This follows the logic for how postbacks are triggered.
Specifying When the UpdateProgress Control is Displayed You can set the DisplayAfter property to sets the value in milliseconds (ms) before the content of the UpdateProgress control is displayed.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-27
Partial-Page Updates
Key Points When you implement partial-page rendering on a Web page, an instance of the PageRequestManager class becomes available to the page. You can use this class to provide detailed management of the partial-page rendering. You access the PageRequestManager class by using the getInstance method of the class. You can also manipulate the instance by using other methods—for example, the abortPostBack or the Dispose method. Note: You do not create an instance of the PageRequestManager class. Instead, you must get a reference to the current instance. The PageRequestManager class is a member of the Sys.WebForms namespace in the Microsoft Ajax Library. The PageRequestManager class therefore belongs to the ASP.NET Ajax client infrastructure. This client infrastructure provides automatic event binding that works in a similar way to the event binding provided for server controls.
PageRequestManager Events The PageRequestManager class contains several events that you can handle to provide customization of partial-page rendering. The following table provides further information about these events. PageRequestManager event
When raised
Usage
initializeRequest
Before the processing of the asynchronous request begins.
Cancel a postback.
beginRequest
Before the processing of an asynchronous postback starts.
Provide status information to users.
pageLoading
After the server response to an
Provide custom transition effects.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
PageRequestManager event
When raised
Usage
asynchronous postback is received, but before any content on the page is updated. pageLoaded
After all the content on the page is refreshed because of a postback.
Provide custom transition effects.
endRequest
After the control is returned to the browser.
Provide status information to users.
Implementing a PageRequestManager Event You can use JavaScript in your Web page to handle the events raised by the PageRequestManager class. The following code example demonstrates how to get a reference to the current instance of the PageRequestManager class by calling the getInstance method. The example also specifies a function to use to handle the beginRequest event of the class. Sys.WebForms.PageRequestManager.getInstance().add_beginRequest (ReqHandler); function ReqHandler(sender, args) { ... }
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-29
Lesson 3
Extending an ASP.NET Web Forms Application by Using the Ajax Control Toolkit
While Visual Studio 2010 provides a few controls that allow you to build ASP.NET Web Forms applications with Ajax capabilities, you might want to explore options for adding additional controls and functionalities to your Web application. Developers at Microsoft and in the community have been working on a series of Ajax-capable server controls that you can use in your ASP.NET Web Forms applications. These controls— collectively called the Ajax Control Toolkit—provide many controls and extenders that you can use to enhance your Web applications. This lesson describes how to download, install, and use the Ajax Control Toolkit.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe Ajax Control Toolkit.
•
Describe Ajax Control Toolkit controls.
•
Explain how to access the Ajax Control Toolkit.
•
Add an Ajax Extender Control.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Overview of the Ajax Control Toolkit
Key Points The Microsoft Ajax Library—which contains the Ajax Control Toolkit—is a community-supported library, and is not supported by Microsoft. The toolkit works with the Ajax features for ASP.NET, and contains a collection of Web-client components that you can use to enhance your Web applications. You can also use the infrastructure of the toolkit to write reusable and extensible ASP.NET Ajax extenders and controls. Note: There is a difference between extenders and controls. Extenders add to an existing control, but do not change the core functionality of the control, while controls provide new functionality, typically by wrapping an existing control.
Microsoft Ajax Library Download Content You can download the Microsoft Ajax Library in the form of a zip file. The download contains several folders of content, including the following: •
Scripts folder. This folder contains all the Microsoft Ajax Library JavaScript files.
•
AspNetAjaxBetaSamples. This is folder containing a Visual Studio solution, and BetaSamples that contains sample code illustrating how you can use features of the Microsoft Ajax Library.
•
Web Forms folder. This folder contains the two assemblies that are required in order to use the controls from the Ajax Control Toolkit as Web server controls in ASP.NET Web Forms applications: System.Web.Ajax.dll, and AjaxControlToolkit.dll.
Question: What advantages does the Ajax Control Toolkit (part of the Microsoft Ajax Library) provide?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-31
Overview of Ajax Control Toolkit Controls
Key Points The Ajax Control Toolkit contains more than 40 controls that enable you to easily create rich, interactive Web pages. You can test the controls by running the WebSite ASP.NET Web Site project that is part of the BetaSamples.sln solution.
Ajax Control Toolkit Controls The following are some of the controls and brief descriptors of the functionalities they provide, including the CalendarExtender and ModalPopupExtender, which are used in the Lab exercises.
Accordion The Accordion is a Web control that allows you to provide multiple panes, and display them one at a time. This is similar to placing several CollapsiblePanelExtender controls, where only one can be expanded at a time.
AnimationExtender The AnimationExtender is a simple extender that allows you to utilize the powerful animation framework with existing pages in a declarative manner. It plays animations whenever a specific event such as an OnLoad, OnClick, OnMouseOver, or OnMouseOut event is raised by the target control.
AutoCompleteExtender You can attach the AutoCompleteExtender control to any TextBox control, and then associate that control with a popup panel to display words that begin with the prefix typed into the textbox.
CalendarExtender The CalendarExtender is an ASP.NET Ajax extender that can be attached to any ASP.NET TextBox control. It provides client-side date-selecting functionality with customizable date format and UI in a popup control. You can interact with the calendar by clicking on a day to set the date, or use the Today link to set the current date. In addition, you can use the left and right arrows to move forward or
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
backward by a month. By clicking on the title of the calendar, you can change the view from Days in the current month, to Months in the current year. Another click will switch to Years in the current Decade. The click action allows you to easily jump to dates in the past or the future from within the calendar control. The calendar associated with a button has been initialized with the following code.
In the previous code example: •
TargetControlID – Is the ID of the TextBox control to extend with the calendar.
•
CssClass - Name of the CSS class used to style the calendar. See the Calendar Theming section for more information.
•
Format –The format string used to display the selected date.
•
PopupButtonID –The ID of a control to show the calendar popup when clicked. If this value is not set, the calendar will pop up when the textbox receives focus.
•
PopupPosition - Indicates where the calendar popup should appear at the BottomLeft (default), BottomRight, TopLeft, TopRight, Left, or Right of the TextBox.
•
SelectedDate - Indicates the date the Calendar extender is initialized with.
CollapsiblePanelExtender The CollapsiblePanelExtender is an extender that allows you to add collapsible sections to your Web page. This extender targets any ASP.NET Panel control. The page developer specifies the controls on the page that should be the open or close controller for the panel, or the panel can be set to automatically expand or collapse when the mouse pointer moves in or out of it, respectively.
ComboBox The ComboBox is an ASP.NET Ajax control that—like the AutoCompleteExtender—combines the flexibility of a TextBox with a list of options that users are able to choose from. The ComboBox borrows many of its properties, behaviors, and naming conventions from the Windows Forms ComboBox control, and is derived from the same base class as the ListBox, BulletedList, and DropDownList Web controls. A ComboBox is similar to a DropDownList that can be typed directly into, like a TextBox.
ConfirmButtonExtender The ConfirmButtonExtender is an extender that catches click events on a button, or any instance of a type derived from Button, and displays a message to the user. If the OK button is clicked in the message that is displayed, the button or link functions normally. If not, the click is trapped, and the button will not perform its default submit behavior. Optionally, a client script is executed if the OnClientCancel property is already set.
DragPanelExtender The DragPanelExtender extender allows developers to easily add drag ability to their controls. The DragPanelExtender targets any ASP.NET panel, and takes an additional parameter that signifies the control to use as the drag handle. Once initialized, the user can drag the panel around the Web page by using the drag handle.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-33
DropDownExtender The DropDownExtender is an ASP.NET Ajax extender that can be attached to almost any ASP.NET control to provide a drop-down menu. The menu that displays is another panel or control. In the above code example, the drop-down is a panel that contains LinkButton controls. The drop-down is activated by clicking or right-clicking the attached control.
DropShadowExtender The DropShadowExtender is an extender which applies a Drop Shadow to a Panel. It allows you to specify the width and opaqueness of a shadow, or if you want to set rounded corners. For pages that allow the user to move or resize the panel, the DropShadowExtender has a mode that will resize or reposition it to match that of the target panel at run time.
DynamicPopulateExtender The DynamicPopulateExtender is a simple extender that replaces the contents of a control with the result of a Web service or page method call. The method call returns a string of HTML that is inserted as the children of the target element.
FilteredTextBoxExtender The FilteredTextBoxExtender is an extender that prevents a user from entering invalid characters into a text box. You should use this extender to provide convenience for your users, but never assume that the data being sent to the server only consists of valid characters.
HoverMenuExtender You can attach the HoverMenuExtender to any ASP.NET Web Control, and associate that control with a popup panel to display additional content.
HTMLEditor You can create and edit HTML content by using the HTMLEditor. You can use the various buttons in the toolbar for content editing. You can see the generated HTML markup, and preview the document.
ListSearchExtender The ListSearchExtender lets you search for items in a ListBox control or DropDownList control, by typing. The extender performs an incremental search within the ListBox control that is based on the content typed. The prompt message that displays when you click the list can be customized along with its CSS class and position. You can customize the prompt message that displays when you click the list that includes its CSS class and position.
MaskedEditExtender You can attach the MaskedEditExtender to a TextBox control to restrict the kind of text that can be entered. The MaskedEditExtender control applies a mask to the input, and permits only certain types of characters and/or text to be entered. The supported data formats are: Number, Date, Time, and DateTime. For more information about additional Ajax Control Tooklit controls, see the Companion Content section on the CD.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Accessing the Ajax Control Toolkit
Key Points Before you can use the Ajax Control Toolkit, you must download it. You can then add the Toolkit controls to the Toolbox in Visual Studio 2010, and then install the provided templates.
Add the Control Toolkit to the Toolbox To add Control Toolkit items to the Toolbox: 1.
Download the Microsoft Ajax Library from the CodePlex Web site.
2.
Unpack the Ajax Library into a folder on your computer, such as C:\Program Files\ASP.NET Ajax Library.
3.
Create a new Web site, or open an existing Web site.
4.
In Visual Studio 2010, right-click the Toolbox, and then click Add Tab.
5.
Type the name Ajax Control Toolkit for the new tab.
6.
In the Ajax Control Toolkit tab, right-click the Toolbox, and then click Choose Items.
7.
In the Choose Toolbox Items dialog box, click Browse.
8.
Browse to the C:\Program Files\ASP.NET Ajax Library\WebForms\Debug folder.
9.
In the Debug folder, click AjaxControlToolkit.dll, and then click Open.
10. In the Choose Toolbox Items dialog box, click OK. 11. In the Toolbox, examine the new controls that have been added to the Ajax Control Toolkit tab.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-35
Demonstration: How to Add an Ajax Extender Control
Key Points In this demonstration, you will see how to create a sample Web application that uses several features and controls of the Control Toolkit.
Demonstration Steps 1.
Open Visual Studio 2010. •
2.
3.
4.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Create a new ASP.NET Web site named AjaxExtenderControl. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click New Web Site.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#, in the middle pane, ensure that ASP.NET Web Site is selected, in the Web location box, type C:\Users\student\Documents \Visual Studio 2010\WebSites\AjaxExtenderControl \AjaxExtenderControl, and then click OK.
Add a Web Form named AjaxExtenderControl.aspx to the Web site. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click C:\...\AjaxExtenderControl\, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the Add New Item – C:\Users\student\Documents\Visual Studio 2010\WebSites\AjaxExtenderControl\ dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, click Web Form.
•
In the Name box, type AjaxExtenderControl.aspx, clear the Place code in separate file check box, and then click Add.
Open the Web Form in Design view.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
• 5.
Create a tab named Ajax Control Toolkit, in the Toolbox. •
6.
In the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx window, click Design.
In the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx window, point to Toolbox, right-click anywhere in Toolbox, click Add Tab, type Ajax Control Toolkit, and then press ENTER.
Navigate to C:\Program Files\ASP.NET Ajax Library\WebForms\Debug, and add the items from the AjaxControlToolkit.dll file to the Ajax Control Toolkit tab. •
On the Start menu, click Computer.
•
In the Computer window, navigate to C:\Program Files\ASP.NET Ajax Library\WebForms\Debug, and then drag the AjaxControlToolkit.dll file to the Ajax Control Toolkit tab of the Toolbox.
Note: You can view the added Toolbox items in the Ajax Control Toolkit tab. If you cannot view the items, right-click in the Ajax Control Toolkit tab, click Reset Toolbox, and then drag the AjaxControlToolkit.dll file to the Ajax Control Toolkit tab of the Toolbox. 7.
8.
Add a Label and a Button control to the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx Web form. •
In Toolbox, under Standard, double-click the Label control.
•
In Toolbox, under Standard, double-click the Button control.
•
In the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx window, double-click the Button control.
Create a Click event handler for the Button control, and set the Text property of the label to the string, Button click occurred. •
In the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx.vb or AjaxExtenderControl.aspx.cs code-behind window, in the event handler, add the code to set the Text property of the Label1.Text to the string Button click occurred. [Visual Basic] Label1.Text = “Button click occurred” [Visual C#] Label1.Text = “Button click occurred”;
9.
Save the changes, and view the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx Web Form in the browser. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Save All.
•
In AjaxExtenderControl – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click AjaxExtenderControl.aspx, right-click anywhere, and then click View in Browser.
10. Test the Button control, and verify that the text of the label changes. •
In the http://localhost:49158/AjaxExtenderControl /AjaxExtenderControl.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click Button.
Note: Verify that the text of the label changes to Button click occurred. 11. Close Internet Explorer. •
In the http://localhost:49158/AjaxExtenderControl /AjaxExtenderControl.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
12. Add a ScriptManager control at the top of the form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
•
11-37
In Toolbox, on the AJAX Extensions tab, drag a ScriptManager onto the top of the form.
13. Add a ConfirmButtonExtender control onto the Button1 control. •
In Toolbox, on the Ajax Control Toolkit tab, drag the ConfirmButtonExtender control onto the Button1 control.
14. Set the ConfirmText property of the ConfirmButtonExtender control to Continue?. •
In the Properties window, click Button1_ConfirmButtonExtender from the drop-down list.
•
In the Properties window, set the ConfirmText property of the ConfirmButtonExtender control to Continue?.
15. Save the changes, and view the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx Web Form in the browser. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click Save AjaxExtenderControl.aspx.
•
In the AjaxExtenderControl.aspx window, right-click anywhere, and then click View in Browser.
16. Test the Button control, and verify that the confirmation message box appears. •
In the http://localhost:49158/AjaxExtenderControl /AjaxExtenderControl.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click Button.
•
In the Message from webpage message box, click OK.
•
In the AjaxExtenderControl – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
•
In the http://localhost:49158/AjaxExtenderControl /AjaxExtenderControl.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
•
In the Explorer window, click Close button.
Note: Verify that the text of the label changes to Button click occurred.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Ajax-Enabled Web Forms Application
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab either by using the Microsoft Visual Basic® or Microsoft Visual C#® programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab document. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab document.
Introduction In this lab, you will implement partial-page updates by using ASP.NET Ajax, create a modal dialog, and customize Dynamic Data field templates by using Ajax server controls. In addition, you will display progress when updating a page with partial rendering.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Implement partial-page updates by using ASP.NET Ajax.
•
Display a modal dialog.
•
Display a client-side controlled Calendar.
•
Display progress when updating a page with partial rendering.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: •
User name: Student
•
Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-39
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. Your organization uses.NET applications to create, customize, and manage its customer information. You are assigned the task of improving the responsiveness of the Web application user interface. You also need to avoid full-page updates where possible, and display a message when performing a partial update. For this purpose, you need to implement ASP.NET Ajax in the Customer Management application. You also need to ensure that partial page updates are possible without writing any client-side coding. In addition, you need to create a modal About box, add a client-side controlled Calendar control to a Dynamic Data field template user control, and add a progress indicator to the ImportCountries Web Form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Creating a Modal About Box The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing Web site.
2.
Add a new Web Form.
3.
Add a reference to the Ajax Control Toolkit assembly.
4.
Register the Ajax Toolkit assembly, namespace, and TagPrefix.
5.
Change the ScriptManager control in the master page.
6.
Add the ScriptManagerProxy control.
7.
Add the HTML and UI controls.
8.
Add the event handler and code.
9.
Map navigation to the About Web Form.
10. Test the modal About box.
Task 1: Open an existing Web site •
Log on to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M11\VB folder.
Task 2: Add a new Web Form •
Add a new Web Form named About.aspx, based on the master page Site.master.
•
Change the ID property of the Content control to AboutContent.
Task 3: Add a reference to the Ajax Control Toolkit assembly •
Add a reference to the C:\Program Files\ASP.NET Ajax Library \WebForms\Debug\AjaxControlToolkit.dll assembly.
Task 4: Register the Ajax Toolkit assembly, namespace, and TagPrefix •
Add a Register directive to the web.config file by using the following attribute values: •
assembly: AjaxControlToolkit
•
namespace: AjaxControlToolkit
•
tagPrefix: ajaxToolKit
•
Save and close the web.config file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-41
Task 5: Change the ScriptManager control in the master page •
Open the Site.master master page in Source view.
•
Locate the ScriptManager control.
•
Change the ScriptManager control to a ToolkitScriptManager.
•
Save the Site.master master page.
•
Close the Site.master master page.
Task 6: Add the ScriptManagerProxy control •
Add a ScriptManagerProxy control named AboutScriptManagerProxy, to the AboutContent control.
Task 7: Add the HTML and UI controls •
Append a Panel control named AboutPanel, to the Content control. The panel can be made invisible by using an inline style of display: none.
•
Add an UpdatePanel control named AboutUpdatePanel, with an empty ContentTemplate element, to the AboutPanel control.
•
Add a Panel control named AboutPopupPanel, with a cascading style sheet (CSS) class of aboutPopupPanel, to the ContentTemplate element in the AboutUpdatePanel control.
•
Add the following HTML tags and text within the AboutPopupPanel control. About Contoso Customer Management Copyright © 2010 by Contoso
•
Append a Button control named ShowModalButton, with a CSS class of displayNone, to the AboutPopupPanel control.
•
Append a ModalPopupExtender control named AboutModalPopupExtender, with the following attribute values to the AboutPopupPanel control: •
TargetControlID: ShowModalButton
•
PopupControlID: AboutPanel
•
CancelControlID: CloseButton
•
BackgroundCssClass: modalPopup
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Append a Button control named CloseButton, which does not trigger validation, set the OnClick event to CloseButton_Click, set the Text property to Close, and add two HTML line break elements to the AboutPopupPanel control.
•
Add the following styles to the Styles/Site.css stylesheet. div.aboutPopupPanel { background-color: White; text-align: center; border: 2px solid Black; } .modalPopup { position: relative; background-color: Gray; -ms-filter: alpha(opacity=70); z-index: 1; } .displayNone { display: none; }
•
Save and close the Site.css file.
Task 8: Add the event handler and code •
View the code-behind file of the About.aspx Web Form.
•
Show the AboutModalPopupExtender control in the Page.Load event. Protected Sub CloseButton_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles CloseButton.Click ' Close about box AboutModalPopupExtender.Hide() End Sub
•
Hide the AboutModalPopupExtender control in the CloseButton_Click event handler. Protected Sub CloseButton_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles CloseButton.Click ' Close about box AboutModalPopupExtender.Hide() End Sub
Task 9: Map navigation to the About Web Form •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Add an About menu command to the Help menu, making it use the About Web Form, by adding a new siteMapNode within the Help siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-43
Task 10: Test the modal About box •
Build the solution.
•
Run the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Close the About box.
•
Show the About box, using the menu.
•
Close the About box.
•
Close the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Close the About.aspx.vb code file.
•
Close the About Web Form.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a new Web Form content page, and included a ScriptManagerProxy, two Panel controls, one UpdatePanel control, and a ModalPopupExtender control to the Web Form. In addition, you will have added event handlers and code to create a modal About box, and then tested the About box.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Customizing Dynamic Data Field Templates with Ajax Server Controls The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add the CalendarExtender control to the DateTime_Edit field template.
2.
Test the DateTime_Edit field template.
Task 1: Add the CalendarExtender control to the DateTime_Edit field template •
Open the DateTime_Edit.ascx user control Dynamic Data field template in the Source view.
•
Add a CalendarExtender control named DateTimeEditCalendarExtender, to the user control by using the following attribute values: •
TargetControlID: TextBox1
•
PopupPosition: Right
•
Save and close the DateTime_Edit.ascx user control.
Task 2: Test the DateTime_Edit field template •
Build the solution.
•
Run the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Test the CalendarExtender control by adding a new entry to the Customers table, click the ModifiedDate box, and then select a date from the calendar.
•
Cancel the new customer entry.
•
Close the CustomerManagement Web application.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a CalendarExtender control to the dynamic data DateTime_Edit field template user control, and tested the template.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-45
Exercise 3: Adding the Country Import Progress Indicator The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add the ScriptManagerProxy control.
2.
Add the HTML and UI controls.
3.
Test the update progress.
Task 1: Add the ScriptManagerProxy control •
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Source view.
•
Rename the Content control from Content1 to ImportCountriesContent.
•
Add a ScriptManagerProxy control named ImportCountriesScriptManagerProxy, to the Content control.
Task 2: Add the HTML and UI controls •
Add an UpdatePanel control named ImportCountriesUpdatePanel, to the ImportCountriesContent control, with an empty ContentTemplate element, after the ImportCountriesScriptManagerProxy control.
•
Move the existing content of the ImportCountriesContent control to the ContentTemplate element.
•
Format the document markup.
•
Add an UpdateProgress control named ImportCountriesUpdateProgress, to the ImportCountriesContent control, after the ImportCountriesScriptManagerProxy control, by using the following attribute values: •
AssociatedUpdatePanelID: ImportCountriesUpdatePanel
•
DisplayAfter: 0
•
Add an opening and a closing ProgressTemplate tag with the text, “Processing...” to the ImportCountriesUpdateProgress control.
•
Save and close the ImportCountries.aspx Web Form.
Task 3: Test the update progress •
Build the solution.
•
Debug the application.
•
Filter the countries
Note: Notice that the text, “Processing...”, displays in the upper-left corner of the Web site for a short period of time.
Task 4: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a ScriptManagerProxy, an UpdatePanel, and an UpdateProgress control, and tested the update progress of the ImportCountries Web form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-47
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Creating a Modal About Box The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing Web site.
2.
Add a new Web Form.
3.
Add a reference to the Ajax Control Toolkit assembly.
4.
Register the Ajax Toolkit assembly, namespace, and TagPrefix.
5.
Change the ScriptManager control in the master page.
6.
Add the ScriptManagerProxy control.
7.
Add the HTML and UI controls.
8.
Add the event handler and code.
9.
Map navigation to the About Web Form.
10. Test the modal About box.
Task 1: Open an existing Web site •
Log on to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M11\CS folder.
Task 2: Add a new Web Form •
Add a new Web Form named About.aspx, based on the master page, Site.master.
•
Change the ID property of the Content control to AboutContent.
Task 3: Add a reference to the Ajax Control Toolkit assembly •
Add a reference to the C:\Program Files\ASP.NET Ajax Library \WebForms\Debug\AjaxControlToolkit.dll assembly.
Task 4: Register the Ajax Toolkit assembly, namespace, and TagPrefix •
Add a Register directive to the web.config file by using the following attribute values: •
assembly: AjaxControlToolkit
•
namespace: AjaxControlToolkit
•
tagPrefix: ajaxToolKit
•
Save and close the web.config file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Task 5: Change the ScriptManager control in the master page •
Open the Site.master master page in Source view.
•
Locate the ScriptManager control.
•
Change the ScriptManager control to a ToolkitScriptManager.
•
Save the Site.master master page.
•
Close the Site.master master page.
Task 6: Add the ScriptManagerProxy control •
Add a ScriptManagerProxy control named AboutScriptManagerProxy, to the AboutContent control.
Task 7: Add the HTML and UI controls •
Append a Panel control named AboutPanel, to the Content control. The panel can be made invisible by using an inline style of display: none.
•
Add an UpdatePanel control named AboutUpdatePanel, with an empty ContentTemplate element to the AboutPanel control.
•
Add a Panel control named AboutPopupPanel, with a cascading style sheet (CSS) class of aboutPopupPanel, to the ContentTemplate element in the AboutUpdatePanel control.
•
Add the following HTML tags and text within the AboutPopupPanel control. About Contoso Customer Management Copyright © 2010 by Contoso
•
Append a Button control named ShowModalButton, with a CSS class of displayNone to the AboutPopupPanel control.
•
Append a ModalPopupExtender control named AboutModalPopupExtender, with the following attribute values to the AboutPopupPanel control: •
TargetControlID: ShowModalButton
•
PopupControlID: AboutPanel
•
CancelControlID: CloseButton
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
•
11-49
BackgroundCssClass: modalPopup
•
Append a Button control named CloseButton, which does not trigger validation and with the OnClick event set to CloseButton_Click and the Text property set to Close, and two HTML line break elements to the AboutPopupPanel control.
•
Add the following styles to the Styles/Site.css stylesheet. div.aboutPopupPanel { background-color: White; text-align: center; border: 2px solid Black; } .modalPopup { position: relative; background-color: Gray; -ms-filter: alpha(opacity=70); z-index: 1; } .displayNone { display: none; }
•
Save and close the Site.css file.
Task 8: Add the event handler and code •
View the code-behind file of the About.aspx Web Form.
•
Show the AboutModalPopupExtender control in the Page.Load event. // Show about box AboutModalPopupExtender.Show();
•
Hide the AboutModalPopupExtender control in the CloseButton_Click event handler. protected void CloseButton_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Close about box AboutModalPopupExtender.Hide(); }
Task 9: Map navigation to the About Web Form •
Open the web.sitemap file.
•
Add an About menu command to the Help menu, making it use the About Web Form, by adding a new siteMapNode within the Help siteMapNode.
•
Save and close the web.sitemap file.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Task 10: Test the modal About box •
Build the solution.
•
Run the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Close the About box.
•
Show the About box using the menu.
•
Close the About box.
•
Close the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Close the About.aspx.cs code file.
•
Close the About Web Form.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a new Web Form content page, and included a ScriptManagerProxy, two Panel controls, one UpdatePanel control, and a ModalPopupExtender control to the Web Form. In addition, you will have added event handlers and code to create a modal About box, and then tested the About box.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-51
Exercise 2: Customizing Dynamic Data Field Templates with Ajax Server Controls The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add the CalendarExtender control to the DateTime_Edit field template.
2.
Test the DateTime_Edit field template.
Task 1: Add the CalendarExtender control to the DateTime_Edit field template •
Open the DateTime_Edit.ascx user control Dynamic Data field template in the Source view.
•
Add a CalendarExtender control named DateTimeEditCalendarExtender, to the user control by using the following attribute values: •
TargetControlID: TextBox1
•
PopupPosition: Right
•
Save and close the DateTime_Edit.ascx user control.
Task 2: Test the DateTime_Edit field template •
Build the solution.
•
Run the CustomerManagement Web application.
•
Test the CalendarExtender control by adding a new entry to the Customers table, click the ModifiedDate box, and then select a date from the calendar.
•
Cancel the new customer entry.
•
Close the CustomerManagement Web application.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a CalendarExtender control to the dynamic data DateTime_Edit field template user control and tested the template.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Adding the Country Import Progress Indicator The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add the ScriptManagerProxy control.
2.
Add the HTML and UI controls.
3.
Test the update progress.
Task 1: Add the ScriptManagerProxy control •
Open the ImportCountries Web Form in the Source view.
•
Rename the Content control from Content1 to ImportCountriesContent.
•
Add a ScriptManagerProxy control named ImportCountriesScriptManagerProxy, to the Content control.
Task 2: Add the HTML and UI controls •
Add an UpdatePanel control named ImportCountriesUpdatePanel, to the ImportCountriesContent control, with an empty ContentTemplate element, after the ImportCountriesScriptManagerProxy control.
•
Move the existing content of the ImportCountriesContent control to the ContentTemplate element.
•
Format the document markup.
•
Add an UpdateProgress control named ImportCountriesUpdateProgress, to the ImportCountriesContent control, after the ImportCountriesScriptManagerProxy control by using the following attribute values: •
AssociatedUpdatePanelID: ImportCountriesUpdatePanel
•
DisplayAfter: 0
•
Add an opening and a closing ProgressTemplate tag with the text, “Processing...” to the ImportCountriesUpdateProgress control.
•
Save and close the ImportCountries.aspx Web Form.
Task 3: Test the update progress •
Build the solution.
•
Debug the application.
•
Filter the countries.
Note: Notice that the text, “Processing...”, displays in the upper-left corner of the Web site for a short period of time.
Task 4: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
•
11-53
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added a ScriptManagerProxy, an UpdatePanel, and an UpdateProgress control, and tested the update progress of the ImportCountries Web form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-54
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
To implement partial-page rendering, what controls should you use?
2.
What is the prerequisite step to use a control from the Ajax Control Toolkit?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Creating a Microsoft® ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
11-55
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What is the design goal of ASP.NET Ajax?
2.
What features does the ScriptManager control provide?
3.
How can you use the Ajax Control Toolkit to enhance your applications?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You need to implement client-side functionality that is not provided by the standard ASP.NET Web server controls. What is the easiest way to do this? Download and use the Ajax Control Toolkit.
2.
You do not have the experience of a client-side developer, but you have been asked to implement asynchronous updates to a Web Form. How do you do this? You add an UpdatePanel to the Web Form, and place the controls and elements that should be updated asynchronously in the UpdatePanel control.
Best Practices Mention some best practices in the context of your own business situations. •
Keep in mind that even if you implement asynchronous event processing, and thus create a responsive user interface for your users, the load on the Web server is the same. This means that each time an asynchronous callback is made, the entire page from which the callback is initiated must go through the full page life cycle on the server. This can quickly overburden the server if you are not careful with the amount of asynchronous callbacks the application uses.
•
The UpdatePanel control should generally only be used with parts of a page, not the entire page.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
11-56
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-1
Module 12 Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services Contents: Lesson 1: Overview of Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-3
Lesson 2: Calling Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-13
Lesson 3: Working with WCF Data Services
12-23
Lab: Consuming Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-36
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-2
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Module Overview
Making code functionality available across a disconnected network such as the Internet, differs from making that functionality available in a class or a component, because potential users do not have and should not have access to your code, for obvious reasons. There is a way to make the same functionality in your classes or components available, without giving the users—such as partners, customers, and vendors—full access to your code. If you need to keep the communication secure, you can create a frontend that exposes the functionality in a non-intrusive manner, and in a manner that is accessible to everyone on the network by using the HTTP protocol or Secure HTTP (HTTPS). However, for many companies, browsing data-driven Web pages does not adequately satisfy their business requirements. Programmable units of logic and functionality that directly link organizations, applications, and services are a better solution. Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services provide this direct linking of applications. Using WCF services, you can expand the functionality that you want to offer to users. In this module, you will learn how to call a WCF service directly by using a proxy from a Web application. In addition, you will learn how to work with WCF Data Services to directly expose data over the Web, making it possible to automatically query the same data, even from a browser.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-3
Lesson 1
Overview of Windows Communication Foundation Services
One of the challenges that you may encounter when you create feature-rich Web sites is application integration. You often have to combine several applications into a single, easy-to-use solution. The problem with this is that the applications that you want to combine may be on a variety of platforms, and each platform may run a different operating system. The applications may also use several different programming languages. With the move to a service-oriented architecture (SOA), software development has changed, because SOA services are distinct software units of abstraction. Today it is becoming more typical for applications to interact through services. To appeal to a wide audience, services benefits must be reflected in the tools and technologies that developers use. WCF is designed to address these requirements. In this lesson, you will learn the key features of WCF, and the purpose of WCF services.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe WCF.
•
Describe WCF services.
•
Describe the purpose of using WCF services.
•
Describe various uses of WCF services.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-4
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is Windows Communication Foundation?
Key Points The global acceptance of Web services—which includes standard protocols for application-to-application communication—has changed software development. For example, the functions that Web services now provide include security, distributed transaction coordination, and reliable communication. The benefits of the changes in Web services should be reflected in the tools and technologies that developers use. This is why Microsoft created WCF, which is designed to offer a manageable approach to distributed computing, interoperability, and direct support for service orientation. WCF is a part of the Microsoft .NET Framework that provides a unified programming model for rapidly building service-oriented applications that communicate across the Web and the enterprise. WCF is an integration of older .NET Framework technologies such as XML Web services, .NET Framework Remoting, and Microsoft .NET Enterprise Services, into a single service-oriented programming model. WCF simplifies the development of connected applications through a new service-oriented programming model that supports many styles of distributed application development by providing a layered architecture. At its base, the WCF channel architecture provides asynchronous, untyped message-passing primitives. Built on top of this base are protocol facilities for secure, reliable, transacted data exchange, and a broad choice of transport and encoding options. The typed programming model—also known as the service model—features straightforward mapping of XML Web services concepts to those of the .NET Framework common language runtime (CLR), including flexible and extensible mapping of messages to service implementations in languages such as Microsoft Visual Basic® or Microsoft Visual C#®. With WCF, you can build secure, reliable, and transacted solutions that integrate across platforms, and interoperate with your existing investments. Using WCF, you can send data as asynchronous messages from one service endpoint to another. A service endpoint can be part of a continuously available service that is hosted by Internet Information Services (IIS), or it can be a service hosted in an application. An endpoint can be a client of a service that requests data from a service endpoint. The messages can be as
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-5
simple as a single character or word sent as XML, or as complex as a stream of binary data. This module covers IIS-hosted WCF services.
Interoperability with Applications Built on Other Technologies While WCF introduces a new development environment for distributed applications, it is designed to interoperate well with non-WCF applications, interoperate with other platforms, and interoperate with the Microsoft technologies that preceded WCF.
Interoperability with Other XML Web Services Platforms Corporations today typically have systems and applications that they have purchased from many suppliers. Often, communication is required with various other software applications that are written in various languages, and are running on various operating systems. Because the fundamental communication mechanism in WCF is Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP)based XML Web services, WCF-based applications can communicate with other software running in a variety of contexts: •
WCF-based applications that are running in a different process on the same Windows-based computer.
•
WCF-based applications that are running on another Windows-based computer.
•
Applications that are built on other technologies, such as Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) application servers that support standard XML Web services.
To allow more than just basic communication, WCF implements XML Web services technologies as defined by the WS-* specifications. WCF implements interoperable XML Web services complete with cross-platform security, reliability, transactions, and other services.
Interoperability with Microsoft Technologies Many Microsoft customers have made significant investments in the .NET Framework technologies included with WCF. Protecting those .NET Framework investments is a fundamental goal of the WCF designers. Installing WCF does not break existing technology, so organizations do not need to change existing applications to use it. Question: Which three main technologies does WCF replace?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-6
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
What Is a WCF Service?
Key Points A WCF service is an application that is delivered as a service that can be integrated with other WCF services by using Internet standards such as HTTP and XML, and other standard protocols, including Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). WCF services are similar to components, because they represent black-box functionality that you can use to add features to a Web Form, Windows Form, or even another WCF service, without worrying about how the supporting service is implemented.
Application-to-Application Communication Across the Internet WCF services interact directly with other applications across any disconnected network, such as the Internet. As a result, WCF services do not have user interfaces (UIs); instead, WCF services provide standard, defined interfaces—called contracts—which describe the services provided. A WCF service can be used internally by a single application, or externally by many applications that access it through a network such as the Internet. There are many benefits to using WCF services—for both consumers and developers—including programming language, protocol, and platform independence.
Programming Language independence You can access a WCF service from any .NET Framework-based programming language, such as Visual Basic or Visual C#. Therefore, because of this flexibility, you do not have to learn a new programming language every time you want to use or consume a WCF service.
Protocol Independence Unlike current component technologies, WCF services do not use protocols that are specific to certain object models, such as the Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM). WCF services communicate by using standard Web protocols and data formats such as HTTP, XML, and SOAP. Any server that supports these Web standards can access or host WCF services.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-7
Platform Independence Because WCF services are accessed by using a standard interface, they enable disparate systems to work together. Servers that can support Web Forms can also support WCF services.
Multiple Message Patterns Messages are exchanged in one of several patterns. The most common pattern is the request/reply pattern, where one endpoint requests data from a second endpoint, and the second endpoint replies. There are other patterns, such as a one-way message in which a single endpoint sends a message without any expectation of a reply. A more complex pattern is the duplex exchange pattern, where two endpoints establish a connection, and then send data back and forth, similar to an instant messaging program.
Service Metadata WCF supports publishing service metadata using formats that are specified in industry standards, such as Web Services Description Language (WSDL), XML Schema, and WS-Policy. This metadata can be used to automatically generate and configure clients for accessing WCF services. Metadata can be published over HTTP and HTTPS, or using the Web Service Metadata Exchange standard.
Data Contracts Because WCF is built using the .NET Framework, it also includes code-friendly methods of supplying the contracts that you want to enforce. One of the universal types of contracts is the data contract. As you code your service using Visual Basic or Visual C#, the easiest way to handle data is by creating classes that represent a data entity with properties that belong to the data entity. WCF includes a comprehensive system for working with data in this manner. Question: How do WCF services help you to make the application platform and technology independent?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-8
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
WCF Service Communication
Key Points All communication with a WCF service occurs through the endpoints of the service. An endpoint is what provides a client access to the functionality offered by the WCF service. An endpoint consists of four properties: address, binding, contract, and behaviors.
Endpoint Structure Each endpoint consists of the properties that are listed in the following table. Endpoint property
Description
Address
Uniquely identifies the endpoint, and tells potential consumers of the service where it is located. It is represented in the WCF object model by the EndpointAddress class. An EndpointAddress class contains: • A Uri property, which represents the address of the service, an Identity property, which represents the security identity of the service and a collection of optional message headers. • The optional message headers are used to provide additional and more detailed addressing information to identify or interact with the endpoint.
Binding
Specifies how to communicate with the endpoint. This includes: • The transport protocol to use, such as HTTP or TCP. • The encoding to use for the messages, such as binary or text. • The necessary security requirements, such as SSL.
Contract
Outlines what functionality the endpoint exposes to the client. A contract specifies: • What operations can be called by a client. • The form of the message. • The type of input parameters or data required to call the operation.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
Endpoint property
Description •
Behaviors
12-9
What type of processing or response message the client can expect.
Customizes the local behavior of the service endpoint by participating in the process of building a WCF runtime. An example of an endpoint behavior is the ListenUri property, which allows you to specify a different listening address than the SOAP or WSDL address.
Question: How does communication with a WCF service occur?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-10
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Uses of WCF Services
Key Points WCF services enable you to share programming logic and capabilities with numerous Web and Windows® applications, and with applications that run on other platforms. This allows you to use existing functionality. You can think of a WCF service as a component that can expose its methods through disparate networks, including the Internet and the Web. WCF services also use standard Web protocols and the features that are available in Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010. Visual Studio 2010 simplifies the use of WCF services. The following table lists some uses of WCF services. WCF service
Description
Authentication services
Provides user authentication.
Weather reports
Provides updated weather reports for selected locations. For example, a Web site can provide local weather forecasts for a specified city or area by consuming a weather report WCF service.
Exchange rates
Provides updated exchange rates for all currencies. For example, a travel Web site can provide exchange rates for likely vacation destinations by consuming an exchange rates WCF service.
Airfare quotes
Provides updated airfares from one or more airlines. For example, a travel Web site can offer automatically discounted prices from preferred airlines by consuming an airfare quotes WCF service.
Stock quotes
Provides updated stock market quotes. For example, a company can offer to post its own stock price on its Web site by consuming a stock quotes WCF service.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-11
WCF service
Description
Partnering services
Provides business partners with the opportunity to access your services on their Web site. For example, convention Web sites can offer hotel registration services.
News headlines
Provides updated news headlines. For example, a company can post headlines from their business market on its Web site by consuming a news headline WCF service.
Order tracking
Provides the status of orders by linking existing enterprise resource management systems to internal and external Web sites. For example, combining results from internal ERP applications with supplier and shipping company order tracking WCF services would give customers a complete view of the status of their orders.
Advantages One of the primary advantages of the WCF services architecture is that it allows programs that are written in different languages on different platforms to communicate with each other in a standard way. Whenever you need to expose functionality to anyone that cannot or should not access your code or components directly, you should consider using a WCF service. Another reason for WCF services is that other companies expose a lot of functionality this way, and you can access the functionality—potentially for free. Regardless of whether you are paying for the service, you can access the functionality as if you were using your own components or classes.
Example of a WCF Service A hypothetical travel Web site offers several features that are based on WCF services. In this scenario, the user enters a destination city name, and the Web Form uses the city name as a parameter in calls to several WCF services. From the user’s perspective, this is a sophisticated travel Web site. From a developer's perspective, the Web site is a graphical interface that combines several WCF services from unrelated companies. This Web site provides advantages to both the travel agency and the various WCF service providers: Advantages for the travel agency include: •
The applications that the travel agency can access are not limited by the travel agency developers’ programming skills, availability, or subject expertise. • The travel agency does not bear the high maintenance costs of keeping data such as weather reports or exchange rates up-to-date. • WCF services use the Internet, so the travel agency does not have to create or maintain dedicated connections to offer the service. • WCF services are independent of language, protocol, and platform, so the travel agency developers do not have to learn how the WCF service was built and deployed. Advantages for the WCF service providers: • The WCF service provider may be able to charge the Web site for the use of the service. • A bank can access the customer base of multiple travel agencies, by offering an application such as an exchange rate calculator as a WCF service. • The WCF service provider does not bear the high cost of developing and marketing a Web site to the public. • The service providers do not require expensive dedicated connections to offer the service, because WCF services can use the Internet to communicate. This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-12
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
•
The WCF service can be consumed by a wide variety of applications, because WCF services are independent of language, protocol, and platform.
Question: What is the primary reason for using WCF services?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-13
Lesson 2
Calling Windows Communication Foundation Services
You can access a WCF service from a Web application programmatically by creating a proxy to handle the call. In this lesson, you will learn how to create a Service reference proxy for a WCF Service, and learn how to call a WCF Service method from a Web Form.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Explain how to consume a WCF service.
•
Explain how to add a Service reference using Visual Studio 2010.
•
Describe Service Reference files.
•
Programmatically call a WCF service.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-14
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Consuming a Windows Communication Foundation Service
Key Points A WCF service must be hosted before you can access it. WCF services can be hosted in a number of different ways, such as by using: •
A console application.
•
A Windows Forms application.
•
IIS.
•
A Windows service.
•
Windows Process Activation Service (WAS).
The console application and Windows Forms application are also referred to as self-hosting options, because the application must be running for the WCF to be available for consumption. The Window service option means that the WCF service is running inside a Windows service. The WAS enables you to host any WCF service, and support any transport inside the IIS model. WAS handles the creation of worker processes and provides the configuration from the original W3svc.exe.While IIS makes a Web application or Web service available over the HTTP protocol, WAS makes it available over different protocols, including HTTP, TCP, and Named Pipes.
Locating a WCF Service WCF services can be published and registered in a Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI) register, where it can be located or discovered by the potential users. You can also find WCF services from within Visual Studio 2010, provided the WCF services are part of the current solution. In summary, you need to know the address of the WCF service to use it. When working with WCF Services hosted in IIS, this address is a standard URL, such as http://localhost /CustomerWCF/Customers.svc. Notice the .svc extension, which is mandatory.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-15
Consuming a WCF Service You can consume WCF services in several ways. If you are using WCF on the client-side, WCF comes with tools that can generate proxy classes to call WCF services. WCF provides the standards and tools support primarily through the ServiceModel Metadata Utility Tool, SvcUtil.exe. SvcUtil.exe is used to generate service model code from metadata documents, and metadata documents from service model code. In addition, Visual Studio 2010 comes with easy-to-use features to add service references to your projects and seamlessly generate proxy classes for you. Essentially, you have the following options: •
Retrieve the WSDL from the service, and manually create a proxy to call the service. This is a typical scenario when you do not have WCF on the client-side.
•
Use the Add Service Reference dialog box in Visual Studio 2010 to generate a proxy to use in your client.
•
Use the SvcUtil.exe command-line tool to generate proxy classes.
Question: What is the name of the command-line tool that is used for generating WCF service proxy classes?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-16
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Adding a Service Reference by Using Visual Studio 2010
Key Points To simplify the coding model, applications use a device reference to locally represent each WCF service. You can add a Service reference to your project by using the Add Service Reference dialog box. The Add Service Reference dialog box enables you to add references to WCF services and WCF Data Services. To add a reference to a service that is contained in your solution, in the Add Service Reference dialog box, click Discover, or if you know the address where the service is hosted, enter the URL in the Address box, and then click Go. This returns a list of available services. The Services list displays an expandable list of services that are returned. Each service might contain multiple service contracts and/or endpoints. When you expand a service in the Services list and select the associated contract, the Operations list displays a list of operations that are available for the service contract. When you have located the desired WCF service, selected the appropriate contract and optionally specified the namespace, click OK. Visual Studio downloads the service description to the local computer, and then generates a proxy class for the chosen WCF service and contract. The proxy class contains methods for calling each service method that is exposed in the contract. This class is contained in the local .wsdl file's code-behind file. Question: How do you open the Add Service Reference dialog box?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-17
Overview of Service Reference Metadata Files
Key Points When you add a Service reference to a WCF service, a number of metadata files are added to the App_WebReferences folder in your Web application root. In the App_WebReferences folder, a subfolder that is named after the namespace and that is specified at the time the Service reference was added, is the actual container of the following files.
Reference.svcmap The Reference.svcmap file is the main reference file that contains references to the metadata files and code generation operations, as shown in the following markup. false true false false false true Auto true true
The MetadataFile elements point to the .wsdl, .xsd, and .disco files, and the ExtensionFile elements point to the Configuration91.svcinfo and Configuration.svcinfo files.
.disco The .disco discovery file contains the contractRef element that links to other documents, including the WSDL and documentation on the server. The disco files are not used for configuration or proxy generation.
.wsdl The .wsdl file contains the WSDL markup for the service.
.xsd The .xsd files are the XML schema files that are used to describe the schemas used.
configuration.svcinfo and configuration91.svcinfo The configuration.svcinfo and configuration91.svcinfo files track the configuration added to the project configuration file, web.config. Question: Which metadata file is the main reference file?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-19
Demonstration: How to Programmatically Call a WCF Service
Key Points In this demonstration, you will see how to create a proxy to call a WCF service from a Web Form.
Demonstration Steps To create a proxy to call a WCF service from a Web Form, you need to perform the following steps: 1.
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
2.
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010. •
3.
4.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Open the Web application and the code-behind file for the Web Form from which you will be calling the WCF service, or create a new Web site and use the Default Web form of the Web site. •
On the File menu of Visual Studio 2010, click New Web Site.
•
In the New Web Site dialog box, in the left pane, click either Visual Basic or Visual C#.
•
In the middle pane, click ASP.NET Web Site.
•
In the Web location list, ensure File System is selected, and then click OK.
•
In Solution Explorer, right-click C:\Users\Admin\Documents\Visual Studio 2010\WebSites\WebSite1\, and then click Add Service Reference.
Enter the URL of the WCF service that you want to access, and create a service reference for the WCF service. •
In the Add Service Reference dialog box, in the Address box, type http://localhost:1112/Services/Customers.svc, and then click Go.
•
In the Services list, expand Customers, and then select the ICustomers contract.
•
Notice the service method that displays in the Operations list, and then click OK.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-20
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
5.
6.
Open the Default.aspx Web Form in Source view, remove the existing markup from the BodyContent Content control, and add a Button and GridView control. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click Default.aspx, and then click View Markup.
•
Select the markup between the opening and closing Content tags for the BodyContent control, and then press the DELETE key.
•
In the Default.aspx window, point to Toolbox, expand Standard, and then double-click Button.
•
In Toolbox, expand Data, and then double-click GridView.
Create an instance of the proxy of the WCF service in the Click event procedure of the Button control. [Visual Basic] Dim customersWcfClient As New ServiceReference1.CustomersClient [Visual C#] ServiceReference1.CustomersClient customersWcfClient = new ServiceReference1.CustomersClient();
•
In the Default.aspx window, click Design.
•
In the Default.aspx window, double-click Button.
•
In the Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs code window, type the following code in the Click event procedure of the Button control. [Visual Basic] Dim customersWcfClient As New ServiceReference1.CustomersClient [Visual C#] ServiceReference1.CustomersClient customersWcfClient = new ServiceReference1.CustomersClient();
Note: In the code example, ServiceReference1 is the name of the WCF reference, and CustomersClient is the name of the WCF service. 7.
Import the System.Security.Principal namespace. [Visual Basic] Imports System.Security.Principal [Visual C#] using System.Security.Principal;
•
In the Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs code window, add the following at the top of the code file. [Visual Basic] Imports System.Security.Principal [Visual C#] using System.Security.Principal;
8.
Impersonate a user account that can be impersonated to allow access to secure resources from the WCF service by using Windows credentials. [Visual Basic] customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential.User Name = "10267A-GEN-DEV\Student" customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential.Pass
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-21
word = "Pa$$w0rd" customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.AllowedImpersonationL evel = TokenImpersonationLevel.Impersonation [Visual C#] customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential.User Name = "10267A-GEN-DEV\\Student"; customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential.Pass word = "Pa$$w0rd"; customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.AllowedImpersonationL evel = TokenImpersonationLevel.Impersonation;
•
In the Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs code window, append the following code to the Click event procedure of the Button control. [Visual Basic] customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential. UserName = "10267A-GEN-DEV\Student" customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential. Password = "Pa$$w0rd" customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.AllowedImpersonat ionLevel = TokenImpersonationLevel.Impersonation [Visual C#] customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential. UserName = "10267A-GEN-DEV\\Student"; customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.ClientCredential. Password = "Pa$$w0rd"; customersWcfClient.ClientCredentials.Windows.AllowedImpersonat ionLevel = TokenImpersonationLevel.Impersonation;
9.
Call the GetCountries method of the WCF service, requesting countries starting with the letter D. [Visual Basic] GridView1.DataSource = customersWcfClient.GetCountries("D") GridView1.DataBind() [Visual C#] GridView1.DataSource = customersWcfClient.GetCountries("D"); GridView1.DataBind();
•
In the Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs code window, append the following code to the Click event procedure of the Button control. [Visual Basic] GridView1.DataSource = customersWcfClient.GetCountries("D") GridView1.DataBind() [Visual C#] GridView1.DataSource = customersWcfClient.GetCountries("D"); GridView1.DataBind();
10. Close the WCF service client. [Visual Basic] customersWcfClient.Close() [Visual C#] customersWcfClient.Close();
•
In the Default.aspx.vb or Default.aspx.cs code window, append the following code to the Click event procedure of the Button control. [Visual Basic]
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-22
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
customersWcfClient.Close() [Visual C#] customersWcfClient.Close();
11. Build and run the Microsoft ASP.NET Web application. •
In Visual Studio 2010, on the Debug menu, click Start Without Debugging.
•
In the Windows Internet Explorer® window, click Button.
•
In the http://localhost:49157/WebSite1/Default.aspx - Windows Internet Explorer window and WebSite1 - Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
Note: Verify that the customers' details display on the Web Form by using the WCF service. Question: What is the default name for the proxy created by using the Add Service Reference dialog box?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-23
Lesson 3
Working with WCF Data Services
To provide a richer user experience while maintaining ease of deployment, the architecture of Web applications is changing dramatically. The technological shift towards Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (Ajax)–based frameworks and tools, and the trend for building rich, interactive applications with applications such as Microsoft Silverlight® 4, has changed how presentation, functionality, and data are delivered to client Web browsers. In traditional Web applications, to drive interaction, a server-side component renders HTML content with: presentation aspects such as fonts, colors, and layout; the data or content itself; and client-side code, such as JavaScript. One key trait of the new architecture for Web applications is that presentation and data are no longer embedded in the same container and delivered through the same channel. Ajax-based Web sites serve pages containing presentation and functionality, and then the JavaScript code that represents the page functionality fetches data separately by using Extensible Markup Language/Hypertext Transfer Protocol (XMLHTTP). Silverlight applications remove the option of a serverside rendering process that mixes data and code; code to drive the presentation aspects is precompiled and deployed as a single file on the Web server. After reaching the client Web browser, the code calls back into the Web server to retrieve the actual data to display within the user interface. Orthogonal-to-single data source Web applications and their architecture—a new class of application called mashups—has also emerged on the Web. Mashups are front-ends that aggregate and combine data that is available in pure data form on the Web—currently most of them are in the form of Really Simple Syndication (RSS)/Atom feeds—and add value on top of the individual data pieces. This architecture makes it particularly interesting to talk about data services; the services that applications use to find and manipulate data on the Web regardless of the presentation technology used in the user interface, or whether the front-end is hosted on the same site as the server hosting the data. In this lesson, you will learn how to serve data to a mashup application by using WCF Data Services.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-24
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Describe WCF Data Services.
•
Create WCF Data Services.
•
Explain how to add WCF Data Services to an existing Web site by using Visual Studio 2010.
•
Examine a WCF Data Service.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-25
Overview of WCF Data Services
Key Points The WCF Data Services framework consists of a combination of patterns and libraries that enable the creation and consumption of data services for the Web. The goal of the WCF Data Services framework is to facilitate the creation of flexible data services that are naturally integrated with the Web. WCF Data Services use Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs) to point to pieces of data, and simple, well-known formats to represent that data, such as JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) and ATOM, an XML-based feed format. This results in the data service being surfaced as a representational state transfer (REST)-style resource collection that can be addressed with URIs, and that agents can interact with, by using standard HTTP verbs such as GET, POST, PUT, or DELETE. In order for the system to understand and use semantics over the data that it exposes, WCF Data Services models the data that is exposed through the data service, by using an Entity Data Model (EDM). The EDM organizes the data in the form of instances of entities, and associations between them. For relational data, WCF Data Services supports exposing an EDM model that is created by using the Microsoft ADO.NET Entity framework. To use nonrelational data sources or additional database access technologies such as LINQ to SQL, a mechanism is provided that enables any data source to be modeled as an entity, and exposed as a data service.
Example For example, a service can be used to track customer data. The URI that represents all Customer entities in this example service is http://myserver/data.svc /Customers. In this context, the “/Customers” part of the URI points to the Customers entity set, which is the container for Customer instances. It is also possible to point to a single entity by using a URI, such as http://myserver/data.svc /Customers('ALFKI'). This URI results in a single Customer entity whose key—as defined in the EDM schema—has a value of “ALFKI.” If the Customer entity includes properties, you can address those
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-26
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
properties individually. For example, the URI, http://myserver/data.svc/Customers('ALFKI')/ContactName represents the Contact Name of the Customer entity with key, “ALFKI.” Because EDM schemas not only describe the structure of the entity types, but also the associations between them, the system can use that information to provide a mechanism for association traversal. For example, if each of the customers in the data service has a set of Sales Orders associated with it, the http://myserver/data.svc/Customers('ALFKI')/Orders URI would represent the set of Sales Orders associated with the Customer whose key has a value of “ALFKI.” An application can operate on the entities’ data, and on entities that are related to the target entity. For example, if you want an application to display a grid with a master-details style, the application needs to efficiently retrieve both the target Customer, and that customer's orders for display. The http://myserver/data.svc /Customers('ALFKI')?$expand=Orders,AlternateContacts URI addresses a single customer, and states that the customer's orders and alternate contact information should be returned inline in the same response from the data service. All of these URIs represent resources—such as a customer or the sales orders associated with the customer—with the key, “ALFKI.” In addition to the key-based selection, you can include simple predicates in WCF Data Service URIs. This enables the representation of sets based on the properties of the entities, such as the set of active sales orders for the customer with key, “ALFKI,” which in the WCF Data Service URI form, is http://myserver/data.svc /Customers('ALFKI')/Orders?$filter=Active eq true. You can use the $filter operator in conjunction with string, math, or date functions as shown in http://myserver/data.svc/Customers('ALFKI')/Orders?$filter=Active eq true and (year(OrderDate) eq 2007) URI, which represents the set of active orders made in the year 2007 for the customer, ALFKI. WCF Data Service URIs can also include control information in the query string to adjust how data is presented to the caller. Common requirements for Web applications include aspects such as being able to request data in pages, and to sort the data by various properties. For example, the http://myserver/data.svc /Customers('ALFKI')/Orders?$filter=Active eq true&$orderby=OrderDate URI lists the same Sales Orders, but the data is ordered by date.
Format Independent WCF Data Services uses simple formats to represent data, and supports more than one format to accommodate as many client agents as possible. Currently, WCF Data Services can represent data in JSON and Atom Publishing Protocol (AtomPub) formats. The default representation format is AtomPub, and it is generated by using a fixed mapping of the entity structure to XML elements in AtomPub. Semantics provided by the EDM schema, are then added to make the information useful. The WCF Data Services framework also enables the use of regular authentication schemes supported by the execution environment that hosts a particular data service, including ASP.NET and WCF.
Storage Independent WCF Data Services expose data regardless of the underlying data source. In general, WCF Data Services accept an HTTP request for a resource identified by a URI, deserialize the request, and then pass a representation of that request to a WCF Data Service provider to run the request on the underlying data store. This separation of the WCF Data Services protocol—such as URI, payload format, and interaction model—from the data store, enables WCF Data Services to expose data at the level of abstraction
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-27
presented to it by the provider, which may be different from the schema of the underlying store. WCF Data Services enables you to easily create data services by using the following: •
Entity Framework data sources, which expose a conceptual model of data that is stored in relational databases, including Microsoft SQL Server®, Oracle, IBM DB2, and MySql.
•
Any additional implementation that supports updated semantics for WCF Data Services. This enables WCF Data Services to expose any data store as REST-based endpoints, regardless of the storage mechanism.
A significant amount of access to relational databases occurs through stored procedures. WCF Data Services supports the use of stored procedures in the following ways: •
WCF Data Services supports the Entity Framework as a data source, which makes it simple to relate entities exposed through a data service to stored procedures within a relational database.
•
Allows use of service operations to relate stored procedures to entities exposed through a WCF Data Service.
Question: What is the goal of the WCF Data Services framework?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-28
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Creating WCF Data Services
Key Points The WCF Data Service server framework consists of two halves: an upper-half, and a lower-half. The upper-half of the framework is the runtime itself. This part is fixed, and it implements URI translation, Atom/JSON wire formats, and the interaction protocol. This is what makes a WCF Data Service look like a WCF Data Service. The lower-half of the framework is the data-access layer, which is pluggable. Communication between layers happens in terms of the IQueryable interface, and a set of conventions to link CLR graphs into the URI/payload patterns of WCF Data Services.
Selecting a Data Source The first step in creating a WCF Data Service is to determine the data source to be exposed as a set of REST-based endpoints—you need to select or create a data access layer. For relational data stored in SQL Server or other third-party databases, WCF Data Services currently enables you to easily expose a conceptual model that is created by using the ADO.NET Entity Framework. A mechanism that enables any data source to be exposed as a WCF Data Service is provided for all other data sources such as an XML document, a Web service, or application logic layer, or to use additional database access technologies such as LINQ to SQL.
Creating a Data Service by Using the ADO.NET Entity Framework WCF Data Services are a specialized form of WCF services. You can host WCF Data Services in various environments. To create a data service, you must first create a Web project and establish a connection with the database, which the service will expose. Then, create the data service itself within the Web application. The following are the steps to create a WCF Data Service, which is hosted inside an ASP.NET site: 1.
Create a project. •
Create an ASP.NET Web Application project or an ASP.NET Web site in Visual Studio 2010, or use an existing Web application project or Web site.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
2.
Create an EDM representation of your database by using the ADO.NET Entity Framework. •
3.
12-29
Assuming that you already have a database that you want to expose as a data service, create an EDM schema that relates 1:1 with your database by using the Add New Item dialog box and the ADO.NET Entity Data Model template. The file name extension for ADO.NET EDM is .edmx.
Create a data service. •
Create the actual data service by using the Add New Item dialog box and the WCF Data Service template. The file name extension for WCF Data Service is .svc. In the service code file, locate the TODO: put your data source class name here comment, and then add the name of your data class, including a namespace.
4.
Enable access to the data service. •
5.
By default, a data service does not expose any resources. For security purposes, access to resources needs to be explicitly enabled before any resources or associations become accessible. To enable the read and write access to all resources in the EDM associated with the service, locate the InitializeService method. Remove the comment from one of the methods on the config object—such as the SetEntitySetAccessRule method—and supply an asterisk (*) as the first parameter or the name of the entity in your data model, if you do not want to allow access to all entities.
Test the data service. •
Run the Web application or Web site, add the name of the WCF Data Service file—such as WebDataService.svc to the URL—and then press ENTER. You can see the data returned from the data source, in an XML format.
Prerequisites for Creating Data Services To create a data service by using WCF Data Services in your own environment, you must have Visual Studio 2010. If you use your data service to access data that is stored in a relational database, you will need a database with updated data access providers, such as SQL Server 2005 or SQL Server 2008. The ADO.NET Entity Framework runtime and associated tools are included in Visual Studio 2010. Question: What is the file extension for a WCF Data Service?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-30
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Demonstration: How to Add WCF Data Services to an Existing Web Site
Key Points In this demonstration, you will see how to create add a WCF Data Service to an existing Web site.
Demonstration Steps To add WCF Data Services to an existing Web site, perform the following steps: 1.
Log on to 10267A-GEN-DEV as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
2.
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010. •
3.
4.
On the Start menu of 10267A-GEN-DEV, point to All Programs, click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, and then click Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Demofiles\M12\CS or D:\Demofiles\M12\VB folder. •
In the Start Page – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click Open Project.
•
In the Open Project dialog box, in the File name box, type either D:\Demofiles\M12\VB\CustomerManagement.sln or D:\Demofiles\M12\CS\CustomerManagement.sln, and then click Open.
Add a new WCF Data Service named Countries. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click either the D:\Demofiles\M12 \VB\CustomerManagement\ or D:\Demofiles\M12\CS \CustomerManagement\ Web site, and then click Add New Item.
•
In the Add New Item – D:\Demofiles\M12\VB\CustomerManagement\ or Add New Item – D:\Demofiles\M12\CS\CustomerManagement\ dialog box, in the middle pane, click WCF Data Service.
•
In the Name box, type Countries.svc, and then click Add.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
5.
12-31
Add the existing EDM namespace and class name to the declaration of the generic Countries class, CustomerManagementModel.Entities. [Visual Basic] Public Class Countries Inherits DataService(Of CustomerManagementModel.Entities) [Visual C#] public class Countries : DataService
•
In the App_Code/Countries.vb or App_Code/Countries.cs window, modify the following class definition code from, [Visual Basic] Public Class Countries ' TODO: replace [[class name]] with your data class name Inherits DataService(Of [[class name]]) [Visual C#] public class Countries: DataService< /* TODO: put your data source class name here */ >
to: [Visual Basic] Public Class Countries Inherits DataService(Of CustomerManagementModel.Entities) [Visual C#] public class Countries : DataService
6.
Allow read access to the Countries and Customers entities of the EDM by using the IDataServiceConfiguration.SetEntitySetAccessRule method in the Shared or static InitializeService method of the DataService class. [Visual Basic] config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Countries", EntitySetRights.AllRead) config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Customers", EntitySetRights.AllRead) [Visual C#] config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Countries", EntitySetRights.AllRead); config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Customers", EntitySetRights.AllRead);
•
In the App_Code/Countries.vb or App_Code/Countries.cs window, replace the following code of the class definition, [Visual Basic] ' TODO: set rules to indicate which entity sets and service operations are visible, updatable, etc. ' Examples: ' config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("MyEntityset", EntitySetRights.AllRead) ' config.SetServiceOperationAccessRule("MyServiceOperation", ServiceOperationRights.All) [Visual C#] // TODO: set rules to indicate which entity sets and service operations are visible, updatable, etc. // Examples: // config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("MyEntityset", EntitySetRights.AllRead);
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-32
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
// config.SetServiceOperationAccessRule("MyServiceOperation", ServiceOperationRights.All);
with: [Visual Basic] config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Countries", EntitySetRights.AllRead) config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Customers", EntitySetRights.AllRead) [Visual C#] config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Countries", EntitySetRights.AllRead); config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Customers", EntitySetRights.AllRead);
7.
8.
Save and close the Countries code-behind file. •
In the CustomerManagement – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the File menu, click either Save App_Code/Countries.vb or Save App_Code/Countries.cs.
•
In the App_Code/Countries.vb or App_Code/Countries.cs window, click the Close button.
Build the solution. •
9.
In the CustomerManagement – Microsoft Visual Studio window, on the Build menu, click Build Solution.
View the service in the browser. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click Countries.svc, and then click View in Browser.
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains both Countries and Customers entities. 10. View the Countries entity by browsing to the URL http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc/Countries or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc/Countries. •
In the Address bar of Internet Explorer, type http://localhost:1111 /CustomerManagement/Countries.svc/Countries or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries, and then press ENTER.
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains all the Countries from the data model. Notice how it looks similar to the way Dynamic Data applies routing, by appending the name of the entity to the URL. 11. View the Customers entity by browsing to the URL http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc/Customers or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc/Customers. •
In the Address bar of Internet Explorer, type http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Customers or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Customers, and then press ENTER.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-33
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains all the Customers from the data model. 12. View the information for the last name, Abercrombie, by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Customers?$filter=LastName eq 'Abercrombie' or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Customers?$filter=LastName eq 'Abercrombie'. •
In the Address bar of Internet Explorer, type http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Customers?$filter=LastName eq 'Abercrombie' or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Customers?$filter=LastName eq 'Abercrombie', and then press ENTER.
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains a single customer, Kim Abercrombie. Mention that the $filter operator is used with the LastName column. That column cannot be queried directly, because it is not the primary key of the entity. 13. View the countries for which the InternetTLD starts with less than B by using the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B' or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B'. •
In the Address bar of Internet Explorer, type http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B' or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B', and then press ENTER.
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains all countries for which the InternetTLD starts with less than B. Mention that the $filter operator is used with the Name column. That column cannot be queried directly, because it is not the primary key of the entity. 14. Close Internet Explorer. •
In the http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B' – Windows Internet Explorer or http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Countries.svc /Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B' – Windows Internet Explorer window, click the Close button.
15. Close Visual Studio 2010. •
In the CustomerManagement – Microsoft Visual Studio window, click the Close button.
Question: Which template will you use to add a WCF Data Service to a project in Visual Studio 2010? Answer: You can use the WCF Data Service item template to add a WCF Data Service item to a project in Visual Studio 2010.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-34
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Additional Reading For more information about the URI format for addressing WCF Data Services Resources, see Addressing Resources (WCF Data Services) at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=193102&clcid=0x409. For more information about WCF Data Services query operators, see Query Operators (WCF Data Services) at http://go.microsoft.com /fwlink/?LinkID=193103&clcid=0x409.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-35
Examining a WCF Data Service
Key Points You can add the WCF Data Service, and then examine Data Service files. The WCF Data Service contains a markup file and a code file.
Markup File The WCF Data Service markup file is the Customers.svc file, which is also known as the hosting file for the WCF Data Service. The Factory attribute should always stay the same. You can change the Service attribute if you are using an ASP.NET Web application, but not an ASP.NET Web site. The Service attribute refers to the class that defines the data service.
Code File The WCF Data Service code file is either App_Code/Customers.vb or App_Code/Customers.cs. The DataService class is where you add operations and set the access rules for the entities. Locate this class in the App_Code folder of the Web site root folder when using a WCF Data Service in an ASP.NET Web site. Question: Which attribute in the markup or host file refers to the code-behind file or the class that defines the data service?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-36
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab: Consuming Windows Communication Foundation Services
Note: You can perform tasks in this lab either by using the Visual Basic or Visual C# programming language. If you are using Visual Basic as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in the Section 1 of the lab page. If you are using Visual C# as your programming language, refer to the steps provided in Section 2 of the lab page.
Introduction In this lab, you will discover the WCF service at a specific address by using a .svc file. In addition, you will create a service reference proxy for the Customers WCF service, and call the WCF service method from a Web Form. Finally, you will implement and test a WCF Data Service.
Objectives After completing this lab, you will be able to: •
Reuse existing functionality exposed by using WCF Services.
•
Discover WCF Services.
•
Create a Service reference proxy for a WCF service.
•
Call the WCF Service method from a Web Form by using the Service reference proxy.
•
Implement and test a WCF Data Service.
Lab Setup For this lab, you will use the available virtual machine environment. Before you begin the lab, you must: •
Start the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine, and then log on by using the following credentials: • •
User name: Student Password: Pa$$w0rd
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-37
Lab Scenario
You are a developer at Contoso, Ltd, which is a large organization with a global customer base. You need to implement a Web Form that can be called by external customers to retrieve the information in your database. The senior developer has created a WCF Web service that exposes a method that returns the countries, and the WCF service method will be available to some customers. However, other customers need to see the country data on a Web page. Therefore, it is your responsibility to discover the WCF service from within your Web site, create a proxy object to call the WCF service method from a new Web Form, and display the returned countries. Finally, you need to implement and test a WCF Data Service.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-38
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 1: Visual Basic Exercise 1: Creating a WCF Service Reference Proxy The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Discover the WCF services at a specific address by using a .svc file.
3.
Examine the Web reference files.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M12\VB folder.
Task 2: Discover the WCF services at a specific address by using a .svc file •
Open the Add Service Reference dialog box.
•
Browse the WCF services at a specific address, http://localhost:1112/Services/Customers.svc.
•
Open the Customers WCF services.
•
View the operations of the Customers WCF service.
Note: Notice the single method, GetCountries, in the Operations pane. •
Specify the service reference name as CustomersService.
Task 3: Examine the Web reference files •
Open the Reference.svcmap file, and examine the Web reference files.
Note: Notice that the MetadataFile elements and ExtensionFile elements point to the Customers.wsdl, Customers.xsd, Customers1.xsd, Customers.disco, and Customers2.xsd files, and configuration91.svcinfo and configuration.svcinfo files respectively. •
Close the Reference.svcmap file.
•
Open the Customers.disco file, and examine the Web reference files.
Note: Notice the discovery file contains the contractRef element that links to other documents, including the WSDL, and documentation on the server. •
Close the Customers.disco file. •
In the App_WebReferences/CustomersService/Customers.disco window, click the Close button.
•
Open the Customers.wsdl file, and examine the Web reference files.
•
In Solution Explorer, right-click Customers.wsdl, and then click Open.
Note: View the WSDL for the WCF service, its methods, and the bindings. This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
•
12-39
Close the Customers.wsdl file.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have discovered a WCF service and seen its methods, by using the WCF service file with the extension, .svc.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-40
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Calling a WCF Service Method from a Web Form The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Create the Customers Web Form.
2.
Add controls for specifying countries to return.
3.
Add a GridView control.
4.
Call the WCF service.
5.
Test the Customers Web Form.
Task 1: Create the Customers Web Form •
Create a folder named Services.
•
Add a Web Form named Customers, to the Services folder. The Web Form should not be based on a master page.
Note: The Customers Web Form should not be based on a master page. •
Set the page title to Countries by Contoso.
•
Link the Styles/Site.css stylesheet to the Customers Web Form. Countries by Contoso
Task 2: Add controls for specifying countries to return •
Add a Label control named StartingLettersLabel, to the div element of the Customers Web Form.
•
Add a TextBox control named StartingLettersTextBox, to the div element of the Customers Web Form, for specifying the starting letters of the countries to return.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named StartingLettersRequiredFieldValidator, for requiring input in the StartingLettersTextBox control.
•
Add a Button control named GetCountriesButton, to the div element of the Customers Web Form. Create the Click event handler.
Task 3: Add a GridView control •
Add a GridView control named CustomersGridView, to the div element of the Customers Web Form, using a style of DDGridView.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
•
Close the Customers Web Form.
Task 4: Call the WCF service •
Import the CustomersService namespace to the Customers Web Form. Imports CustomersService
•
In the GetCountriesButton.Click event, declare and instantiate an instance of the CustomersClient class, named customersService. Dim customersService As New CustomersClient()
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
•
12-41
Call the GetCountries WCF service method, passing the content of the Text property of the StartingLettersTextBox TextBox control, and assign the return value to the DataSource property of the CustomersGridView control. CustomersGridView.DataSource = customersService.GetCountries(StartingLettersTextBox.Text)
•
Implement data binding for the CustomersGridView control. CustomersGridView.DataBind()
•
Save the code-behind file of the Customers Web Form.
Task 5: Test the Customers Web Form •
View the Customers Web Form in the browser.
•
Get all countries beginning with the letter a.
•
Close the Internet Explorer browser.
•
Close the Customers Web Form.
Result: After completing this exercise, you will have created a Customers Web Form, and added controls for specifying countries to return. Additionally, you will have added a GridView control, and called the WCF service. Finally, you will have tested the Customers Web Form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-42
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Implementing WCF Data Services The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a WCF Data Service.
2.
Test the Data Service.
Task 1: Add a WCF Data Service •
Add a new WCF Data Service in the Services folder named CustomersWcfDS, by using the Add New Item dialog box and the WCF Data Service template.
•
Add the existing EDM namespace and class name to the declaration of the generic CustomerManagementModel.Entities. Public Class CustomersWcfDS Inherits DataService(Of CustomerManagementModel.Entities)
•
Allow read access to the Countries and Customers entities of the EDM by using the IDataServiceConfiguration.SetEntitySetAccessRule method in the Shared InitializeService method of the DataService class. config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Countries", EntitySetRights.AllRead) config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Customers", EntitySetRights.AllRead)
•
Save and close the CustomersWcfDS code-behind file.
•
Move the CustomersWcfDS code-behind file from the Services\App_Code folder to the App_Code folder in the root folder.
•
Delete the App_Code folder from the Services folder.
Task 2: Test the Data Service •
Run the application.
•
View the entities available with the Customers Data Service by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc.
Note: Notice that the XML that was returned from the service contains both the Countries and Customers entities. •
View the Countries entity by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc/Countries.
Note: Notice that the XML that was returned from the service contains all of the Countries from the data model. •
View the Customers entity by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc/Customers.
Note: Notice the XML that was returned from the service contains all of the Customers from the data model.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
•
12-43
View the information for the country, India, by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc/Countries?$filter=Name eq 'India'.
Note: Notice the XML that was returned from the service contains a single country, India. •
View the countries for which the InternetTLD starts with less than B by using the URL, http://localhost:1111/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc/Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B'.
Note: Notice the XML that was returned from the service contains all countries for which the InternetTLD starts with less than B. •
Close Internet Explorer.
Task 3: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added and tested a WCF Data Service.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-44
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Section 2: Visual C# Exercise 1: Creating a WCF Service Reference Proxy The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Open an existing ASP.NET Web site.
2.
Discover the WCF services at a specific address by using a .svc file.
3.
Examine the Web reference files.
Task 1: Open an existing ASP.NET Web site •
Log on to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine as Student, with the password, Pa$$w0rd.
•
Open Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
•
Open the CustomerManagement solution from the D:\Labfiles\Starter\M12\CS folder.
Task 2: Discover the WCF services at a specific address by using a .svc file •
Open the Add Service Reference dialog box.
•
Browse the WCF services at http://localhost:1112/Services/Customers.svc.
•
Open the Customers WCF services.
•
View the operations of the Customers WCF service.
Note: Notice the single method, GetCountries, in the Operations pane. •
Specify the service reference name as CustomersService.
Task 3: Examine the Web reference files •
Open the Reference.svcmap file and examine the Web reference files.
Note: Notice that the MetadataFile elements, and ExtensionFile elements, point to the Customers.wsdl, Customers.xsd, Customers1.xsd, Customers.disco, and Customers2.xsd files, and configuration91.svcinfo and configuration.svcinfo files respectively. •
Close the Reference.svcmap file.
•
Open the Customers.disco file, and examine the Web reference files.
Note: Notice the discovery file contains the contractRef element that link to other documents, including the WSDL and documentation on the server. •
Close the Customers.disco file. •
•
In the App_WebReferences/CustomersService/Customers.disco window, click the Close button.
Open the Customers.wsdl file, and examine the Web reference files. •
In Solution Explorer, right-click Customers.wsdl, and then click Open.
Note: View the WSDL for the WCF service, its methods, and the bindings.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
•
12-45
Close the Customers.wsdl file.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have discovered a WCF service and viewed its methods, by using the WCF service file with the extension, .svc.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-46
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 2: Calling a WCF Service Method from a Web Form The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Create the Customers Web Form.
2.
Add controls for specifying countries to return.
3.
Add a GridView control.
4.
Call the WCF service.
5.
Test the Customers Web Form.
Task 1: Create the Customers Web Form •
Create a folder named Services.
•
Add a Web Form named Customers, to the Services folder. The Web Form should not be based on a master page.
Note: The Customers Web Form should not be based on a master page. •
Set the page title to Countries by Contoso.
•
Link the Styles/Site.css stylesheet to the Customers Web Form. Countries by Contoso
Task 2: Add controls for specifying countries to return •
Add a Label control named StartingLettersLabel, to the div element of the Customers Web Form.
•
Add a TextBox control named StartingLettersTextBox, to the div element of the Customers Web Form, for specifying the starting letters for the countries to return.
•
Add a RequiredFieldValidator control named StartingLettersRequiredFieldValidator, for requiring input in the StartingLettersTextBox control.
•
Add a Button control named GetCountriesButton, to the div element of the Customers Web Form. Create the Click event handler.
Task 3: Add a GridView control •
Add a GridView control named CustomersGridView, using a style of DDGridView, to the div element of the Customers Web Form.
•
Save the Customers Web Form.
•
Close the Customers Web Form.
Task 4: Call the WCF service •
Import the CustomersService namespace to the Customers Web Form. using CustomersService;
•
In the GetCountriesButton.Click event, declare and instantiate an instance of the CustomersClient class, named customersService. CustomersClient customersService = new CustomersClient();
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
•
12-47
Call the GetCountries WCF service method, passing the content of the Text property of the StartingLettersTextBox TextBox control, and assign the return value to the DataSource property of the CustomersGridView control. CustomersGridView.DataSource = customersService.GetCountries(StartingLettersTextBox.Text);
•
Implement data binding for the CustomersGridView control. CustomersGridView.DataBind();
•
Save the code-behind file of the Customers Web Form.
Task 5: Test the Customers Web Form •
View the Customers Web Form in the browser.
•
Get all countries beginning with the letter a.
•
Close the Internet Explorer browser.
•
Close the Customers Web Form.
Result: After completing this exercise, you will have created a Customers Web Form, and added controls for specifying countries to return. Additionally, you will have added a GridView control, and called the WCF service. Finally, you will have tested the Customers Web Form.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-48
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Exercise 3: Implementing WCF Data Services The main tasks for this exercise are as follows: 1.
Add a WCF Data Service.
2.
Test the Data Service.
Task 1: Add a WCF Data Service •
Add a new WCF Data Service in the Services folder named CustomersWcfDS, by using the Add New Item dialog box and the WCF Data Service template.
•
Add the existing EDM namespace and class name to the declaration of the generic CustomerManagementModel.Entities. public class Customers : DataService
•
Allow read access to the Countries and Customers entities of the EDM by using the IDataServiceConfiguration.SetEntitySetAccessRule method in the Shared InitializeService method of the DataService class. config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Countries", EntitySetRights.AllRead); config.SetEntitySetAccessRule("Customers", EntitySetRights.AllRead);
•
Save and close the CustomersWcfDS code-behind file.
•
Move the CustomersWcfDS code-behind file from the Services\App_Code folder to the App_Code folder in the root folder.
•
Delete the App_Code folder from the Services folder.
Task 2: Test the Data Service •
Run the application.
•
View the entities available with the Customers Data Service by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc.
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains both the Countries and Customers entities. •
View the Countries entity by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1110 /CustomerManagement/Services/CustomersWcfDS.svc/Countries.
Note: Notice that the XML returned from the service contains all of the Countries from the data model. •
View the Customers entity by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1110 /CustomerManagement/Services/CustomersWcfDS.svc/Customers.
Note: Notice the XML returned from the service, it contains all of the Customers from the data model. •
View the information for the country, India, by browsing to the URL, http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc/Countries?$filter=Name eq 'India'.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-49
Note: Notice the XML returned from the service, it contains a single country, India. •
View the countries for which the InternetTLD starts with less than B by using the URL, http://localhost:1110/CustomerManagement/Services /CustomersWcfDS.svc/Countries?$filter=InternetTLD lt 'B'.
Note: Notice the XML returned from the service, it contains all countries for which the InternetTLD starts with less than B. •
Close Internet Explorer.
Task 3: Turn off the virtual machine and revert the changes •
Turn off the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
•
Revert the changes made to the 10267A-GEN-DEV virtual machine.
Results: After completing this exercise, you will have added and tested a WCF Data Service.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-50
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
Lab Review
Review Questions and Answers 1.
What are the elements in the Customers.discomap file?
2.
How do you define data source to the CustomersGridView control?
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Consuming Microsoft® Windows Communication Foundation Services
12-51
Module Review and Takeaways
Review Questions and Answers 1.
Does a WCF service have a user interface?
2.
How do you access a WCF service from a Web Form?
3.
What is the name of the dialog box that you can use to add a reference to a WCF service in Visual Studio 2010?
Real-World Issues and Scenarios 1.
You need to expose data to a client that does not have access to your intranet. What is the easiest way to implement this? You should create and publish a WCF service.
2.
You need to expose data internally to a variety of clients, including Web applications, Windows Forms, and console applications. What is the best way to implement this? Create and publish a WCF service, because it will allow different types of hosting and different types of connections, all depending on the actual connectivity requirements of the consuming application.
Best Practices Mention some best practices in the context of your own business situations. •
When you expose data externally through a service, or you do not know who will be accessing your service, you should always return any data using data types that map to simple data types, such as strings and integers, which can be used directly with XML.
•
When you add a reference to a WCF service, always give the service reference a name that spells out what the service reference refers to. Do not use the default names, such as ServiceReference1.
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
12-52
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft® Visual Studio® 2010
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
QuickStart Intelligence
Notes
This is a unique copy of the course material identified by code b67a4674-036e-4ef4-a5a9-1dda5be2511b, and provided to you by QuickStart Intelligence. It is illegal to reprint, redistribute, or resell this content. The Licensed Content is licensed "as-is." Microsoft does not support this Licensed Content in any way and Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. Please report any unauthorized use of this content to
[email protected] or by calling +1 800-785-3448.
